Skip to main content

Full text of "A treatise on the hidden nature, and the treatment of intermitting and remitting fevers; illustrated by various experiments and observations"

See other formats


IN  DEO  CONFJDO.  j  fc 


! 


7kiO--i^      0  e  #*  t/'Y/  ^ 


A  TREATISE 

ON  THE  HIDDEN  NATURE, 

AND   THE 

TREATMENT  OF  INTERMITTING 

AND  REMITTING  FEVERS  ; 

ILLUSTRATED  BY  VARIOUS  EXPERIMENTS  AND  OBSERVATIONS 

IN  TWO  BOOKS; 

BY  JEAN  SENAC,  M.  D. 

TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  LATIN,   WITH  NOTES, 


BY  CHARLES  CALDWELL,  M.  D. 


AND 


A  RECOMMENDATORY  PREFACE. 

BY  BENJAMIN  RUSH,  M.  D.  &c. 


PHILADELPHIA  .- 

PRINTED  AND  SOLD  BY  KIMBER,  CONRAD,  c?  CO 
NO.  93,  MARKET  STREET, 

AND    NO.    170,    SOUTH    SECOND    STREET. 

1805. 


District  of  Pennsylvania,  to  zvit  : 

BE  IT  REMEMBERED,  That  on  the  twenty-fifth  day  of 
October,  in  the  thirtieth  year  of  the  independence  of  the  United 
States  of  America,  A.  D.  1805,  Kimber,  Conrad,  &  Co.  of  the  said 
District,  have  deposited  in  this  Office,  the  Title  of  a  Book,  the  right 
whereof  they  claim  as  Proprietors,  in  the  Words  following-,  to  wit : 

A  Treatise  on  the  hidden  nature,  and  the  Treatment  of  Intermit- 
ting  and  Remitting  Fevers,  illustrated  by  various  Experiments  and 
Observations  :  in  Two  Books ;  by  yean  Senac,  M.  D.  Translated 
from  the  Latin,  with  Notes,  by  Charles  Caldwell,  M.  D.  and  a  re- 
commendatory Preface,  by  Benjamin  Rush,  M.  D.  &c. 

In  conformity  to  the  Act  of  the  Congress  of  the  United 
States,  intitled,  "  An  Act  for  the  Encouragement  of  Learning,  by 
securing  the  Copies  of  Maps,  Charts,  and  Books,  to  the  Authors  and 
Proprietors  of  such  Copies  during  the  times  therein  mentioned."  And 
also  to  the  Act,  entitled  "  An  Act  supplementary  to  an  Act,  entitled, 
«  An  Act  for  the  Encouragement  of  Learning,  by  securing  the  Copies 
of  Maps,  Charts,  and  Books,  to  the  Authors  and  Proprietors  of  such 
Copies  during  the  Times  therein  mentioned,"  and  extending  the  bene- 
tits  thereof  to  the  Arts  of  designing,  engraving,  and  etching  historical 
and  other  Prints." 

D.   CALDWELL, 

Clerk  of  the  District  of  Pennsylvania. 


C 

Coil, 

ROob 
1905" 


l*7Z/, 


CONTENTS. 


BOOK  THE  FIRST. 


OF   THE    NATURE 

OF  INTERMITTING  AND  REMITTING  FEVERS. 

CHAP.  I.     Of  the  various  kinds  of  Intermittents.       -       page  1 
CHAP.  II.     Of  the  various  causes  of  Intermittents  as  laid 

down  by  certain  medical  writers. 7 

CHAP.  III.     Of  other  and  more  probable  causes.  12 

CHAP.  IV.     Of  the  remote  causes.  -  -  18 

CHAP.  V.     Of  the  febrile  rigor,  or  cold  stage  offerer.       -         23 
CHAP.  VI.     Of  the  effects  of  the  cold  stage  of  fever.         -         30 
CHAP.  VII.  Of  the  hot  and  sweating  stages  of  fever.         -        38 
CHAP.  VIII.     Of  the  state  of  apyrexy  or  freedom  from  fe- 
ver, which  succeeds  each  paroxysm.        -----         47 

CHAP.  IX.  Of  the  cause  of  the  disappearance  and  recur- 
rence of  the  fever  at  stated  periods.         52 

CHAP.  X.     Whether  or  not  any  thing  can  be  deduced  from 
other  morbid  affections,  or  from  the  action  of  the  various  parts 
of  the  body,  to  enable  us  to  discover  the  cause  offebrile  periods.         60 
CHAP.  XI.     Of  the  diversified  action  of  the  febrile  cause  68 

CHAP.  XII.  Of  febrile  affections,  which,  though  differ- 
ent from  intermittents,  assume  their  external  appearance.         -         75 

CHAP.  XIII.  Of  affections,  the  mask  or  external  character 
of  which,  is  sometimes  put  on  by  intermittents  that  have  degene- 
rated from  their  own  nature.  - 81 

CHAP.  XIV.  Of  the  malignant  form  of  intermittents.         -         89 
CHAP.  XV.     Of  the  change  of  intermittents  into  remittents 

and  continued  fevers. 99 

CHAP.  XVI.  Various  observations  adduced  in  confirms 
;  ion  of  the  foregoing  opinions  and  doctrines.  -  -         -         108 

CHAP.  XVII.  Further  observations,  setting  forth  the  va- 
riety and  danger  of  such  fevers 113 


CONTENTS. 

CHAP.  XVIII.     Of  the  method  of  detecting  or  distinguish- 
ing intermittents,  when  disguised  under  the  mask  or  appearance 

of  other  diseases.  - 120 

CHAP.   XIX.  Of  the  consequences  to  be  apprehended  from 
the  leading  symptoms  of  the  fevers  under  consideration.      -         -       126 
CHAP.  XX    Of  various  affections  attendant  on  intermittents.    135 
CHAP.  XXI.  Of  affections  which  remain  after  the  febrile 
form  of  the  disease  has  been  removed.  -  142 

CHAP.  XXII.  Of  relapses  in  intermittents.  146 

CHAP.  XXIII.  Of  the  morbid  appearances  discovered  in  the 
dissection  of  the  bodies  of  those  that  have  died  of  intermittents.       152 


BOOK  THE  SECOND. 


OF    THE    TREATMENT 

OF  INTERMITTING  AND  REMITTING  FEVERS. 

CHAP.  I.     Of  the   difficulty  of  curing  intermittents,  and 

wherein  that  difficulty  consists. page  159 

CHAP.  II.  Whether  or  not  all  intermittents  are  to  be  treat- 
ed with  the  same  remedies  ?  Whether  or  net  when  left  to  them- 
selves, they  terminate  or  come  to  a  crisis  spontaneously  ?  and 
whether  or  not,  an  attempt  should  be  made  to  cure  them  at  their 
very  commencement  ?  -  ------         164 

CHAP.  III.    Of  blood-letting. 170 

CHAP.  IV.     Of  cleansing  the  primje  viae.         ...         176 
CHAP.  V.     Of  the  use  of  purgatives.  184 

CHAP.  VI.     Of  the  use  of  aperients.  190 

CHAP.  VII.  At  what  time  the  remedies  mentioned  in 
the  foregoing  chapters  are  to  be  administered.         -         -         -         195 

CHAP.   VIII.     Of  the  various  methods  of   curing  fevers, 
and  first,  of  the  cure  by  means  of  sudorifics.         ...         201 
CHAP.  IX.      Of  the  mode  of  exhibiting  sudorifics  in  the 

cure  of  fevers. 206 

CHAP.  X.  Of  attempting  the  cure  of  fevers  by  specific 
medicines :  and,  first,  an  inquiry 'what  these  specifics  are,  and 


CONTENTS. 

whether  or  not  any  emetics  or  cathartics  arc  to  he  considered  as 
such. 211 

CHAP.  XI.  Whether  or  not  a  true  febrifuge  power  reside  in 
certain  sudor  i  lies,  bitters,  aperients,  and  other  remedies.        -        215 

CHAP.  XII.     Of  the  cure  by  means  of  the  peruvian  bark.         223 

CHAP.  XIII.  Of  injurious  effects  produced  by  the  peruvian 
barf!  - 229 

CHAP.  XIV.  Of  the  precautions  necessary  to  prevent  mis- 
chief in  the  administration  of  the  peruvian  bark.     ...         235 

CHAP.  XV.  Of  the  method  to  be  adopted  in  the  use  of 
the  peruvian  bark. 244 

CHAP.  XVI.  Whether  or  not  a  quartan  fever  require  a 
mode  of  treatment  peculiar  to  itself? 252 

CHAP.  XVII.  Of  impediments  arising- from  previous  af- 
fections of  certain  parts  of  the  system,  or  from  different  tempera- 
ments.   -         258 

CHAP.  XVIII.  Of  impediments  arising  from  the  fever  it- 
self, from  the  injuries  which  it  usually  does  to  various  parts  of  the 
body,  and  from  an  improper  mode  of  treatment.      -         -         .         265 

CHAP.  XIX.  Of  the  cure  of  fevers,  which,  having-  ceased 
for  a  time,  recur  again,  and  also  of  certain  symptoms  that  usually 

accompany  them. 2r3 

CHAP.  XX.     Of  the  cure  of  malignant  intermittents.       -         283 

CHAP.  XXI.  Of  the  treatment  of  common  remitting  fevers, 
and  also  of  those  of  a  malignant  nature.        ....        289 


1  '  &£ 

^j0k  ****** 


RECOMMENDATORY  PREFACE. 


THE  following  translation  of  Senac's  trea- 
tise, "  De  recondita  febrium  inter mittentium, 
"  turn  remittentium  natura,  et  de  earum  cura- 
u  tione,"  was  undertaken  by  Dr.  Caldwell,  at 
the  request  of  the  Subscriber.  He  has  long 
known  it  to  be  a  judicious  and  useful  work,  and 
has  derived  much  assistance  from  it  in  his  prac- 
tice. He  is  happy  in  this  opportunity  of  recom- 
mending it  to  the  students  of  medicine  in  the 
United  States,  as  peculiarly  calculated  to  assist 
them  in  forming  just  opinions,  of  the  nature 
and  treatment  of  the  summer  and  autumnal  dis- 
eases of  our  country. 

BENJ.  RUSH,  M.  D. 

Professor  of  the  Institutes  and  practice  of  Medicine, 
and  of  Clinical  practice  in  the  University  of 
Pennsylvania. 

June  29,  1805. 


TO  BENJAMIN  RUSH,  M.  D. 

PROFESSOR    OF  THE  INSTITUTES  AND    PRACTICE   OF   MEDICINE, 

AND  OF   CLINICAL   PRACTICE   IN   THE   UNIVERSITY  OF 

PENNSYLVANIA. 

DEAR  SIR, 

THE  following  translation  of  Senac's  cele- 
brated treatise,  on  the  nature  and  treatment  of  intermit- 
ting and  remitting  fevers,  is  inscribed  to  you,  xvithout 
your  knowledge,  because  I  am  confident  that  had  your 
permission  been  asked,  your  modesty  would  have  pre- 
vented you  from  granting  the  request.  Were  any 
apology  necessary,  on  my  part,  for  the  liberty  I  have 
taken,  it  could  be  easily  found  in  the  relation  in  which 
you  stand  to  the  work.  You  first  taught  in  your  lectures 
the  important  truths  which  have  long  lain  concealed  in 
it,  under  the  garb  of  the  Latin  language,  and  have  also 
been  eminently  instrumental  in  having  them  now  stript 
of  this  dark  and  dead  covering,  and  clothed  in  the  lan- 
guage of  the  United  States.  Of  the  reality  and  use- 
fulness of  these  truths,  it  is  only  an  echo  of  public 
acclamation,  to  say,  that  you  are  one  of  the  ablest  judges 
now  living,  as  well  as  their  most  distinguished  and  suc- 
cessful teacher.  These  circumstances  would  be  alone 
sufficient  to  designate  you,  even  in  the  public  eye,  as 
the  most  proper  and  natural  patron  of  the  work. 

But  I  am  actuated,  also,  by  other  considerations, 
which,  though  more  private  and  personal  in  their  na- 
ture, are  not  with  me  less  powerful  in  their  operation. 
These  considerations,  were  they  to  be  even  rejected  by 
the  judgment,  would  appeal  to  the  feelings,  and  though 


DEDICATION. 

repulsed  from  the  head,  could  never  fail  to  gain  admis- 
sion to  the  heart. 

During  an  intercourse  of  some  continuance,  particu- 
larly during  the  term  of  my  medical  pupilage,  and  the 
first  years  of  my  practice  as  a  physician,  I  received  from 
you  many  acts  of  attention  and  courtesy,which  as  a  young 
man  and  a  stranger  in  the  place,  impressed  me  deeply 
at  the  time,  and  have  still  continued  to  be  sources  of 
grateful  recollection.  Out  of  these  civilities,  obliga- 
tions naturally  arose  on  my  part,  which  our  relative 
situation  has  not  yet  allowed  me  to  cancel.  It  is  even 
possible,  that  an  opportunity  of  cancelling  them  may 
never  occur.  I  must,  therefore,  beg  your  acceptance 
cf  this  dedication  as  some  acknowledgment  of  them, 
accompanied  by  my  sincere  wishes  for  a  long  continu- 
ance of  your  health,  happiness,  and  useful  labours.  For 
however  grateful,  in  the  evening  of  life,  the  otlum  in 
secessu  honestum  may  be  to  a  philosophical  and  con- 
templative mind,  I  am  unable  to  wish  you  such  a  re- 
tirement. It  is  enough  that  we  should  be  deprived  of 
your  labours  and  services  when  you  shall  have  gone  to 
enjoy  the  reward  of  them  in  a  better  world. 

CH.  CALDWELL. 

Philadelphia,  Oct.  23,  1805. 


PREFACE, 


BY  THE  TRANSLATOR. 


THE  following  treatise  on  the  nature  and  treat- 
ment of  intermitting  and  remitting  fever,  after  having 
lain  for  many  years  entombed  in  the  catacomb  of  a  dead 
language,  is  now  for  the  first  time  introduced  to  the 
light,  through  the  medium  of  a  living  one.  Viewing 
it  in  itself  and  in  its  several  relations,  it  presents,  as 
the  translator  conceives,  a  well  supported  claim  to  the 
attention  and  patronage  of  the  physicians  of  the  United 
States.  He,  therefore,  flatters  himself  that  its  recep- 
tion among  them  will  not  be  unfavourable,  but  that  it 
will  be  regarded  as  a  valuable  if  not  a  necessary  addi- 
tion to  most  of  their  libraries.  Besides  containing  much 
matter  calculated  to  interest  the  scientific  and  to  in- 
struct the  practical  physician,  it  is  the  production  of  a 
character  of  great  celebrity  and  worth.  Indeed  in  what- 
ever light  it  be  considered,  whether  in  relation  to  its 
origin,  its  execution,  or  its  object,  it  will  be  found  alike 
respectable,  masterly,  and  useful.  To  such  readers  as 
are  pleased  with  slight  biographical  notices,  a  few  re- 
marks on  the  subject  of  its  origin  may  not  be  unac- 
ceptable. 


PREFACE. 

The  name  of  Dr.  Senac,  the  author  of  the  work,  is 
deservedly  enrolled  among  those  of  the  most  distin- 
guished physicians  of  France.  Though  educated  with 
a  view  to  holy  orders,  yet  an  early  inclination  which 
nothing  could  resist,  led  him  at  length  to  the  profes- 
sion of  medicine.  He  flourished  in  th  reign  of  Louis 
XV.  and  stood  high  in  the  estimation  and  favour  of  his 
royal  master.  Besides  being  for  a  considerable  length 
of  time  first  physician  to  that  monarch,  wThose  favour- 
ites were  selected  on  account  of  their  pre-eminence  in 
talents  and  worth,  he  had  conferred  on  him  the  hono- 
rary titles  of  Counsellor  of  State,  and  Superintendant 
General  of  the  mineral  waters  of  the  kingdom  of 
France.  He  was  also  elected  to  a  seat  in  the  Academy 
of  sciences  at  Paris,  an  institution  choice  and  rigid  be- 
yond all  others  in  its  admission  of  members.  Of  these 
several  places  and  appointments  he  proved  himself  to 
be  even  more  than  worthy,  for  it  was  always  considered 
that  he  was  rather  an  ornament  to  them  than  they  an 
honour  to  him.  He  was  one  of  those  self-dependent 
characters  who  shine  not  with  borrowed  light,  but  like 
an  electron  per  se,  contain  their  lustre  within  them- 
selves. He  died  in  the  year  1770,  and  was  followed  to 
the  grave  by  the  regret  of  the  literary  characters  of  his 
time,  and  the  tears  of  thousands  whose  sufferings  had 
been  often  times  alleviated  by  his  skill.  Besides  the 
present  treatise,  he  left  behind  him  "  A  treatise  on  the 
causes  of  acids  and  the  cure  of  the  plague"  "  A  trans- 
lation  of  Heister^s  anatomy"  "  Anexv  course  of  chemis- 
try, and  "  A  treatise  on  the  structure  of  the  heart." 
This  latter  work  is  the  most  extensive  and  weighty  of 
all  his  writings.  It  is  said  to  have  been  the  result  of 
twenty  years  application  and  enquiry.     It  is  a  work  of 


PREFACE. 

great  learning,  and  is  considered  by  the  anatomists  and 
physiologists  of  France,  as  a  master  piece  for  depth 
and  accuracy  of  research. 

To  the  skill  of  the  physician,  the  science  of  the  phi- 
losopher, and  the  learning  of  the  scholar,  Dr.  Senac, 
added  the  accomplishments  of  the  gentleman,  and  even 
the  exquisite  polish  and  elegance  of  the  courtier.  He 
possessed,  in  an  uncommon  degree,  the  happy,  but  rare, 
art  of  appearing  to  equal  advantage  and  acquitting  him- 
self with  equal  effect,  whether  seated  by  the  bed  of 
sickness,  immured  in  his  closet,  or  surrounded  by  the 
splendid  circles  of  a  court.  It  is  scarcely  necessary  to 
add,  that  these  various  qualifications  and  excellencies, 
which  are  so  seldom  united  in  the  same  person,  secur- 
ed to  Dr.  Senac  for  many  years  his  choice  of  business 
in  the  metropolis  of  France. 

With  regard  to  the  real  merit  of  the  present  work, 
there  can  be  little  doubt  but  various  and  even  opposite 
opinions  will  be  formed.  For  it  is  true  that  many  phy- 
sicians are  too  apt  to  make  their  own  customary  modes 
of  thinking  and  practising,  the  standard  of  truth  and 
excellence  in  others.  Perhaps  this  is  more  particularly 
the  case  with  those,  whose  reading  and  enquiries  have 
been  on  too  limited  a  scale  to  enable  them  to  be  even 
tolerable  judges. 

The  translator  has  no  wish  to  forestall  public  senti- 
ment on  the  present  occasion.  Nor,  if  he  even  had,  is 
he  vain  enough  to  fancy  himself  equal  to  such  an  un- 
dertaking. It  is  one  of  the  felicities  of  a  free  country 
that  public  opinion  is  too  independant  to  bow  to  the 


PREFACE. 

sceptre  or  submit  to  the  controul  of  any  individual.    If, 
however,  it  be  admissible  for  him  to  offer  a  remark  or 
two  on  the  subject,  he  will  briefly  observe,  that  he  re- 
collects no  work  in  any  language,  which  comprizes  such 
an  extent  and  rich  variety  of  general  and  practical  in- 
formation respecting  the  nature  and  treatment  of  inter- 
mitting fever,  as  the  treatise  before  us.      It  is  one  of 
those  rare  productions  in  medicine,  thatmay  be  denom- 
inated a  work  of  principle  as  well  as  fact.       For  our 
author  has  shewn  himself  to  be  able  not  only  to  observe 
and  to  collect,  but  also  to  digest,  arrange,  and  general- 
ize.    Though  the  work  contains  here  and  there  certain 
fanciful  points   of  doctrine   and  hypothesis,  that   are 
known  to  be  erroneous,  and  that  have  been  long  since 
exploded,  it  bears  no  mark  of  having  arisen  from  the 
pen  of  either  a  theorist  or  a  copyist.     It  exhibits  every 
where  the  strokes  of  a  master  if  not  of  an  original  in  his 
profession.   In  composing  it,  Dr.  Senac  appears  to  have 
had  no  pre-existing  model  in  view.     He  described  dis- 
eases  as  he  had  seen  them,   and  recommended  that 
practice  which  he  had  found  most  successful.     Like 
Hippocrates  of  Greece,  Sydenham  of  England,  and  a 
physician  now  living  in  the  United  States,  whose  mo- 
desty would  be  offended  were  I  to  mention  his  name, 
he  took  nature  for  his  text-book  and  observation  for  his 
interpreter,  disregarding  alike  the  theories  of  his  prede- 
cessors and  the  dogmas  of  the  schools.      Persevering 
in  this  plan,  he  necessarily  produced  a  work  of  fact 
and  experience,  interspersed  with  much  original  re- 
mark and  forcible  reasoning.      He  oftentimes,  indeed, 
refers  to  preceding  writers,  and  speaks  of  them  in  terms 
respectful  and  modest.     But  he  quotes  them  rather  for 
their  facts  than  their  opinions;  for  what  they  have  seen 


PREFACE. 

rather  than  for  what  they  have  thought.  He  does  hom- 
age to  them  no  further  than  they  appear  to  him  to 
have  done  homage  to  nature.  With  the  genius,  judg- 
ment, and  experience  of  Cleghorn,  he  has  given  a 
much  more  general  and  complete  treatise  on  Intermit- 
tents  than  that  able  and  excellent  author  attempted. 
Cleghorn's  celebrated  treatise  on  the  diseases  of  Mi- 
norca has  somewhat  of  alocaland  circumscribed  charac- 
ter ;  but  the  treatise  of  Senac  is  as  general  as  the  preva- 
lence, and  as  varied  as  the  nature,  of  Intermittents  them- 
selves. It  describes  them  in  all  their  forms,  and  un- 
masks them  in  all  their  disguises. 

In  clothing  this  treatise  in  the  English  language, 
the  translator  has  had  other  objects  in  view,  than  that 
of  merely  putting  the  physicians  of  the  United  States 
in  possession  of  one  single  work  of  merit.     He  wishes 
to  become  instrumental  in  directing  them  to  an  impor- 
tant source   of  information,  to  which  he  apprehends 
they  have  hitherto  paid  but   little   attention.     He   al- 
ludes to  the  medical  writings  on  the  continent  of  Eu- 
rope.   It  is  greatly  to  be  lamented,  that,  owing  to  their 
being  published  in  Latin,  or  some  foreign  language  not 
much  read  in  the  United  States,  these  writings  have 
had  but  a  very   limited  circulation  among  us.     For 
what  we  know  respecting  them  we  are  chiefly  indebted 
to  British  translations  and  British  reviews.    But  this 
is  a  kind  of  dependence  neither  useful  nor  honourable 
to  us  as  a  literary  people.     It  bespeaks  a  state  of  hum- 
ble minority  from  which  it  ought  to  be  our  pride,  as  it 
is  certainly  our  interest,  to  endeavour  to  emerge. 

The  British  physicians  translate  such  foreign  pub- 
lications in  medicine  only,  as  are  accommodated  to  the 


PREFACE. 

diseases  of  their  own  climate  and  country.  But  the 
diseases  of  Great  Britain  are  very  dissimilar  to  those  of 
the  united  States.  Nor  do  they  bear  a  much  nearer 
resemblance  to  the  diseases  that  prevail  in  many  parts 
of  the  continent  of  Europe.  Medical  publications 
higly  useful  both  on  the  continent  of  Europe  and  in  the 
United  States,  may,  in  a  practical  point  of  view,  be 
worth  but  very  little  to  a  physician  in  Great  Britain. 
It  is  scarcely  to  be  expected,  therefore,  that  we  should 
receive,  through  the  medium  of  the  British  press, 
those  continental  works  in  medicine,  best  accommo- 
dated to  the  diseases  of  our  own  country.  It  is  believ- 
ed that  the  present  translation  of  a  work  written  in 
France,  and  but  very  little  known  to  the  physicians  of 
Great  Britain,  will  serve  as  a  confirmation  of  the  truth 
of  these  remarks.  Perhaps  a  spirit  of  national  jealousy 
and  pride  may  have  some  influence  in  making  the  phy- 
sicians of  Great  Britain  undervalue  and  neglect  the  me- 
dical writings  of  France  and  other  nations. 

Recent  and  melancholy  experience  convinces  us, 
that  the  United  States  and  the  southern  parts  of  Eu- 
rope are  nearly  allied  to  each  other  on  the  score  of  epi- 
demic diseases  ;  for  the  same  pestilential  fever,  arising 
from  the  same  atmospherical  causes,  has  committed 
the  most  deplorable  ravages  in  both  places.  But,  owing 
to  a  different  state  and  temperature  of  atmosphere, 
both  Great  Britain  and  the  more  northerly  countries  of 
Europe  are  exempt  from  this  calamity. 

Indeed  if  we  compare  the  climate  and  summer  tem- 
perature of  the  United  states  with  those  of  Spain,  Por- 
tugal, Italy,  and  some  parts  of  France,  we  will  be  at 
once  convinced  that  these  several  countries  must  neces- 


PREFACE. 

sarily  be  marked  b)'  a  very  considerable  similarity  oi 
endemic  and  epidemic  diseases.  But  a  like  compari- 
son between  the  United  States  and  Great  Britain,  will 
as  readily  convince  us,  that  the  diseases  of  these  two 
portions  of  the  globe  must  be  greatly  dissimilar. 

But  our  knowledge  on  the  subject  does  not  termi- 
nate here.  We  are  taught  the  same  truths  by  a  refer- 
ence to  medical  writings.  It  is  well  known,  that  we 
look  in  vain  into  British  publications  for  accurate  ac- 
counts either  as  to  the  histories  or  modes  of  treatment 
of  our  indigenous  diseases  of  summer  and  autumn. 
But  this  is  not  equally  true  with  regard  to  certain  con- 
tinental publications.  In  them  we  find  such  state- 
ments, particularly  with  respect  to  the  histories  of  dis- 
eases, as  correspond  precisely  to  our  own  observations. 
This  is,  perhaps,  more  particularly  the  case  with  re- 
spect to  the  medical  writings  of  Italy  and  France. 

It  is  not  the  intention  of  the  translator,  by  anything 
here  advanced,  to  offer  the  least  disrespect  to  the  me- 
dical character  of  Great  Britain.  On  the  contrary,  he 
is  convinced  that  the  physicians  of  that  nation  are 
more  enlightened  than  those  of  any  other  country  of  the 
old  world.  But  their  actual  experience  in  their  pro- 
fession is  necessarily  confined  to  such  forms  of  dis- 
ease as  fall  under  their  immediate  observation.  And 
having  no  opportunity  of  witnessing  those  gigantic 
and  anomalous  forms  of  intermittents  and  remittents, 
that  oftentimes  occur  in  the  United  States,  and  in  the 
south  of  Europe,  it  is  not  to  be  expected  that  they 
should  be  capable  of  either  describing  them  accurately, 
or  teaching  their   proper  mode  of  treatment.     They 


PREFACE. 

are,  no  doubt,  masterly  physicians  in  the  climate  of 
Great  Britain,  but  very  feeble  and  unsuccessful  ones  in 
that  of  the  United  States.  To  treat  our  summer  and 
autumnal  diseases  conformably  to  the  rules  of  practice 
laid  down  in  British  publications,  would,  in  many  in- 
stances, amount  to  but  little  less  than  licenced  murder. 
From  these  remarks,  the  reader  will  be  sensible,  that 
some  of  the  British  West  and  East  India  writers  are, 
in  a  great  measure,  excepted.  Yet  even  these  do  not 
seem  to  have  been  conversant  with  forms  of  intermit- 
ting and  remitting  fever  precisely  similar  to  those  that 
occur  in  our  own  country. 

The  translator  will  only  add,  that  should  the  pre- 
sent treatise  meet  with  a  reception  corresponding  to  its 
merit,  it  is  his  intention  to  submit  to  the  American 
press,  translations  of  other  valuable  continental  works 
in  medicine. 

Philadelphia,  1 

October  3d,  1805.      5 


BOOK  FIRST, 


OF 

THE  NATURE  OF  INTERMITTING 

AND  REMITTING  FEVERS. 


CHAPTER    I. 

Of  the  various  kinds  of  Inter mittents. 

AN  intermitting  fever  is  a  disease  which 
alternately  commences  and  terminates  at  a  given 
time,  and  is  marked  by  regular  and  distinct 
periods.  On  stated  days,  for  instance,  and  at 
stated  hours  of  these  days,  a  febrile  rigor  or  chilly 
fit  occurs,  and  is  succeeded  by  a  hot  stage,  which 
again  gradually  abates  until  it  terminates  in  a 
state  of  true  apyrexy  or  intermission.  But  as 
the  duration  of  this  intermission,  or  the  inter- 
vals of  time  between  the  recurrences  of  the 
paroxysms  of  the  disease  are  various,  it  has  ac- 
cordingly been  distinguished  by  various  names. 
Thus,  when  the  disease  commences  and  termi- 
nates every  day,  it  is  called  a  quotidian  ;  when 
on  alternate  clays,  a  tertian  ;  and  when  on  every 
fourth  day,  a  quartan. 


Other  forms  of  the  disease  are  mentioned  by 
both  ancient  and  modern  writers,  such  as  the 
quintan,  the  sextan,  the  septan,  and  the  nonan. 
That  quintans  do  sometimes  occur  cannot  be 
denied  ;  but  the  existence  of  the  others  is  a  mat- 
ter of  very  great  uncertainty.  If  the  credit  due 
to  the  reports  of  certain  celebrated  physicians 
prevents  us  from  denying  their  existence  alto- 
gether, we  must  at  least  acknowledge  that  they 
have  been  but  rarely  observed.  Even  with  re- 
spect to  those  diseases  which  assume  such  an. 
appearance,  there  is  ample  ground  for  the  admis- 
sion of  doubts.  It  may  indeed  accidentally 
happen  that  some  paroxysms  fall  on  the  sixth  or 
seventh  day;  but  it  can  scarcely  be  admitted 
that  they  pursue  this  course  and  observe  these 
periods  with  regularity  for  any  length  of  time. 

But  however  reasonable  and  specious  these 
observations  may  appear,  I  am  unwilling  that 
too  much  reliance  should  be  placed  on  them  : 
the  course  and  operations  of  nature  are  very  im- 
perfectly understood  :  those  things  which  we 
consider  as  differing  from  her  customs  and  laws, 
are  oftentimes  found  to  be  consonant  to  them  : 
paroxysms  may  occur  on  unusual  days  ;  as  the 
febrile  power  can  come  into  action  every  third 
and  fourth  day,  it  ought  not  to  be  considered  as 
very  surprising  should  it  show  itself  every  sixth 
day.     A    patient  may  escape  one  or  two  pa- 


roxysms  of  a  tertian,  in  which  case  the  disease 
will  appear  like  a  quintan  or  septan.  A  similar 
occurrence  in  a  quartan  will  produce  other  varie- 
ties in  the  type  of  the  disease. 

But  it  is  asked,  do  these  occurrences  actually 
take  place  ?  Nor  can  the  question  be  determined 
with  any  degree  of  certainty.  We  will  therefore 
treat  of  those  diseases  only,  that  have  a  well  de- 
fined type,  and  that  pursue  a  regular  course. 
The  quotidian  we  will  not  rank  among  genuine 
intermittents,  because  its  nature  is  totally  differ- 
ent from  theirs,  as  will  be  elsewhere  demon- 
strated. 

The  diseases  which  deserve  above  all  others 
to  be  denominated  intermittents,  are  tertians 
and  quartans.  From  these  arises  almost  every 
other  form  that  is  marked  with  distinct  periods, 
such  as  the  double  tertian,  and  the  double  quar- 
tan :  of  these  the  course  and  order  of  the  pa- 
roxysms are  such,  that  their  nature  and  com- 
position are  easily  discovered. 

When,  for  example,  the  disease  comes  on 
and  terminates  every  day,  provided  the  pa- 
roxysm be  alternately  lighter  one  day  and  severer 
the  next,  it  appears  evident  that  there  exist  two 
forms  of  fever,  one  consisting  of  lighter  pa- 
roxysms and  the  other  of  more  severe  ones. 


Here  the  lighter  paroxysms  correspond  to  the 
lighter,  and  the  more  severe  to  the  more  severe, 
every  third  day,  that  is,  in  the  order  of  the  ter- 
tian type.  The  disease,  therefore,  which  at  first 
view  appeared  to  be  a  quotidian  is  evidently 
composed  of  two  tertians. 

The  form  and  course  of  the  double  quartan 
are  still  more  easily  detected.  This  disease,  for 
instance,  begins  and  terminates  at  a  given  hour, 
for  two  days  in  succession,  and  does  not  appear 
on  the  third  ;  but,  on  the  fourth  and  fifth  again, 
it  recurs  as  at  first.  Hence  between  the  first 
and  third  paroxysms,  and  between  the  second 
and  fourth,  there  are  intervals  of  two  days  each. 
This  is  a  composition  or  form  of  disease  which 
rarely  occurs  ;  yet  in  the  frequency  of  quartans 
it  does  sometimes  occur,  as  every  physician  of 
extensive  experience  must  be  able  to  testify. 

Triple  tertians  and  quartans  more  rarely  ap- 
pear. The  disease  is  called  a  triple  tertian,  when 
three  paroxysms  occur  in  the  space  of  two  days, 
one,  for  example,  every  sixteen  hours.  This 
type  was  observed  by  Galen  and  Riverius,  but 
must  be  ranked  among  the  unusual  phenomena 
of  intermittents.  More  frequently  two  pa- 
roxysms take  place  in  one  day,  while  the  next 
proves  a  clay  of  complete  intermission :  this 
form  of  disease  might  be  likewise  denominated 


a  double  tertian,  since  it  consists  in  reality  of  two 
fevers,  which  recur  every  third  day. 

As  to  the  triple  quartan,  if  the  paroxysms 
only  be  regarded,  it  cannot  be  distinguished 
from  the  quotidian  or  double  tertian  :  nor  in- 
deed have  physicians  observed  any  thing  dif- 
ferent in  it,  except  the  paroxysm  that  falls  on 
that  day  which,  in  the  double  quartan,  is  a  day 
of  apyrexy  or  intermission.  Such,  for  example, 
was  the  opinion  of  Celsus,  who  treated  of  the 
change  of  that  form  of  disease  into  a  quotidian. 
The  sentiments  of  Celsus  on  this  subject  were 
> adopted  by  Hoffman,  who  mentions  the  forma- 
tion of  a  quotidian  out  of  a  quartan,  in  such  a 
manner,  however,  he  observes,  that  the  pa- 
roxysms do  not  commence  every  day  at  the 
same  hour. 

Some  physicians  mention  fourfold  and  six- 
fold tertians  and  quartans;  but  these  writers  are 
led  by  mere  hypothesis,  rather  than  observation, 
to  speak  of  fevers  of  this  description  :  they  have 
seen  paroxysms  occuringin  an  irregular  and  dis- 
orderly manner,  and  have  endeavoured  to  arrange 
them  under  certain  types.  But,  in  the  first 
place,  fevers  of  this  kind  are  not  intermittents ; 
or  if  they  are,  they  pursue  no  regular  course  : 
departing  in  a  short  time  from  the  course  in 
which  they  began,  they  pursue  a  different  one, 


6 

and  that  altogether  broken  and  disorderly.  But, 
to  conclude  the  matter  at  once,  physicians  of 
long  and  extensive  experience  have  scarcely  ever 
witnessed  diseases  of  the  kind. 

Simple  intermittents  degenerate  into  other 
compound  forms  of  fever.  They  may  be  con- 
verted, for  example,  as  we  shall  presently  see, 
into  continued  fevers,  still,  however,  preserving 
so  much  of  their  original  type  as  serves  to  dis- 
tinguish them  from  all  others.  They  may  like- 
wise be  combined  with  other  fevers,  as  with 
those  of  a  continued  form.  They  have  also  been 
known  to  be  joined  at  times  with  certain  other 
morbid  affections.  But  we  will  proceed  first  to 
the  consideration  of  simple  intermittents,  that 
we  may  thence  be  the  better  enabled  to  com- 
prehend the  nature  of  such  as  are  compound. 


CHAP.   II. 

Of  the  various  causes  of  Intermittent*,  as  laid  down  by 
certain  medical  writers. 


THE  cause  of  intermittents,  which  acts  and 
lies  dormant  by  turns,  is  extremely  difficult  to 
be  understood.  Enquiries  respecting  it  have  ex- 
ercised the  ingenuity  of  physicians  in  every  age, 
and  it  has  been  supposed  to  reside  in  various  parts 
of  the  body.  Many  have  considered  it  as  lurk- 
ing in  the  prima  vice.  The  principal  argument 
in  favour  of  this  opinion  is  drawn  from  a 
symptom  constantly  attendant  on  intermittents, 
namely,  a  vomiting  preceding  the  paroxysms. 
As  the  febrile  cause,  therefore,  acts  first  on  the 
stomach,  it  would  seem  to  have  its  seat  in  that 
organ.  But  nausea  and  vomiting  usually  precede 
most  kinds  of  acute  diseases.  Small-pox,  pleu- 
risy, and  other  similar  diseases,  do  not  originate 
in  the  prima  via,  and  yet  they  are  for  the  most 
part  ushered  in  by  a  vomiting.* 

*  The  translator,  from  his  present  view  of  the  subject,  is  decidedly 
of  opinion,  that  the  poison  which  produces  bilious  fever  in  all  its 
iorms,  and  also  the  variolous  poison  in  cases  of  casual  small-pox, 


8 

Others  derive  an  argument  no  less  feeble 
from  the  effects  of  drinking  cold  water.  Thus  a 
drink  of  cold  water  makes  the  disease  more  se- 
vere, while  a  draught  of  warm  water  renders 
the  efforts  to  vomit  much  lighter.  But  in  the 
cold  stage  of  the  fever  every  part  of  the  system 
is  contracted  or  shrunk  up  ;  can  it,  therefore, 
be  inferred,  that  the  first  seeds  of  the  disease 
lurk  in  the  primes  vite,  merely  because  a  new  or 
additional  contracting  power,  such  for  instance 
as  a  draught  of  cold  water,  subverts  the  action 
of  the  stomach  ? 

The  insufficiency  of  these  arguments  appears 
m  a  particular  manner,  from  the  uncertainly 
that  accompanies  the  use  of  emetic  remedies. 
If  intermittents  arose  from  the  condition  of  the 
prime?  via,  they  might  be  removed  by  emetics 
or  purgatives  alone.  But  every  one  must  be 
acquainted  with  the  fact,  that  they  do  not  yield  to 
remedies  of  this  description,  and  that  they  are 
not  unfrequently  even  rendered  more  violent  by 
them.  Besides,  topical  applications  to  the  limbs, 
and  peruvian  bark  used  by  way  of  injection, 

have  their  original  seat  in,  and,  therefore,  make  their  first  impres- 
sions on,  some  part  of  the  primes  vice.  This  leads  him  to  an  unquali- 
fied belief  in  the  sympathetic  doctrine  of  fever.  These  opinions  he 
hopes  to  lay  before  the  public,  at  some  future  period,  accompanied 
by  such  facts  and  arguments  as  may  contribute  to  their  further  esta- 
blishment and  more  general  reception. 


9 

have  oftentimes  been  known  to  cure  intermit- 
tents  :  but  these  remedies  do  not  operate  by 
evacuating  the  prima  via. 

Physicians  have  accused  another  part  of  the 
body,  which  is  no  less  innocent  than  the  prima 
via.  The  pancreas,  for  example,  has  been  con- 
sidered as  the  seat  of  the  febrile  cause,  and  this 
opinion  has  been  thought  to  derive  support  from 
anatomical  observations.  That  organ  has  been 
found  sometimes  schirrous,  and  at  other  times 
in  a  state  of  suppuration.  But  were  not  these 
appearances  the  effect,  rather  than  the  cause  of 
the  disease  ?  How  many  persons  have  laboured 
under  obstructions  of  the  pancreas,  without  ex- 
periencing any  thing  of  intermitting  fever  ?  We 
will  pass  over  that  opinion,  therefore,  as  a  mere 
conjecture.  Nor  are  we  inclined  to  set  a  higher 
value  on  the  sentiments  of  those,  who  consider 
the  fomes  of  the  disease  as  lying  hid  in  the  reces- 
ses of  the  mesentery,  because  the  hypothesis  is 
not  supported  by  either  reason  or  experience. 

With  as  little  reason  and  justice  has  the  dis- 
ease been  attributed  to  a  deficiency  of  perspira- 
tion. There  are  indeed  some  instances  which 
would  seem  to  favour  the  belief,  that  intermit- 
tents  may  arise  from  such  a  cause.  It  has  been 
observed,  for  exampie,  that  boys  who  had  eaten 
largely  of  summer  fruit,  have  been  seized  with 

c 


10 

intermittents  on  plunging  themselves  into  a 
stream  of  running  water.  A  kind  of  febrile 
paroxysm  appears  also  to  be  excited  by  the  use 
of  the  cold  bath.  But  it  is  no  less  certain  that 
perspiration  may  be  checked  without  producing 
any  febrile  affection.  It  appears  also  from  the 
circumstances  of  the  cold  of  winter,  which  is  so 
unfavourable  to  perspiration,  that  persons  when 
warm  are  very  often  exposed  to  cold  air  without 
experiencing  any  febrile  commotion  in  conse- 
quence of  it. 

From  these  causes  which  they  considered  as 
uncertain,  some  physicians  have  retreated  to 
others  less  obvious  to  the  senses.  Many  seem 
to  be  fully  convinced,  that  the  origin  of  intermit- 
tents is  to  be  sought  for  in  the  action  of  the 
nerves ;  some,  for  instance,  suppose  it  to  be  owing 
to  an  inert  or  sluggish  state  of  the  nervous  fluid, 
while  others  attribute  it  to  an  irregular  influx  of 
the  same.  They  contend,  in  particular,  that  the 
sudden  invasion  of  the  paroxysms  can  be  de- 
duced from  no  other  source  than  the  nerves. 
Examples  are  brought  forward,  where  an  inter- 
mittent appears  evidently  to  have  been  produced 
by  the  passions  of  the  mind.  For  no  other  rea- 
son, according  to  some,  can  peruvian  bark  prove 
serviceable,  but  because  it  gives  relief  in  hys- 
terical or  nervous  affections. 


11 

It  is  indeed  surprising  that  physicians  should 
have  fancied  causes  of  this  kind,  which  are 
so  remote  from  the  reach  of  the  senses.  I 
confess  that  I  oppose  these  hypotheses  not  with- 
out difficulty.  Who,  I  would  ask,  can  prove, 
that  the  nerves  are  alone  affected  in  intermittents? 
Suppose  a  person  to  be  attacked  by  fever,  in 
consequence  of  a  violent  agitation  of  the  nerves, 
what  then  ?  do  not  other  affections  also  arise 
from  the  same  cause  ?  Besides,  what  peculiar 
affinity  to  such  a  cause  have  cold,  heat,  profuse 
sweating,  apyrexy,  and* a  return  of  the  pa- 
roxysms at  a  stated  hour  ?  Those  who  spend 
their  time  in  searching  for  these  things  in  the 
nerves,  are  idle  theorists  rather  than  practical 
physicians  intent  on  the  cure  of  diseases. 


CHAP.   III. 

Of  other  and  more  probable  causes. 


THOSE  writers  appear  to  have  approached 
nearer  to  the  truth,  at  least  to  have  more  proba- 
bility on  their  side,  who  have  referred  the  cause 
of  intermittents  to  certain  animal  fluids.  Among 
these  the  first  to  be  mentioned  are  the  more  an- 
cient anthors,  who  have  laid  the  blame  especially 
on  the  bile,  namely  on  its  redundancy  or  acri- 
mony, qualities  which  show  themselves  more 
particularly  in  the  autumn,  or,  from  various 
causes,  at  other  seasons. 

If  indeed  any  fluid  can  become  too  acrid,  it 
is  the  bile.  This  appears  evident  from  the  cir- 
cumstances of  its  origin  and  formation,  which, 
however,  do  not  seem  to  be  very  clearly  under- 
stood. This  yellow  excretion  cannot  be  said  to 
be  formed  in  the  blood,  and  separated  from 
thence  by  certain  strainers,  because  neither  the 
surface  of  the  body,  nor  the  internal  parts  are 
tinged  by  it,  when  the  liver  is  entirely  indurated. 
In  the  internal  recesses  of  that  viscus,  therefore, 


13 

the  officina  or  laboratory  of  the  bile  is  neces- 
sarily situated. 

But  it  cannot  be  proved  that  the  bile  can  be 
formed  either  from  fat,  from  lymph,  or  from 
serum.  Fat  is  not  saponaceous,  since  it  is  no- 
thing but  mere  oil ;  lymph  is  white,  coagulates 
spontaneously  in  a  short  time,  and  does  not  form 
an  extract  with  spirit  of  wine ;  the  serum  into 
which  all  the  humours  are  resolved,  contains  in 
it  nothing  bilious,  nor  is  any  such  quality  attri- 
buted to  the  urine. 

It  is  more  probable,  therefore,  that  the  im- 
mediate matter  of  the  bile  resides  in  the  red 
portion  of  the  blood,  for  the  blood  like  the  bile,  is 
saponaceous  when  rubbed  on  the  hands  ;  it  is 
also  resinous,  in  as  much  as  it  is  inflammable 
when  dried,  and  forms  a  tincture  with  spirit  of 
wine  ;  finally,  it  is  strongly  disposed  to  putre- 
faction, and,  when  in  a  putrid  and  dissolved  state, 
assumes  a  yellow  colour :  these  latter  circumstan- 
ces are  illustrated  in  cases  of  echymosis,  and  in 
the  putrefaction  of  blood  under  a  gentle  heat. 

Now  the  blood  returning  from  the  intestines, 
having  left  its  more  fluid  part  behind  it,  has  a 
tendency  to  a  dissolved  as  well  as  to  an  alkales- 
cent and  putrid  state.  It  stagnates  in  the  me- 
senteric  veins,  is  exposed  to  a  gentle  heat,  and  is 


14 

tainted  by  the  putrid  halitus  of  the  intestines. 
It  becomes  therefore  dissolved,  and  turns  yellow 
in  the  liver  itself,  in  which  it  circulates  but 
slowly,  and  is  at  length  separated  or  taken  up  by 
the  biliary  tubes.  Thus,  as  it  is  already  inclining 
to  an  acrid  state,  this  acrimony  can  be  the  more 
readily  increased  by  the  mixture  of  febrile  mi- 
asmata. 

But  if  bile  be  the  cause  of  intermitting  fever, 
it  must  necessarily  have  first  acquired  some  pe- 
culiar and  unusual  power  :  for  it  is  oftentimes 
in  very  great  super-abundance  without  giving 
rise  to  this  disease.  Nor  indeed  are  those  per- 
sons who  labour  under  jaundice  more  subject  to 
it,  although  the  bile  ought  in  such  cases,  if  ever, 
to  prove  troublesome  and  injurious  ;  for  it  then 
stagnates  in  the  liver,  taints  the  blood  and  other 
humours,  disturbs  the  functions  of  the  body, 
and  fails  to  perform  its  usual  offices  in  the  sto- 
mach and  intestines. 

Influenced,  no  doubt,  by  these  considera- 
tions, some  have  supposed,  that  intermittents 
are  to  be  attributed  to  a  certain  putrid  matter 
contaminating  all  the  humours  of  the  body. 
Hence  arose  their  belief,  that  febrifuge  medicines 
possess  properties  strongly  antiseptic  ;  such  as 
the  peruvian  bark,  for  example,  which  is  a  pow- 
erful preventative  of  putrefaction.    But  it  must 


15 

be  acknowledged,  that  they  who  lay  the  blame 
on  putridity  alone,  carry  the  matter  to  an  extra- 
vagant and  erroneous  length.      Putrid  aliment 
does  not  always   produce    intermitting   fever  : 
besides,  this  disease  oftentimes  prevails  in  places 
where  not  a  vestige  of  putridity  exists  :  there  are 
even  certain  remedies,   such  as  testaceous  sub- 
stances, which   promote  putrefaction,    and  yet 
possess  febrifuge  virtues. 

But  whether  it  be  acrid  bile,  or  some  putrid 
matter,  that  is  the  cause  of  intermitting  fever, 
it  remains  to  be  enquired  whether  it  is  confined 
to  some  particular  part,  or  is  diffused  throughout 
the  whole  body.  Some  circumstances  indeed 
seem  to  prove,  that  the  febrile  cause  is  diffused 
through  the  whole  system  ;  when  about  to  dis- 
appear, it  shows  itself  on  the  lips  and  around 
the  mouth  ;  for  it  produces  pustules  on  these 
parts,  and  leaves  marks  of  its  departure,  when 
it  is  gone.  This  position  is  further  confirmed 
by  many  other  circumstances  which  sometimes 
occur  in  certain  cases  of  disease,  and  seem  to 
show  that  a  poison  is  diffused  throughout  the 
whole  body. 

But  there  are  arguments  not  without  weight, 
which  tend  to  prove,  that  the  febrile  cause  is 
principally  confined  to  some  particular  organ,  or, 
at  least,  that  there  is  some  part  to  which  its  ac- 


16 

tion  is  more  immediately  directed  and  confined, 
and  which  is,  therefore  a  greater  sufferer  in  con- 
sequence of  that  action.  This  opinion  is  coun- 
tenanced, as  we  shall  presently  observe,  by 
various  phenomena  attendant  on  intermittents. 

From  every  view  of  the  subject  it  would  ap- 
pear, that  the  part  which  more  immediately 
sustains  the  action  of  the  febrile  poison,  is  the 
liver :  for,  in  intermittents,  the  urine  is  tinged 
with  the  same  saffron  and  brick-dust  colours,  as 
in  hepatic  affections.  So  great  is  the  super- 
abundance of  bile  in  these  diseases,  that,  on  the 
exhibition  of  an  emetic,  it  seems  to  overflow, 
and  is  often  discharged  of  an  oily  nature  and 
very  viscid  consistence.  So  great  is  its  accu- 
mulation that  it  is  necessary  to  have  recourse  to 
vomits.  Such  a  tendency  has  the  system  to  ge- 
nerate bile,  that  without  procuring  its  evacua- 
tion the  disease  cannot  be  removed. 

Hence,  as  must  necessarily  be  expected,  the 
countenance  is  for  the  most  part  suffused  with 
some  degree  of  yellowness.  In  those  who  are 
unskilfully  treated  and  imperfectly  cured,  this 
colour  becomes  so  deep  as  to  degenerate  at  length 
into  a  true  jaundice.  Unless  this  affection  be 
removed,  it  is  not  to  be  expected  that  the  dis- 
ease will  disappear  ;  at  least,  if  it  even  should 
terminate  for  a  while,  it  will  certainly  have  a 


17 

strong  disposition  to  recur.  Lastly,  in  those 
who  die  of  intermittents,  the  liver  is  always 
more  or  less  affected.  It  cannot,  therefore,  be 
doubted  but  that  in  this  complaint,  that  organ  is 
particularly  and  chiefly  diseased,  and  constitutes 
the  principal  seat  of  the  fomes. 

But  in  an  investigation  so  extremely  intri- 
cate, it  is  not  allowable  to  proceed  any  further. 
It  appears  evidently  that  a  certain  matter  is  either 
generated  in  the  body,  or  is  introduced  into  it 
from  without,  and  that  this  matter  is  diffused 
throughout  the  whole  of  it,  and  proves  noxious 
to  the  liver  in  particular.  But  how  is  it  concen- 
trated in  that  viscus,  and  how  does  it  acquire 
strength  I  How  does  it  show  itself  by  making 
as  it  were  a  sudden  attack,  and  afterwards  gradu- 
ally abate,  till  it  at  length  ceases  to  act  ?  Finally, 
how  does  the  fomes  remain  in  its  lurking-place  ? 
How  does  it  contaminate  the  humours  like  a 
ferment,  and  prove  the  cause  of  repeated  pa- 
roxysms ?  These  things  cannot  be  ascertained, 
till  we  shall  have  taken  a  survey  of  all  the  symp- 
toms and  effects  of  the  fever. 


CHAP.    IV. 

-  *. 

Of  the  remote  causes. 


IT  is  much  easier  to  enumerate  the  remote 
causes  than  to  point  out  their  mode  of  operation. 
It  is  obvious  to  every  one  that  intermittents  are 
the  immediate  offspring  of  changes  in  the  wea- 
ther ;  yet  it  cannot  be  ascertained  in  what  way 
such  changes  contribute  to  the  production 
of  these  diseases  rather  than  of  others.  We 
only  learn  from  observation,  that  by  particular 
states  or  conditions  of  the  atmosphere,  certain 
motions  or  modes  of  action  are  excited  in  living 
bodies  :  nor  are  these  motions  produced  alike  in 
all  kinds  of  animals  :  dogs,  horses,  and  cattle  are 
not  so  liable  to  intermitting  fevers,  at  least  they 
are  but  very  seldom  attacked  by  them. 

The  human  system,  on  the  other  hand,  is 
very  subject  to  these  diseases.  There  is  scarcely 
any  one  who  has  not  experienced  something  of 
intermitting  fever.  This  disease  spares  neither 
childhood,  manhood,  nor  old  age.  It  prevails 
in  the  spring,  though  more  extensively  in  the 


19 

autumn,  and  also  makes  its  appearance  occasion- 
ally during  the  severest  cold  of  winter,  and  the 
most  intense  heat  of  summer.  But  during  these 
latter  seasons  the  occurrence  of  the  disease  is 
much  more  rare.  In  general,  a  continuance  of 
intense  cold  or  intense  heat  produces  fewer  dis- 
eases, and  those  of  a  different  aspect. 

There  are  in  the  mean  time  certain  years,  in 
which  intermittents  are  rare  during  the  spring, 
and  even  during  the  autumn,  the  season  in  which 
they  more  generally  prevail.  But  at  other  times 
they  break  forth  sporadically,  or  epidemically, 
and  that  in  particular  tracts  of  country  rather 
than  in  others.  In  such  cases  they  begin  and 
terminate  their  ravages  sooner  or  later,  accord- 
ing to  the  changes  of  the  weather,  or  the  nature 
of  the  soil.  When  they  commence  early  in  the 
season,  we  may  look  for  an  epidemic  of  consider- 
able severity.  These  epidemics  have  been 
known  to  continue  with  great  violence  and  mor- 
tality, even  till  some  time  in  the  winter.  On 
such  occasions,  however,  those  persons  who  had 
been  attacked  by  the  disease  during  the  autumn, 
were  the  principal  sufferers,  while  such  as  had 
escaped  till  the  commencement  of  cold  weather 
were  seldom  affected  afterwards. 

Intermittents  prevail  not  only  at  certain  sea- 
sons  of  the  year,  but  also  in  particular   situ- 


20 

ations.  Persons  living  in  the  vicinity  of  marshes 
are  particularly  subject  to  them.  They  rage, 
for  example,  in  the  northern  parts  of  France. 
The  French  troops  suffered  once  the  greatest 
mortality  from  them,  when  they  were  encamped 
along  the  coasts  of  Holland.  On  that  occasion, 
such  was  the  nature  and  malignity  of  the  fever  r 
that  after  having  continued  for  a  certain  time  it 
scarcely  admitted  of  a  cure.  Even  the  most  ro- 
bust systems  and  vigorous  constitutions,  when 
much  reduced  by  the  violence  of  the  disease, 
carried  the  relicks  of  it  with  them  through  dif- 
ferent climates. 

This  fever  arose  from  marine  exhalations, 
which  were,  therefore,  supposed  to  contain 
something  noxious  derived  from  the  waters  of 
the  ocean.  But  other  kinds  of  exhalations  are 
not  less* hurtful.  Near  to  the  walls  of  a  large 
city  stood  a  very  extensive  and  deep  pond  of 
water,  which  for  forty  years  had  served  as  a  re- 
ceptacle of  all  the  filth  from  the  houses  and 
streets.  As  long  as  these  putrid  matters  remain- 
ed covered  with  water,  they  were  productive  of 
no  mischief.  But  when  they  had  so  far  accumu- 
lated as  to  rise  above  the  surface  of  the  water,  a 
most  malignant  fever  spread  through  the  tract  of 
country  adjoining  the  city.  Where,  previously 
to  this,  only  four  hundred  persons  had  died  an- 


21 

nually,  not  less  than  two  thousand  were  now 
swept  away, 

Such  was  the  peculiar  power  of  thc?e  exhala- 
tions, that  persons  living  near  the  pond,  could 
not  preserve  meat  for  the  space  of  three  hours  ; 
it  usually  began  to  putrefy  almost  immediately, 
and  all  kitchen  furniture  became  in  a  short  time 
covered  with  a  kind  of  crust.  Perhaps  this  fe- 
ver was  of  a  different  kind  :  it  was  truly  malig- 
nant and  produced  various  affections  of  the  head, 
a  circumstance  not  so  observable  in  the  fevers 
which  prevail  along  the  coasts  of  France.  These 
latter  diseases  more  frequently  terminate  in 
troublesome  obstructions  of  the  viscera. 

Hence  it  appears,  that  in  epidemic  constitu- 
tions of  the  atmosphere,  there  is  something  that 
rises  from  the  earth,  and  floats  in  the  air,  which 
tends  to  the  production  of  intermittents  rather 
than  of  other  diseases.  Of  the  nature  and  com- 
*'  position  of  this,  it  is  extremely  difficult  to  judge. 
We  learn,  however,  from  observation,  that  a 
similar  cause  may  be  generated  in  our  own 
systems,  and  that  it  sometimes  originates  from 
the  aliments  we  use  ;  yet  these  aliments  cannot 
be  regarded  as  a  certain  cause  of  intermittents. 
For,  when  any  one,  after  an  error  in  diet,  is  at- 
tacked by  a  disease  of  this  kind,  he  might  have 
been  before  pre-disposcd  to  it ;  he  might  have 


22 

received  a  certain  portion  of  miasma  from  the 
reigning  constitution  of  the  season.  Thus,  in 
camps,  for  instance,  it  is  certain  that  if  the  pro- 
visions be  heavy  and  glutinous,  like  beans,  or 
austere  and  harsh,  like  unripe  fruit,  attacks  of 
intermitting  fever  are  apt  to  be  common  through- 
out the  autumn* 

Thus,  then,  it  stands,  with  respect  to  these 
and  other  occasional  causes,  such  as  sleeping  in 
humid  situations,  cold  air,  fatigue,  passions  of 
the  mind,  such  as  anger  and  sorrow,  long  con- 
tinued watching,   and  the  use  of  heating  medi- 
cines.    To  these  things,  not  as  their  proper, 
but  as  their  exciting  causes,  fevers  are  known 
to  succeed  very  frequently.     The  body  being 
already  pre-disposed,  has  a  disposition  to  take 
on  these  diseases.     Under  such  circumstances 
the  solids  and  fluids  are,  so  to  speak,  thrown  into 
the  flame  of  fever  by  a  slight  cause.     It  would, 
indeed,   be  a  secret,  well  worth  possessing,  to 
know  how  to  reduce  the  fever  certainly  to  an  in- 
termitting type. 


CHAP.  V. 

Of  the  febrile  rigor,  or  cold  stage  of  fever. 


WHEN  the  febrile  cause  begins  to  act,  a 
sensation  of  coldness   is   immediately  experi- 
enced,  a  circumstance  which  occurs  in  other 
acute  diseases  as  well  as  in  intermittents.     But 
in  continued  fevers  the  progress  and  violence 
of  the  cold  stage  are  widely  different  from  what 
they  are  in  those  of  an  intermitting  type.    There 
are  indeed  some  continued  fevers  of  a  malignant 
character,  which  are  ushered  in  by  a  severe  and 
dangerous  chill.     But  in  general  it  neither  lasts 
so  long,  nor  is  so  troublesome  to  the  sick.   This 
serves  to  apprize  the  practitioner  of  the  nature 
of  the  impending  fever,  and  enables  him  to  dis- 
tinguish it  from  other  diseases,  even  before  the 
hot  stage  is  formed.     For  it  may  be  laid  down 
as  a  general  principle,  that  fevers  which  com- 
mence with  the  greatest  rigor,  are  to  be  classed 
with  those  whose  course  is  marked  by  stated 
paroxysms. 


24 

The  rigor  or  cold  stage  of  fever  can  be  attri- 
buted to  no  other  immediate  source  than  an  im- 
pression or  irritation  made  on  the  nerves  by- 
some  hidden  cause  exciting  them  to  action. 
That  this  is  the  case  appears  from  various  ex- 
amples that  occur  in  practice.  Thus,  for  in- 
stance, the  irritation  of  a  biliary  calculus  on  the 
ductus  cboledocus,  sometimes  excites  the  most 
severe  rigor  throughout  the  whole  body.  The 
same  effect  is  oftentimes  produced  by  a  catheter 
touching  the  bladder,  and  even  by  an  enema 
thrown  into  the  rectum,  when  greatly  pained  by 
a  hemorrhoidal  affection.  A  similar  rigor  arises 
from  certain  visceral  complaints,  such  as  a 
strangulation  of  the  intestines,  and  also  from 
the  formation  of  pus  in  any  of  the  cavities  of 
the  body.  I  once  saw  a  soldier  who,  in  conse- 
quence of  a  large  abscess  of  the  liver,  died  of  a 
chilly  fit  which  lasted  two  days.  There  is  no 
doubt,  therefore,  but  the  cold  stage  of  intermit- 
tents  may  be  produced  by  a  stimulus  acting  on 
some  part  of  the  body. 

The  access  of  the  chilly  fit  is  usually  pre- 
ceded by  various  phenomena.  These  are,  a 
general  lassitude  and  heaviness,  a  sense  of  anxi- 
ety, a  yawning  and  stretching,  a  paleness,  and 
sometimes  a  disposition  to  sleep  ;  then  succeeds 
the  chilly  fit,  which  puts  on  a  variety  of  forms  ; 
sometimes,   for  instance,  beginning  at  the  feet, 


25 

at  other  times  about  the  scapula;,  and  again  in 
the  back,  it  runs  through  the  whole  body,  in  a 
manner  resembling  small  streams  of  water, 
poured  irregularly  in  every  direction :  hence 
horripilations,  shiverings,  and  repeated  rigors, 
as  if  cold  water  were  dashed  over  the  limbs. 

The  shiverings  and  rigors  are  oftentimes  so 
great  as  to  produce  a  continued  tremor  ;  the 
hands,  arms,  and  other  members  begin  to  shake; 
the  lower  jaw  in  particular  is  seized  with  a  very 
quick  and  alternate  tremulous  motion,  which 
rises  at  times  to  such  a  pitch  of  violence  and 
force,  that  the  teeth  clash  against  each  other  with 
a  considerable  noise,  and  are  even  said  to  be 
sometimes  broken.  The  motions  being  con- 
vulsive and  involuntary  cannot  be  checked,  not- 
withstanding the  greatest  efforts  of  the  patients 
for  that  purpose.  Agitated  by  such  concussions, 
the  sick  are  unable  either  to  sit  or  stand  :  they, 
therefore,  are  forced  to  lie  down,  and  to  draw 
themselves  together  in  such  a  way  that  their 
limbs  may  press  on  and  support  each  other. 

It  frequently  happens  that  all  parts  of  the 
body  are  not  alike  affected  by  the  cold  lit.  I  have 
oftentimes  seen  the  lower  parts  extremely  cold, 
and  the  upper  ones  parched  with  heat.  Men- 
tion is  made  of  a  patient  who  had  one  side  cold 
and  the  other  hot.    I  myself  had  a  person  under 


26 

my  care  tn  fever,  who  felt  a  coldness  only  in  one 
arm.  There  are  other  circumstances  not  less 
rare,  which  variously  affect  the  duration,  strength, 
and  appearance  of  the  cold  stage.  .But  as  these 
do  not  very  frequently  occur,  it  is  inadmissible 
to  dwell  on  them  at  present.  Those  things 
which  deviate  from  the  common  course  of  na- 
ture, do  not  fall  within  the  province  of  art.* 
Besides,  these  anomalies  are  usually  connected 
with  spurious  fevers,  not  with  true  intermit- 
tents, 

Varieties  also  occur  in  the  cold  fit  which  pre- 
cedes intermittents.  Thus  it  varies  in  degree, 
being  sometimes  light,  sometimes  moderate,  and 
at  other  times  very  severe.  It  attacks  princi- 
pally the  extreme  parts  of  the  body,  and  but 
rarely  reaches,  or  is  felt  in,  the  internal  parts.  It 
varies  also  according  to  the  age  and  tempera- 
ment of  the  subject.  It  is  much  more  severe  in 
old  and  relaxed  subjects,  than  in  such  as  are 
youthful  and  vigorous.  Its  duration  is  also  dif- 
ferent in  different  cases,  as  it  sometimes  lasts 
two  and  sometimes  three  hours  :   I  have  known 


*  That  isy  stated  rules  cannot  be  laid  down  for  anomalous  occur- 
rences. Under  the  pressure  of  such  occurences,  the  practitioner 
has  nothing1  to  depend  on  but  his  own  sagacity  and  discernment. 
Could  rules  be  laid  down,  or  predictions  be  formed  respecting-  them, 

the  events  would  cease  to  be  anomalous  and  become  regular 

Trans. 


27 

it  to  be  protracted  even   to  the  fourth  and  fifth 
hour. 

When  the  cold  fit  is  longer  than  usual,  this 
circumstance  is  not  to  be  considered  as  always 
portending  a  more  obstinate  and  severe  pa- 
roxysm. In  general,  indeed,  the  violence  of  the 
hot  stage  of  fever  corresponds  to  that  of  the 
cold:*  but  I  have  oftentimes  observed,  that  a 
tremor  of  but  short  duration  was  succeeded  by 
a  most  intensely  severe  paroxysm  of  many  hours 
continuance.  On  the  other  hand,  I  have  been 
surprized  to  find  a  long  cold  fit  sometimes  fol- 
lowed by  a  short  and  light  attack  of  fever. 

The  cold  fit  is  not  alike  troublesome  in  all 
the  paroxysms  of  the  same  disease.  Sometimes 
it  is  scarcely  felt  by  the  patients,  when  the  dis- 
ease has  run  on  to  a  considerable  length  :  nor  is 
it  indeed,  at  times,  less  inconsiderable  even  in 
diseases  of  recent  origin.  There  are  some  of 
these  which  begin  with  a  chill  only  at  first,  or 
at  most  in  two  or  three  of  the  subsequent  pa- 


*  Our  author  alludes  here  to  the  intensity,  but  not  to  the  duration 
of  tiie  hot  stage.  It  is  certainly  true  that  a  very  severe  cold  fit,  ac- 
companied by  a  chattering  of  the  teeth,  and  what  is  called,  in  common 
language,  a  general  shake,  for  the  most  part  ushers  in  a  high  state  of 
febrile  action.  But  this  state  is  seldom  of  long  continuance.  A  co- 
piousperspiration  soon  comes  on,  and  terminates  in  a  short  time  tha 
increased  heat  and  arterial  commotion Tra?is. 


28 

roxysms.  After  this  the  access  of  the  paroxysms 
is  announced  by  a  very  slight  chill,  if  by  any  at 
all.  But  in  true  intermittents,  unless  they  have 
degenerated  in  consequence  of  the  lapse  of  time, 
the  case  is  otherwise;  these  do  not  in  general 
deviate  from  the  usual  rule. 

When  the  paroxysms  are  so  protracted  as 
almost  to  run  into  each  other,  the  cold  fit  is  ge- 
nerally less  evident.  Nevertheless,  most  per- 
sons are  admonished  of  the  approach  of  the 
fever  by  a  slight  degree  of  chilliness.  Some- 
times the  coldness  occurs  only  in  the  feet,  and 
at  other  times  it  is  not  attended  to  by  the  sick 
at  all ;  while  in  other  instances  again,  an  oppo- 
site state  of  things  occurs.  Thus,  in  fevers,  as 
in  other  movements  or  processes  of  nature,  there 
is  no  absolute  stability.  Some  fevers  do  not 
steadily  pursue  the  course  or  type  with  which 
they  commenced,  and  others  deviate  from  the 
common  laws  of  similar  diseases. 

It  is  not  to  be  wondered  at,  therefore,  if  in 
irregular  intermittents,  some  unusual  symptoms 
should  manifest  themselves  in  place  of  thecoldfit. 
I  have  accordingly  seen  some  patients  who  com- 
plained of  a  fixed  pain  in  some  part  of  the  body, 
resembling  true  rheumatism.  There  are  others 
again,  who,  on  the  approach  of  a  paroxysm,  are 
seized  with  a  sleepiness,     Indeed  so  great  is  this 


29 

sleepiness,  that  it  sometimes  resembles  real 
coma.  A  certain  female  patient  could  scareely 
be  roused  up  ;  and  when  she  was  roused,  im- 
mediately fell  asleep  again,  and  lay  as  if  deprived 
of  sense  :  from  hence  it  appears  how  easily  the 
mind  may  be  affected.  I  once  knew  a  woman 
who,  just  before  the  paroxysm,  became  very  lo- 
quacious, nor  was  the  approach  of  the  disease 
announced  to  the  by-standers  by  any  other 
sign. 


CHAP.   VI. 

Of  the  effects  of  the  cold  stage  ef fever. 


THE  cold  stage  of  fever  produces  many  ef- 
fects on  the  system  at  large.  To  speak  first  of 
those  that  occur  exteriorly,  the  arteries  are  con- 
tracted. Nor  can  this  be  attributed  to  any  other 
cause  than  the  action  of  the  nerves  on  them. 
Hence  the  pulse  becomes  small  and  frequent.  It 
begins,  for  instance,  some  little  time  before  the 
cold  fit,  to  be  depressed  and  to  beat  more  slowly. 
Afterwards  it  becomes  more  frequent  and  irre- 
gular, particularly  in  persons  advanced  in  years. 
In  such  subjects  it  is  often  rendered  tremulous 
and  uneven.  In  those  that  are  more  youthful, 
it  is  not  usually  either  so  much  depressed  or  so 
irregular  ;  but  of  these  things  we  will  treat 
hereafter. 

From  this  contraction  of  the  arteries  arises  a 
paleness,  which  shows  itself  in  the  nails,  the  lips, 
the  countenance,  and  the  other  parts  of  the  body 
generally.  To  this  even  a  livid  colour  is  often- 
times superadded.     I  once  saw  a  woman  whose 


31 

nose,  during  the  cold  stage  of  fever,  was  suf- 
fused with  something  of  an  azure  cast.    At  times 
the  skin  is  checkered  with  spots  of  a  brownish 
and  bluish  colour.      The  blood  having  passed 
from  the  arteries,  is  collected  and  detained  in  the 
fine  net-work  formed  by  the  incipient  branches 
of  the  veins.     This  appears  from  injections  of 
the  blood-vessels,  by  which  small  specks  or  pe- 
techia are  sometimes  formed.     But  these  phe- 
nomena occur  more  rarely  in  the  cold  stage  of 
fever,    though  they   often   show  themselves  in 
parts  rendered  livid   by  the  action  of  external 
cold.     In  this  latter  case,  the  blood  stagnating 
in  the   incipient  venous  branches,    assumes   a 
blue  or  violet  colour. 

But  a  contracted  state  of  the  parietes  of  the 
arteries  is  not  of  itself  sufficient  to  produce  a 
stagnation  of  the  blood.  These  vessels,  even 
when  thus  contracted,  may  possess  great  energy. 
The  blood  must,  necessarily,  therefore,  be  thrown 
into  them  with  difficulty,  during  the  cold  stage 
of  fever.  At  this  period  that  fluid  is  collected 
in  the  larger  veins,  and  the  vena  cava  in  particu- 
lar is  overcharged  and  uppressed  by  it.  The 
right  auricle  and  ventricle  of  the  heart  are  both 
turgid  at  the  same  time,  and  may,  therefore,  be 
considered  as  in  a  kind  of  press  formed  by  their 
own  contents.  Hence  the  contraction  and  dila- 
tion of  the  ventricles  are  necessarily  much  con- 


32 

fined.  From  this  source  arises  that  convulsive 
motion  and  palpitation  of  the  heart,  which  some- 
times occurs  in  the  cold  stage  of  fever.  Finally, 
to  the  same  cause  must  we  attribute  that  great 
anxiety,  and  occasional  syncope,  experienced 
by  some  persons  at  the  commencement  of  a 
paroxysm. 

But  wherefore  is  the  blood  collected  in  the 
cavities  of  the  heart  ?  Observation  proves  that 
such  a  collection  actually  takes  place.  As  to 
the  cause,  it  appears  that  the  blood,  being  forced 
by  the  violence  of  the  cold  fit  from  the  external, 
is  driven  to  the  internal  parts  of  the  body,  and 
is  then  by  the  various  succussions  or  agitations 
of  the  different  parts  directed  towards  the  larger 
veins.  But  not  being  able  to  pass  immediately 
through  the  lungs,  it  must  necessarily  be  collect- 
ed in  considerable  quantity  in  the  pulmonary 
artery,  as  well  as  in  the  right  ventricle  and  au- 
ricle of  the  heart. 

Several  causes  co-operate  in  producing  a  stag- 
nation of  blood  in  the  lungs.  First,  the  texture 
of  the  viscus  itself  presents  a  constant  barrier  to 
the  blood,  as  it  issues  from  the  heart :  hence 
that  fluid  is  necessarily  accumulated  in  the  pul- 
monary vessels.  Secondly,  the  state  of  respira- 
tion, during  the  cold  stage  of  fever,  contributes 
to  the  same  end'     The  acts  of  inspiration  are 


artiaJ  and  contracted  :  but  when  the  vesicles 
of  the  lungs  are  not  properly  expanded,  the  fluids 
cannot  find  their  way  through  them  without  dif- 
ficulty, and  must,  therefore,  be  unavoidably  ac- 
cumulated in  their  vessels.  It  is  not  to  be 
wondered  at,  then,  if  patients  sometimes  expire 
in  the  cold  stage  of  fever,  and  if,  after  death, 
their  lungs  are  found  distended  with  dark  and 
grumous  blood. 

Nor  ought  it  to  appear  more  strange,  that, 
seeing  the  viscera  are  thus  turgid  with  blood, 
the  patients  should  suffer  a  burning  heat  within, 
while  the  external  parts  of  their  bodies  are  freez- 
ing with  cold.  When  the  hands  and  feet  are 
almost  frozen  in  winter,  the  armpits  and  groins 
generally  retain  the  degree  of  heat  that  is  natural 
to  them.  But  the  same  thing  occurs  in  the  cold 
stage  of  fever.  Indeed  the  surface  of  the  body 
being  chilled  at  the  commencement  of  the  pa- 
roxysm, the  action  of  the  viscera  is  thereby 
rendered  more  intense,  whence  the  heat  in  them 
is  necessarily  augmented. 

The  degree  of  this  internal  heat  may  be  dis- 
covered in  some  measure  from  the  intensity  of 
the  thirst :  for  thirst  is  most  troublesome  when 
the  viscera  are  raging  with  heat.  As  in  such  a 
state  the  fauces  are  drier  than  usual,  we  may  pre- 
sume the  same  thing  to  be  the  case  with  respect 

F 


34 

to  the  surface  of  the  aesophogus  and  stomach  it- 
self. But  it  is  no  less  certain  that  thirst  is 
sometimes  troublesome  without  any  preternat- 
ural increase  of  heat.  It  is  excited  in  such 
cases  by  acrid  aliment,  and  by  that  saburra 
which  accumulates  at  times  in  the  prima  via  ; 
thus  bile  accumulates  in  these  passages,  the  na- 
ture of  which  is  apt  to  be  greatly  vitiated  in 
febrile  affections.  I  once  saw  a  woman  labouring 
under  a  hepatic  affection,  who  suffered  great 
thirst  as  often  as  the  bile  flowed  in  large  quanti- 
ties into  her  stomach. 

That  bile  contributes  to  the  production  of 
thirst,  is  further  confirmed  by  the  nausea  and 
vomiting  to  which  patients  are  subject,  dur- 
ing the  cold  stage  of  fever.  In  the  begin- 
ning of  paroxysms,  in  particular,  large  quanti- 
ties of  bile,  sometimes  tough  and  at  other  times 
more  liquid,  are  discharged  by  vomiting :  that 
fluid  is  even  observed  at  times  to  be  foetid.  But 
although  this  cause  may  be  a  powerful  one, 
others  of  no  less  moment  may  be  combined 
with  it.  The  liver  is  affected,  as  we  have  al- 
ready intimated:  in  the  region  of  the  stomach 
spasms  arise,  which  are  to  be  attributed  to  the 
stagnation  of  blood  and  the  irritation  thence 
arising.  Nor  is  it  necessary  for  inverting  the 
motions  of  the  prima  via  that  the  cause  of  in- 
termitting fever  be  present.     Pleurisy,  nephri- 


35 

tis,  and  affections  of  the  uterus  are  accompanied 
by  vomiting.  The  agitation  of  certain  nerves 
is  sufficient  for  inverting  the  action  of  the  sto- 
mach. 

This  vomiting,  or  effort  to  vomit,  is  mark- 
ed with  some  variety.  It  generally  occurs  at  the 
onset  of  fevers,  and  is  violent  and  troublesome  in 
proportion  to  their  severity.  In  vernal  inter- 
mittents  it  is  less  violent  than  in  autumnal  ones. 
Even  in  the  latter  season  it  becomes  milder  after 
a  certain  continuance  of  the  disease.  It  finally 
disappears  altogether,  and  leaves  nothing  behind 
it  but  the  cold  fit.  From  this  subverted  mo- 
tion or  evacuation  of  the  stomach,  no  relief 
whatever  is  to  be  expected.  It  is  evidently  a 
morbid  affection  ;  and  notwithstanding  the  vast 
quantities  of  offensive  saburra  thus  spontane- 
ously discharged,  there  always  remains  a  resi- 
duum behind  that  ought  to  be  thrown  off  by  an 
emetic. 

When  by  the  force  of  the  cold  fit  the  action 
of  the  nerves  is  thrown  on  the  stomach,  and 
even  the  intestines  themselves  are  constricted,  it 
is  not  surprizing  that  the  fibres  of  all  parts  of 
the  system  should  be  velicated  and  suffer  some 
degree  of  violence.  Therefore  it  is,  that  on  the 
access  or  during  the  prevalence  of  the  cold  stage 
of  fever,  various  pains  are  so  often  felt  through- 


36 

out  the  whole  body.  Sometimes  the  joints 
ache,  and  the  limbs  are  so  painful,  that  they 
seem  to  be  affected  by  rheumatism.  At  other 
times  again,  the  pain  is  situated  in  some  inter- 
nal part.  I  have  seen  cases  in  which  the  intes- 
tines themselves  were  tortured  with  pain.  In 
general,  however,  wandering  pains  and  a  kind 
of  painful  pricking  sensations  are  more  frequent- 
ly experienced  throughout  the  whole  or  in  cer- 
tain parts  of  the  skin. 

But  notwithstanding  the  pains  excited  at 
times  by  the  cold  stage  of  fever,  yet  when  that 
affection  is  very  severe,  it  renders  sensation 
much  less  acute.  Under  such  circumstances, 
if  a  slight  wound  be  inflicted,  no  pain  whatever 
is  experienced.  There  have  even  been  patients 
who  were  not  sensible  of  the  heat,  when  their 
feet  were  moved  close  to  the  fire.  For  the  same 
reason  purgatives  do  not  act  on  the  intestines  if 
exhibited  during  or  just  before  the  cold  fit.  The 
stamina  or  constituent  fibres  and  smaller  vessels 
of  the  parts  are  constricted  by  the  action  of  the 
cold  ;  the  blood  and  vital  principle  cannot  cir- 
culate through  their  usual  channels ;  there  is, 
therefore,  a  deficiency  of  motion,  which  is  the 
principle  of  sensation,  or,  at  least,  that  condi- 
tion without  which  all  things  languish  and 
decay. 


37 

Hence  we  see  what  disorders  may  arise  in 
the  functions  of  all  parts  of  the  body.  The  or- 
gans of  respiration  are  affected  :  the  brain  itself 
is  sometimes  a  sufferer  :  the  secretions  are  dis- 
turbed :  perspiration  is  obstructed :  the  urine 
becomes  coloured,  is  thin,  watery,  and  in  small 
quantity  :  as  the  renal  tubes  are  constricted  by 
the  action  of  the  nerves,  none  but  the  more 
fluid  parts  of  the  urine  can  pass  off,  for  when  the 
motions  in  these  small  vessels  are  necessarily 
diminished,  the  grosser  particles  can  neither  be 
separated  from  the  others,  nor  pass  off  through 
such  narrow  channels  :  whence  they  must  either 
remain  in  their  proper  strainers,  or  be  carried 
elsewhere. 


CHAP.   VIL 

Of  the  hot  and  sweating  stages  of  fever. 


AFTER  the  cold  fit  has  continued  for  a 
time,  it  begins  to  abate,  and  is  succeeded  by  a 
degree  of  heat  which  spreads  gradually  through- 
out the  extreme  parts,  and  is  marked  by  con- 
siderable variety.  It  is  more  intense,  for  in- 
stance, if  the  cold  fit  has  been  very  severe.  The 
thirst  still  continues,  with  dryness  of  the  mouth 
and  skin,  pains  in  the  joints,  and  not  unfrequent- 
ly  great  disquietude,  tossing,  and  anxiety.  The 
whole  body  is  nowT  flushed,  particularly  the 
countenance,  the  urine  is  of  a  red  or  flame  co- 
lour, &x. 

To  arrive  at  some  knowledge  of  the  cause 
of  this  heat,  let  us  attend  to  the  circumstances 
and  mode  of  its  occurrence  in  certain  cases. 
When  a  person  is  immersed  in  a  cold  bath,  he 
generally  experiences  soon  afterwards  a  degree 
of  feverish  heat.  When  the  hands,  already  stiff 
with  cold,  are  rubbed  with  snow,  a  heat  and  red- 
ness are    excited  in    them,    and  a   vapour  or 


39 

smoke  arises  from  them.  When  any  one  ex- 
poses himself  for  a  considerable  time  to  a  very 
cold  wind,  or  a  freezing  atmosphere,  his  face 
begins  at  length  to  glow  and  be  flushed.  The 
same  thing  takes  place,  accompanied  also  with 
pain,  in  every  part  of  the  body  which  has  experi- 
enced an  intense  degree  of  cold. 

Cold  ought  therefore  to  be  considered  as  an 
irritating  cause:*  in  those  parts  long  exposed 
to  its  action  a  pungent  stimulus  remains,  and 
the  small  vessels  being  contracted  in  their  dia- 
meters, the  fluids  are  accumulated  in  them  and 
made  to  stagnate.  In  this  state  of  things  the  im- 
pression of  the  cold  either  alone,  or  assisted  in 
its  action  by  the  irritation  of  the  nerves,  rouses 

*  Be  the  essence  of  cold  what  it  may  ;  whether  it  consist  sim- 
ply in  the  absence  of  heat,  or  in  the  presence  of  an  xtherial  fluid  of 
equal  subtility  with  the  matter  of  heat,  it  is  unquestionably,  as  our 
author  pronounces  it,  an  irritating  cause.  In  more  fashionable  me- 
dical language,  it  is  certainly  a  stimulus.  This  is  a  point  as  suscep- 
tible of  clear  and  satisfactory  proof,  as  any  one  in  the  science  of 
physiology.  We  must  necessarily  bestow  the  name  of  stimulus  on 
whatever  is  capable  of  exciting  in  us  motion  cr  sensation.  But  a 
moment's  reflection  will  convince  us  that  cold  is  capable  of  producing 
both.  A  current  of  cold  air  produces  a  blush  and  a  glow  of  heat  on 
the  face,  by  exciting  action  in  the  cutaneous  arteries  of  the  part.  If 
a  person  be  in  a  deep  sleep,  a  lump  of  ice  or  a  ball  of  snow  applied 
to  his  skin,  will  awake  him  as  instantaneously  as  the  application  of 
hot  water,  or  even  of  a  burning  coal.  Innumerable  other  instances 
of  the  stimulant  power  of  cold  might  be  adduced  ;  but  it  would  be 
equally  improper  and  impracticable  to  dwell  on  the  subject  in  the 
limits  of  a  note.  Besides,  the  above  instances  are  deemed  suffici- 
ent for  my  present  purpose 7>ang. 


40 

the  vital  energy  of  the  part :  the  blood  being  in- 
cessantly urged  forward  with  more  violence  than 
usual,  acts  forcibly  on  the  vessels  that  oppose 
its  passage  :  but  from  this  constant  motion  and 
distraction  of  the  fibres,  an  increase  of  heat 
must  necessarily  result. 

There  is  no  doubt  but  a  similar  cause  oper- 
ates in  the  case  of  intermitting  fever.  The  blood 
being  accumulated  by  the  violence  of  the  cold 
fit,  stagnates  in  the  cavities  of  the  heart,  in  the 
lungs,  and  in  the  mesenteric  vessels.  The  con- 
stant stimulus  of  this  volume  of  blood  excites 
the  vital  energy,  or  the  action  of  the  nerves  : 
hence  necessarily  follows  an  increase  in  the  mo- 
tion of  the  arteries,  and  a  corresponding  in- 
crease of  heat.  In  the  mean  time,  the  greater 
the  contraction  of  the  parts  and  the  consequent 
stagnation  of  the  fluids,  the  greater  in  general 
will  be  the  degree  of  heat.  Yet,  at  times,  so 
great  has  been  the  extent  of  this  contraction, 
that  the  vital  power  being  oppressed  and  suffo- 
cated, as  it  were,  has  been  incapable  of  being 
roused,  and  death  has  consequently  ensued. 

But  we  do  not  attribute  so  much  to  this 
cause  as  to  aliedge  that  the  hot  stage  is  produced 
by  it  alone.  There  can  be  no  doubt  whatever 
but  fever  arises  from  other  causes  besides  a  cold 
fit.     This  is  evident  from  those  intermittents 


41 

which  come  on  without  a  previous  chill,  at 
least  without  a  chill  of  any  severity,  and  which 
are  notwithstanding  at  times  extremely  violent. 
Besides,  in  continued  fevers,  in  pleurisy,  and 
other  similar  affections,  a  cold  fit  generally  in- 
troduces the  disease  ;  but  afterwards  there  re- 
mains an  irritating  cause  or  inflammation,  on 
which  the  succeeding  hot  stage  and  the  whole 
course  of  the  fever  depends.  Lastly,  I  have 
myself  seen  a  periodical  cold  fit,  which  was  not 
succeeded  by  any  appearance  of  febrile  heat. 

What  seems  to  render  it  probable,  that  the 
hot  stage  ought  to  be  attributed  to  the  preced- 
ing cold  one,  is  the  effect  of  certain  remedies. 
It  is  observed,  for  example,  that  by  these  reme- 
dies both  the  hot  and  cold  stages  of  fever  are 
prevented.  But  if  they  have  succeeded  when 
taken  before  the  commencement  of  the  cold  fit, 
who  will  venture  to  assert,  that  they  did  not  ex- 
ert their  influence  alike  on  the  proper  cause  both 
of  the  cold  fit,  and  of  the  hot  one  ?  That  this 
is  indeed  the  case,  innumerable  circumstances 
concur  to  prove,  as  we  shall  demonstrate  when 
treating  of  the  cure  of  fevers. 

The  heat  of  the  body  in  intermitting  fever 
rises  higher  than  might  perhaps  on  the  first  view 
of  the  subject  be  imagined.  It  even  surpasses 
the  heat  that  usually  occurs  in  some  very  acute 

G 

i 


40 

fevers.  It  sometimes  rises  as  high  as  the  39° 
of  Reaumur.  Hence  we  see  how  great  the  heat 
must  be  in  those  ardent  fevers  which  oftentimes 
partake  of  the  nature  of  intermittents.  It  will  be 
the  more  intense,  for  instance,  in  proportion  as 
there  is  a  greater  quantity  of  blood  accumulated 
in  the  vena  porta,  the  region  of  the  heart,  and 
the  lungs.  It  is  in  these  parts,  therefore,  that 
patients  experience  such  a  burning  heat,  for  the 
same  reason  that,  in  other  diseases,  other  parts 
suffer  a  similar  heat,  as  the  head,  for  example, 
in  phrenitiSy  and  the  fauces  in  angina  inflam- 
matoria. 

Sweat  is  a  phenomenon  of  febrile  heat.  As 
it  flows,  for  the  most  part,  copiously,  when  the 
body  is  agitated  by  violent  exercise,  so  it  also 
issues  in  abundance,  when  the  action  of  the  ar- 
teries is  somewhat  increased.  If,  however,  the 
fever  and  heat  be  very  violent,  the  pores  of  the 
skin  are  not  opened,  but,  on  the  other  hand,  the 
texture  of  all  parts  of  the  body  is  constricted,  or 
thrown  into  a  state  of  spasm.  Under  these  cir- 
cumstances a  burning  heat  and  dryness  prevail 
over  the  whole  body,  and  must  be  expected  to 
continue  till  the  fever  abate  :  then  the  cutaneous 
fibres  and  excretories  being  relaxed,  the  per- 
spiration breaks  forth  on  every  side,  and  is  pro- 
moted by  the  degree  of  fever  that  remains,  the 


43 

relaxation  of  the  surface  of  the  body,   and  the 
fulness  of  the  cutaneous  vessels. 

The  reality  of  these  causes  of  the  flowing  of 
the  sweat  is  obvious  and  well  established.    That 
there  is  a  relaxation  induced,  towards  the  close 
of  the  fever,  cannot  be  doubted.    By  the  febrile 
impulse  the  fibres  are  overstretched  and  weaken- 
ed, for  we  know  that  flesh  is  rendered  more  ten- 
der and  soft  by  heat  and  motion.     The  fluids, 
therefore,    can    pass    more    easily  through   the 
pores,  and  that  the  more  especially,  as  the  cuta- 
neous vessels  are  kept  distended  by  the  force  of 
the  circulation  being  greater  than  natural.    The 
flowing  of  the  matter  of  perspiration  through  the 
pores  of  the  skin,   is  much  facilitated  by  the 
change  that  occurs  in  the  crasis  of  the  blood. 
It  is  evident  that  that  fluid  is  in  some  measure 
dissolved  in  those  persons  who  have  suffered  an 
attack  of  fever  :   for  such  subjects  become  pale, 
and,  as  it  were,  bloodless,  and  are  yet  subject 
at  times  to  hemorrhages :  they  even  fall  occasion- 
ally into  a  scorbutic  diathesis  in  consequence  of 
the  vitiation  of  the  blood. 

Hence  it  appears  that  great  variety  may  oc- 
cur with  respect  to  the  sweating  stage  of  fever. 
In  some  patients,  for  instance,  the  sweat  begins 
to  flow  at  the  very  commencement  of  the  hot 
stage  :    in  others  it  is  more  tardy,  not  appearing 


44 

till  a  little  after  the  body  has  become  hot ;  while 
in  others  again  it  breaks  out  at  a  still  later  period : 
it  continues  also  to  flow  for  a  longer  or  shorter 
time,  and  is  sometimes  profuse  and  at  other 
times  in  smaller  quantity.  These  circumstances 
are  necessarily  varied  according  to  the  cause  of 
the  disease,  the  affections  of  the  viscera,  the  va- 
rieties that  occur  in  the  hot  and  cold  stages,  and 
the  temperament  of  the  patient.  Hence  the 
perspiration  is  at  times  unusually  copious.  I 
once  saw  a  person  labouring  under  intermitting 
fever,  who  experienced  such  a  deluge  of  sweat 
six  times  a  day,  that  he  was  forced  to  change 
his  linen  twice  or  three  times  every  hour. 

As  the  action  of  the  hot  stage  on  the  organs 
of  perspiration  is  various,  the  same  thing  is  true 
with  regard  to  the  other  organs  of  secretion  ; 
hence  the  urine  assumes  a  red  colour.  This 
fluid  is  thin  during  the  prevalence  of  the  cold 
stage  ;  foi\  during  that  period,  all  the  secreting 
tubes  being  constricted  or  affected  by  a  spasm, 
and  the  motion  of  the  fluids  being  languid,  none 
but  the  finer  particles  can  pass  through  the  se- 
cretory vessels  of  the  kidneys,  while  the  grosser 
ones  remain  mixed  with  the  other  humours. 
But  as  the  febrile  action  increases,  the  urine  ac- 
quires aflame  colour;  this  colour  arises  from 
bilious  and  oily  particles  being  mixed  and  incor- 
porated as  it  were  with  each  other,  and  is  mark- 


45 

ed  with  some  variety  of  appearance  ;  that  is,  it 
is  sometimes  deeper  and  sometimes  lighter. 
The  colour  of  the  urine  is  rendered  deeper  by 
profuse  sweating,  because,  in  such  a  case,  the 
more  subtile  and  limpid  fluids  pass  off  by  the 
pores  of  the  skin,  whence  the  urine  is  necessarily 
robbed  of  them,  and  its  redness  becomes  con- 
sequently more  concentrated  and  more  deep. 
Thus,  when  any  one  has  used  severe  exercise 
and  perspired  plentifully,  the  urine  which  he 
discharges  is  hot  and  in  small  quantity,  but  is  at 
the  same  time  frothy  and  has  its  surface  covered 
with  a  thin  pellicle  :  in  this  case,  when  the  force 
of  the  paroxysm  has  abated,  a  two-fold  sediment 
is  deposited,  namely,  a  lateritious  one,  and  a 
smooth  white  one.  The  first  of  these,  of  which 
we  will  treat  elsewhere,  is  a  symptom  of  dis- 
ease, but  the  other  a  sign  of  solution  or  return- 
ing health.  Respecting  these  sediments  the 
ancients  have  written  much,  but  I  would  not 
vouch  for  the  authenticity  of  their  observations 
and  opinions.  By  modern  writers  the  subject 
appears  to  have  been  too  much  neglected. 

At  the  very  commencement  of  intermittents, 
Galen  was  in  the  habit  of  predicting  their  termi- 
nation from  the  appearances  of  the  urine.  Ac- 
cording to  him,  the  solution  is  to  be  looked  for 
after  the  fourth  paroxysm,  if  the  urine  be  red  or 
yellowish,  and  emit  a  smell ;   after  the  seventh, 


46 

if  the  urine  be  only  red,  and  after  the  third,  if  on 
the  first  day  of  the  disease  a  smooth  and  even 
sediment  be  deposited.  This  subsidence  is  in- 
deed of  great  moment,  particularly  in  quartan 
fevers,  but,  as  we  will  elsewhere  demonstrate,  is 
subject  to  great  variety. 


CHAP.    VIII. 

Of  the  state  of  Apyrexy,  or  freedom  from  fever, 
which  succeeds  each  paroxysm. 


AFTER  the  sweating  stage  an  apyrexy  or 
freedom  from  fever  succeeds,  and  all  things  seem 
to  be  restored  to  their  natural  state.  But  the 
course  or  progress  of  this  period  during  which 
fever  lies  dormant  is  various,  and  many  things 
occur  in  it  worthy  of  notice.  As  far  as  our 
senses  are  capable  of  investigating  the  subject, 
the  intervals  might  indeed  be  considered  as  per- 
fectly exempt  from  disease  (for  they  are  scarce- 
ly marked  by  the  shadow  of  a  complaint  :)  but 
it  is  hardly  possible  that  so  very  rapid  a  transi- 
tion could  be  made  from  health  to  disease,  and 
from  disease  to  health.  Hence  Galen  expresses 
some  doubts  respecting  a  state  of  perfect  apy- 
rexy. He  could  not  be  induced  to  believe,  that 
the  intermediate  days  were  perfectly  free  from 
fever. 

With  many  persons  the  nights  preceding  the 
paroxysms  are  restless  and  uneasy,  and,  if  the 


48 

matter  be  carefully  examined,  it  is  evident  that 
some  slight  symptoms  of  disease  remain  during 
the  days  of  intermission  :  at  least  it  may  be  laid 
down  as  an  established  point,  that  it  is  during 
the  middle  portion  only  of  the  intervals  between 
the  paroxysms,  that  the  system  can  be  free  from 
all  preternatural  action.  Even  during  that  pe- 
riod the  tranquillity  and  health  of  the  system  can- 
not be  complete,  because  the  fomes  of  the  dis- 
ease still  remains,  and  must,  from  one  paroxysm 
till  another,  act  the  part  of  a  preternatural  stimu- 
lus. Besides,  health  cannot  be  considered  as 
sound,  while  disease  still  remains  pictured  in 
the  countenance,  while  the  urine  and  faeces  put 
on  unnatural  appearances,  and  while  the  appe- 
tite is  for  the  most  part  defective,  and  the  di- 
gestion imperfect. 

As  the  stated  hour  of  the  paroxysms  ap- 
proaches, a  commotion  or  disordered  action 
more  or  less  perceptible  is  necessarily  excited  in 
the  system.  The  access  of  these  paroxysms 
generally  falls  on  the  same  hour  of  the  day.  Not 
unfrequently,  however,  their  order  is  interrupt- 
ed. They  sometimes  anticipate,  for  example, 
the  usual  time  of  their  invasion,  so  as  to  occur 
before  it,  sometimes  by  very  short  and  at  other 
times  by  longer  spaces.  This  is  an  evidence 
that  the  disease  is  acquiring  strength,  and  hasten- 
ing on  to  a  continued  form.  But  if,  on  the  other 


49 

hand,  the  fever  makes  its  attack  at  a  later  hour, 
this  is  a  proof  that  it  is  losing  strength.  Each 
postponing  paroxysm  is  milder  and  shorter, 
whence  a  hope  may  be  derived  that  the  disease 
is  inclining  to  a  speedy  and  favourable  termi- 
nation. 

But  there  are  other  circumstances  besides 
the  time  of  their  invasion  or  commencement,  in 
which  the  paroxysms  differ  from  each  other  in 
different  fevers.  The  intervals  between  them, 
for  instance,  are  sometimes  longer  and  some- 
times shorter.  Hence  tertians  are  divided  into 
two  kinds,  the  legitimate  or  true,  and  the  bastard 
or  spurious.  The  paroxysms  of  the  legitimate 
kind  are  said  to  last  twelve  hours,  but  those  of 
the  spurious  somewhere  about  eighteen.  A  s  to 
the  first,  namely,  the  legitimate  or  common  ter- 
tian, its  paroxysms  are  scarcely  ever  observed 
to  continue  so  long  as  twelve  hours,  at  least 
such  a  thing  has  not  occurred  to  me  during  a 
practice  of  forty  years  continuance.  We  learn 
from  daily  experience,  that  the  paroxysms  are 
limited  to  five,  six,  seven,  or  eight  hours.  From 
this  rule,  however,  we  must  sometimes  except 
the  first  few  fits  of  the  disease,  which,  in  certain 
constitutions,  are  protracted  occasionally  to  a 
greater  length. 


50 

It  is  supposed  that  the  course  of  the  pa- 
roxysms has  many  things  in  common  with  con- 
tinued fevers.  Some  are  of  opinion,  for  instance, 
that,  as  certain  continued  fevers  terminate  in 
seven  days,  so  a  tertian  fever  is  to  be  limited  to 
seven  rounds  or  paroxysms.  But  it  ought  to  be 
remarked,  that  a  continued  fever  rages  both  day 
and  night  for  the  space  of  seven  days,  whereas, 
an  intermittent  continues  only  from  five  to  eight 
hours  out  of  twenty-four.  Besides,  there  are 
some  continued  fevers,  which  terminate  on  the 
eleventh,  fourteenth,  or  twenty-first  day  ;  on  what 
principle,  then,  can  these  be  referred  to  any  de- 
scription of  intermitting  fever?  can  they  be  refer- 
red, for  instance,  to  the  quartan  which  is  of  longer 
duration  than  the  tertian  ?  Let  us  suppose  that  the 
termination  of  this  disease  falls  on  the  sixtieth 
day,  a  position  which  is  altogether  doubtful : 
there  will  occur  during  this  period  fifteen  ac- 
cessions or  fits,  each  one  of  six  or  eight  hours 
duration  :  but,  on  the  other  hand,  the  continued 
fevers  run  on  throughout  the  whole  of  the  four- 
teen or  twenty  days  without  any  intermission. 

If  there  be  any  point  of  similitude  between 
intermittents  and  continued  fevers,  it  lies  ex- 
clusively in  the  circumstance  of  their  remission 
or  abatement.  They  both,  for  instance,  are 
marked  by  exacerbations  and  remissions  occur- 


51 

ring  at  stated  times.  But  the  fever  is  perma- 
nent, and  even  its  remission  extremely  short, 
and  at  times  scarcely  perceptible  ;  while,  on  the 
other  hand,  the  intermittent  ceases  or  appears  to 
cease  entirely  for  one  or  two  days.  But  there 
can  be  no  real  affinity  between  fevers  that  con- 
tinue without  intermission  for  a  long  space  of 
time,  and  those  which  alternately  appear  and 
disappear  at  stated  times. 


U 


CHAP.    IX. 

Of  the  cause  of  the  disappearance  and  recurrence  of 
the  fever  at  stated  periods.* 


WHENCE  is  this  alternate  disappearance 
and  regular  return  of  the  fever  at  stated  periods  ? 
If  indeed  it  be  practicable  to  fathom  this  subject 

*  Tie  physician  who  undertakes  to  account  for  the  periodical 
recurrence  and  termination  of  the  paroxysms  of  an  intermittent,  may 
be  truly  said  to  «  attempt  the  bow  of  Ulyssis"  As  there  are  few- 
subjects  more  curious  and  interesting",  so  there  are  none  more  dif- 
ficult, in  the  science  of  medicine.  Although  our  author  fails  entire- 
ly in  his  attempt  to  explain  it,  I  am  unable  to  direct  the  reader  to 
any  writer  who  has  been  more  successful.  The  matter  is  as  much 
an  arcanum  naturce  now,  as  it  was  in  the  days  of  the  father  of  physic. 
Nor  does  it  seem  at  all  proba  )le  that  the  thick  veil  which  has  hitherto 
concealed  it  will  be  shortly  removed.  This  veil  is  of  too  strong  a 
texture,  and  is  too  firmly  secured  in  its  place,  to  yield  to  the  lili- 
putian  efforts  of  hypothesis.  It  resists  with  equal  ease  the  torpor, 
and  the  accumulated  excitability  of  Darwin,  and  the  debility,  spasm, 
and  consequent  re-action  ot  Cullen.  Although  the  rapidly  progres- 
sive state  o~  physical  science  convinces  me  that  it  will  yet  be  removed, 
I  am  equally  confident  that  its  removal  must  be  reserved  for  a  much 
more  enlightened  period  than  the  present.  Without  the  least  ex- 
pectation of  shedding  any  additional  light  on  the  subject,  I  will  sub- 


Intermitting  fevei* arises  from  a  local  affection,  produced  by  an 
aeriform  poison  which  gains  admission  by  the  mouth.    This  affec- 


53 

at  all,  the  solution  of  the  question  nuist  be 
sought  for  in  the  phenomena  and  analogies  of 
the  febrile  cause,  and  in  the  alternate  movements 
or  states  of  action  of  various  parts  of  the  body, 
and  of  various  affections-  We  must  first,  there- 
fore, enquire  into  the  varied  march  or  progress 
of  the  febrile  cause. ...Why  it  breaks  out  or  ma- 
nifests itself  at  one  time  and  lies  dormant  at  ano- 
ther, a  subject  ift  itself  both  intricate  and 
obscure. 

Of  the  nature  of  this  cause  we  are  entirely 
ignorant  :    this  only  we  know,  that  it  possesses 

tion  has  its  seat  in  some  part  of  the  primce  vice,  most  probably  the 
stomach.  After  it  has  existed  for  a  certair  length  of  time,  it  brings 
the  whole  system  into  sympathy,  thereby  producing  a  paroxysm  of 
fever.  But  to  explain  why  this  paroxysm  terminates  within  a  given 
time,  and  returns  again  at  a  stated  period,  "  hie  labor,  hoc  opus  est." 
When  we  have  arrived  at  this  point,  we  may  be  truly  said  to  have 
reached  the  "  ultima  thult"  of  the  present  state  of  pathology. 

In  the  mean  time,  I  have  little  doubt  but  the  regular  returns  of 
the  paroxysms  of  an  intermittent  at  the  same  hour  of  the  day,  are  in- 
timately connected  with  solar  influence.  The  disposition  of  the  suo- 
jects,  when  cured,  to  relapse  at  weekly  periods,  bespeaks  also  the 
subjection  of  this  disease  to  lunar  influence.  It  appears  highly  pro- 
bable, then,  that  the  two  great  heavenly  luminaries,  the  regents  of 
the  day  and  of  the  night,  which  exercise  such  an  extensive  and  well 
known  agency  over  the  ocean,  the  atmosphere,  and  the  vegetable 
kingdom,  will  be  yet  found  to  act  a  very  important  if  not  a  principal 
part,  in  producing  the  periodical  recurrences  and  other  phenomena 
of  intermitting  fever.  It  must  be  recollected  that  the  human  s\stem 
when  debilitated  by  disease,  is  very  readily  and  greatly  afl'ected  by 
causes,  which  make  no  sensible  impression  on  it  when  in  a  state 
of  health Trans. 


54 

a  power  of  stimulating  and  inflaming,  or,  at  least, 
exciting  heat ;  that  it  attacks  and  greatly  op- 
presses the  vital  principle,  until  being  itself  at 
length  subdued  by  the  increased  motion  and 
heat  which  it  excites,  it  seems  to  act  as  a  remedy 
against  itself.  Here  the  circumstances  and 
mode  of  action  are  somewhat  similar  to  those 
that  occur  in  a  case  of  surfeit,  where  the  sto- 
mach is  oppressed  by  a  super-abundance  of 
food,  and  where  a  fever  which  is  forthwith  excited 
by  this  oppression,  subdues,  concocts  and  throws 
off  from  the  system  all  hurtful  matters  that  had 
been  mixed  with  the  blood.  But  the  fever  ex- 
cited by  a  surfeit  differs  from  an  intermitting 
fever  in  this,  that  the  former  perfectly  cures  it- 
self, and  does  not  recur  again,  unless  re-produced 
by  a  fresh  error  in  diet. 

The  seeds  of  intermitting  fever  still  remain 
in  the  system  after  the  paroxysms,  and,  there- 
fore, when  at  stated  times  they  break  out  and 
show  themselves  in  fresh  paroxysms,  this  must 
arise  either  from  their  power  increasing  and  dif- 
fusing itself  like  a  ferment  in  every  direction, 
or  from  a  collection  and  concentration  in  some 
one  part,  of  that  which  was  before  dispersed 
throughout  the  body.  But  if  these  seeds  of 
fever  exert  their  powers  in  consequence  of  their 
energies  being  increased  or  concentrated,  how 
is  it  that  they  remain  or  appear  to  remain  wholly 


5o 

inactive  during  the  time  they  are  acquiring 
strength  by  such  increase  or  concentration  ?  In 
this  respect,  the  power  of  the  febrile  cause  to 
excite  inflammation  or  heat  resembles  the  in- 
flammable property  of  gun-powder,  which,  when 
left  to  itself  is  altogether  inert,  but  explodes  as 
soon  as  it  is  brought  into  contact  w7ith  fire. 

When,  therefore,  the  seeds  of  intermitting 
fever  lie  dead  as  it  were  during  the  days  of  inter- 
mission, they  want  a  cause  to  excite  them  to  ac- 
tion. But  to  determine  what  this  cause  is,  is  a 
point  of  no  small  difficulty.  Many  things  in- 
deed seem  suited  to  excite  the  fever ;  but  these 
cannot  be  subjected  or  made  subservient  to  any 
particular  type.  It  follows,  therefore,  that,  at 
stated  periods,  the  febrile  cause  must  break  out 
of  itself;  and  these  periods  are  separated  from 
each  other  by  longer  or  shorter  intervals,  accord- 
ing as  the  cause  derives  strength  from  extrane- 
ous and  surrounding  circumstances. 

But  what  seems  truly  surprising  is,  that  the 
febrile  cause,  while  still  lurking  in  the  system, 
may  be  prevented  from  exciting  real  fever, 
though  not  from  producing  other  morbid  affec- 
tions. By  the  exhibition  of  certain  remedies, 
for  instance,  the  paroxysms  may  be  completely 
suppressed,  and  yet  the  whole  system  continues 
to  be  disordered.     Thus,  there  are  sick  persons 


56 

in  whom  the  suspension  of  fever  is  succeeded 
by  a  sense  of  general  heaviness  and  debility,  a 
swelling  of  the  abdomen,  and  a  loss  of  appetite, 
symptoms  not  to  have  been  expected,  had  the 
paroxysms  continued.  Sometimes  the  patient 
is  relieved  from  all  these  complaints  by  a  renewal 
of  the  paroxysms,  so  that  his  cure  seems  to  arise 
from  a  return  of  the  febrile  affection. 

At  other  times,  what  is  still  more  surprising, 
after  all  the  symptoms  have  disappeared,  the  fe- 
brile fomes  still  remains  behind  perfectly  harm- 
less. It  acquires  strength  in  secret,  or  rather 
lies  hid  like  embers  concealed  by  ashes.  In  this 
state  of  things,  if  any  error  in  diet  be  committed, 
if  the  body  be  exposed  to  cold  or  humidity,  or 
if  the  functions  be  deranged  in  any  other  way, 
then  the  fever,  which  had  lain  dormant  for  a 
month  or  longer,  returns  and  rages  with  as  much 
violence  as  at  first. 

Nor  can  the  disease  be  said  to  originate  from 
these  causes  :  for  there  is  nothing  in  them  cal- 
culated to  produce  intermitting  fever  rather  than 
any  other  affection.  The  original  disease  is  re- 
newed, therefore,  only  because  no  other  form  of 
fever  can  then  occur.  If  the  original  complaint 
was  a  tertian  or  quartan,  that  which  breaks  out 
afresh,  as  here  stated,  assumes  the  very  same 
type.    The  same  cause,  therefore,  still  remains, 


57 

without  having  sustained  the  slightest  change  in 
its  nature. 

This  same  constancy  or  immutability  is  ob- 
served to  exist  even  in  cases  of  re-duplication. 
When  these  happen  in  a  tertian,  the  disease  be- 
comes a  double  tertian  ;   and  when  in  a  quartan, 
a  double  quartan  is  the  result :   the  paroxysms 
still  pursue  the  same  order,  and  correspond  to 
each  other  every  third  or  fourth  day.     Even  in 
cases  of  anticipation,   intermittents  not  unfre- 
quently  preserve  a  certain  order  ;  thus,  at  times, 
the  paroxysms  precede  the  stated  hour  of  acces- 
sion every  day  by   an  equal  period.*     Lastly, 
in  their  decline  and  disappearance,  these  fevers 
do  not  depart  from  this  order.    In  a  double  ter- 
tian, for  instance,  one  of  the  diseases  sometimes 
terminates,  while  the  other  still  remains  with  all 
its  usual  characters.    The  same  thing  is  observ- 
ed in  double  and  even  triple  quartans. 

It  must  not,  however,  be  supposed  that  the 
nature  and  form  of  fevers  are  so  uniform  and 
immutable  as  not  to  admit  of  a  tertian  being 
changed  into  a  quartan,  or  (a  circumstance 
which  more  rarely  occurs)  a  quartan  into  a  ter- 


*  This  is  a  point  of  which  the  practitioner  should  never  lose  sight, 
as  it  is  calculated  to  serve  him  very  materially  in  his  attempts  to 
break  the  course  of  an  irregular  disease....  1 'rar.s. 


58 

tian  or  a  quotidian.  Hence  it  appears,  that  each 
of  these  forms  of  fever  arises  from  nearly  the 
same  cause,  or,  at  least,  that  the}'  are  closely 
allied  to  each  other.  But  the  tertian  is  apt  to 
be  the  most  irregular;  it  oftentimes  undergoes 
such  changes,  that  it  retains  nothing  of  its  pri- 
mary type,  and  can  therefore  scarcely  be  distin- 
guished. Perhaps  the  most  remarkable  of  these 
changes  is,  when  it  assumes  the  form  of  a  hectic 
fever,  and  clothes  itself  in  symptoms  totally  dif- 
ferent from  those  that  are  common  to  it. 

Intermittents  when  somewhat  on  the  decline 
are  extinguished  at  times  by  a  single  blow  as  it 
were,  nor  can  we  discover  how  the  causes  that 
thus  destroy  them  possess  such  an  influence  over 
them.  They  are  removed  by  great  and  sudden 
emotions  of  the  mind  or  body,  as  terror,  for  in- 
stance, has  been  known  to  cure  a  quartan  ague. 
The  same  thing  has  been  effected  by  anger,  in- 
tense heat,  violent  exercise,  and  great  com- 
motion of  the  internal  parts  of  the  system. 
But,  what  is  less  to  be  wondered  at,  these  same 
causes  are  capable  of  rousing  into  action  the 
hidden  and  dormant  fomes  of  intermittents. 
Thus  the  mere  appearance  of  an  unusual  object, 
the  sight  of  a  dormouse,  for  instance,  has  been 
sometimes  known  to  renew  the  disease  with  the 
utmost  violence. 


59 

What  is  perhaps  more  singular  still,  inter- 
mittent are  removed  by  various  remedies, 
which  are  even  sometimes  opposite  to  each  other. 
Whatever  these  remedies  may  be,  the  diseases 
are  cured  by  them  on  nearly  the  same  principle 
on  which  poisons  are  counteracted  by  their  anti- 
dotes. At  other  times  the  febrile  poison  leaves 
the  system  spontaneously,  as  it  were,  without 
any  previous  commotion  whatever.  But,  what 
is  more  to  our  present  purpose,  after  the  fever 
itself  has  ceased,  certain  vestiges  of  it  frequently 
remain  behind.  Thus  there  are  morbid  affections 
which  show  themselves  about  the  same  time 
of  day  at  which  the  paroxysms  usually  occured. 
These  affections  consist  in  a  heaviness  or  pain  in 
the  head  or  body,  or  in  a  certain  disagreeable 
sensation  wrhich  affects  the  whole  system.  If 
certain  authors  are  to  be  credited,  an  intermitting 
fever,  when  it  recurs  even  after  a  long  suspen- 
sion, or  interval  of  health,  usually  attacks  the 
patient  at  the  same  time  or  about  the  same  hour 
of  the  day,  at  which  its  paroxysms  had  formerly 
occurred. 


CHAP.  X. 

Whether  or  not  any  thing  occurs  in  other  morbid  affec- 
tions, or  in  the  action  of  the  various  parts  of  the 
body,  to  enable  us  to  discover  the  cause  of  febrile 
periods* 


LET  us  now  return  to  the  question  formerly 
proposed,  namely,  whether  or  not  any  thing 
arises  out  of  the  foregoing  considerations,  that 
can  enable  us  to  explain  why  the  cause  of  inter- 
mittents  acts  and  lies  dormant  in  the  system  al- 
ternately? Here  it  must  be  acknwledged,  that 
the  preceding  history  of  the  phenomena  of inter- 
mittents,  instead  of  illustrating  the  matter,  tends 
to  render  the  laws  and  principles  by  which  this 
cause  is  governed,  more  uncertain  and  intricate. 
Let  us  see,  therefore,  whether  or  not  any  thing 
can  be  deduced  from  other  affections  calculated 
to  shed  light  on  this  obscure  subject.  In  these, 
many  things  occur  which  may  be  well  applied  to 
intermitting  fever  :  even  in  those  affections 
which  are  dissimilar  to  each  other,  certain  phe- 
nomena take  place,  from  which  we  may  dis- 
cover,  or  at  least  form  some  idea  respecting, 


Gl 

the  causes  of  alternate  motions  or  states  of  ac- 
tion in  the  system- 
Some  writers,  in  their  enquiries  after  the 
cause  of  febrile  periods,  have  considered  the  dif- 
ferent parts  of  the  bodies  of  animals  so  construct- 
ed and  disposed,  as  to  be  capable  of  being 
brought  into  subjection  to  certain  arbitrary 
laws ;  thus,  for  instance,  any  person  may,  at 
pleasure,  say  they,  so  regulate  the  alvine  evacu- 
ations, as  to  make  them  occur  at  a  stated  time ; 
the  appetite  for  food  may  be  so  regulated  as  to 
be  felt  only  at  certain  hours;  sleep  may  also  be 
circumscribed  within  given  limits,  for  we  can 
accustom  ourselves  to  awake  regularly  at  the 
same  hour  in  the  morning  :  But  what  are  we  to 
conclude  from  hence  ?  Surely  it  cannot  be  said 
that  in  intermitting  fever  the  different  parts  of  the 
system  become  by  habit  accustomed  to  alternate 
rest  and  motion  ;  because  from  the  very  begin- 
ning of  the  disease,  they  assume  that  state  of 
action  which  they  are  to  continue  till  its  close. 

There  are  certain  motions  or  states  of  action 
both  natural  and  preternatural,  which  approach 
nearer  to  the  movements  of  intermitting  fever. 
The  eatamenia,  ibr  instance,  appear  only  at 
stated  times  ;  the  same  thing  happens  not  mi- 
frequently  in  hemorrhoidal  affectioas,  In  both 
these  cases  we  can  attribute  the  phenomena  to 


62 

no  other  cause,  than  the  volume  of  blood,  which, 
increasing  for  a  time,  makes  its  way  at  length 
through  the  outlets  of  the  uterus,  or  through  the 
patulous  mouths  of  the  hemorrhoidal  vessels. 
To  a  similar  cause  may  we  attribute  the  efflux 
of  bile,  saliva,  perspirable  matter,  and  sweat, 
which  sometimes  observes  stated  periods.  The 
same  thing  may  be  said  respecting  the  urine, 
which,  at  times,  is  discharged  more  copiously 
than  usual,  at  stated  periods. 

Somewhat  similar  is  the  disposition  of  cer- 
tain tumors,  which  are  accustomed  to  pour  forth 
periodically,  a  quantity  of  blood.  These  tumors, 
when  carefully  examined,  exhibit  veins  changed 
by  a  great  dilatation  into  large  canals :  the 
blood  being  poured  from  the  arterial  capillaries 
into  these  canals,  increases  to  a  considerable 
volume,  and  at  stated  times  bursts  the  barriers 
opposed  to  it,  and  escapes.  I  have  seen  occasi- 
onally another  example  in  various  tumors  when 
cut  through  the  middle  :  from  these,  a  periodi- 
cal hemorrhagy  has  taken  place,  on  account  of  a 
collection  of  blood  in  some  cavity. 

There  are  other  periodical  affections  which 
cannot  be  deduced  from  the  same  cause:  such 
are  different  forms  of  hemicrania,  and  pains 
sometimes  extremely  acute,  which  appear  and 
disappear  alternately,  and  as  it  were  in  a  certain 


63 

routine  or  regular  order.  There  are  many  other 
movements  or  states  of  action  that  occur  in  the 
animal  machine,  which  may  be  likened  in  some 
measure  to  the  ebbing  and  flowing  of  the  sea. 
Kven  continued  fevers  themselves  are  marked  by 
remissions  and  exacerbations.  They  are  gene- 
rally worse  at  night  and  better  in  the  morning. 

But  from  what  cause  can  these  things  be  de- 
duced with  more  probability,  than  from  some 
kind  of  matter,  the  quantity  of  which  is  increas- 
ed or  diminished,  or  else  which  becomes  alter- 
nately more  acrid  and  more  mild  in  its  qualities  ? 
May  not  an  argument  in  favour  of  this  opinion 
be  drawn  from  continued  fevers  that  terminate 
by  an  imperfect  crisis  ?  A  large  quantity  of 
morbific  matter  is  expelled,  and  therefore  tran- 
quillity is  restored  to  the  system  for  some  time  : 
but  the  morbific  matter  still  remaining  behind,  is 
collected  afresh,  and  recovers  strength,  and 
hence  a  relapse  is  apt  to  occur. 

Something  similar  appears  in  gout  and  epi- 
lepsy. In  gout,  in  particular,  there  can  be  no 
doubt  but  there  is  present  a  certain  morbific 
matter  which  gives  rise  to  the  disease:  for  a 
long  time  this  matter  circulates  through  the  sys- 
tem without  producing  either  commotion  or  in- 
jury :  it  is  collected  or  accumulated,  at  last,  in 
certain  places  fit  for  its  reception  :  but  when  i 


64 

has  become  thus  collected,  and  is  by  any  means 
set  in  motion,  an  attack  of  gout  is  the  immedi- 
ate consequence. 

As  to  epilepsy,  that  disease  also  appears  at 
times  to  originate  from  a  collection  of  morbid 
matter.  When,  for  instance,  it  arises  from  a 
particular  spot  that  has  been  bruised  or  wound- 
ed, does  there  not  appear  to  be  in  that  spot  a 
certain  collection  of  particles  by  which  the  nerves 
are  at  length  irritated  and  roused  to  morbid  ac- 
tion ?  and  is  not  this  much  more  evidently  the 
case  when  the  cause  of  the  disease  consists  in  a 
retropulsion  of  miasmata  ?  for  if  the  pores  of  the 
skin  remain  open  and  these  miasmata  be  expelled 
through  them,  the  disease  is  brought  to  a  termi- 
nation, and  a  collection  of  the  miasmata  thus 
prevented. 

These  remarks  are  applicable,  at  least  in 
part,  to  intermitting  fever,  in  as  much  as  there 
are  many  circumstances  which  are  common  to  it 
and  the  diseases  just  mentioned.  Thus  the 
cause  of  gout,  like  that  of  intermitting  fever,  can 
lie  dormant  for  a  given  space  of  time ;  it  is 
sometimes  roused  suddenly  into  action,  either 
spontaneously  as  it  were,  by  passions  of  the 
mind,  or  by  errors  in  diet ;  it  produces  at  times 
a  fever  not  unlike  intermitting  fever  ;  it  may  be 
repelled  into  various  parts  of  the  body,  and  there 


65 

give  rise  to  various  diseased  affections ;  it  is  at 
length  sufadttcd  or  rendered  inactive  by  pain  and 
length  of  time ;  besides  all  these  points  of 
likeness  between  intermitting  fever  and  gout, 
when  the  accumulated  matter  of  the  latter  dis- 
ease is  dissipated  and  ceases  to  act,  the  fomes 
still  remains  behind  in  the  system,  perhaps  un- 
changed, and  towards  autumn,  but  oftenerin  the 
spring,  comes  again  into  action  and  produces  the 
complaint  anew. 

Notwithstanding  the  dissimilitude  of  epi- 
lepsy and  intermitting  fever,  these  diseases  ex- 
hibit certain  characteristics  which  are  common 
to  both.  Epilepsy  is  sudden  and  unexpected 
in  its  attack  ;  it  irritates  the  nerves  and  draws 
them  into  consent  or  sympathetic  and  synchro- 
nous action ;  it  is  sometimes  regularly  perio- 
dical ;  it  is  excited  by  passions  of  the  mind  and 
errors  in  diet,  and  its  cause  is  subdued  or  ex- 
pelled, by  internal  and  external  motions  or 
states  of  action  ;  still,  however,  there  remains 
behind  a  fomes  by  which  similar  attacks  may  be 
afterwards  produced. 

An  attack  of  hysteria  bears  also  some  de- 
gree of  resemblance  to  an  attack  of  intermitting 
fever.  That  affection  arises  from  a  turges- 
cence  of  the  uterus,   and  is  sometimes  sudden 


66 

in  its  occurence,  like  epilepsy,  from  which  it 
does  not  greatly  differ  ;  it  disorders  the  sto- 
mach, produces  coldness,  and  excites  other 
troublesome  commotions  in  the  system.  In 
this  case  the  nerves  are  irritated  and  continue 
under  this  irritation  till  the  menstrual  evacua- 
tion takes  place,  and  the  congestion  of  blood  is 
removed. 

If,  then,  it  be  allowable  to  indulge  a  conjec- 
ture on  the  subject,  it  would  appear  from  the 
the  foregoing  considerations,  first,  That  there 
exists  in  intermitting  fever  a  certain  noxious  or 
morbific  matter  generated  within  the  body  or  in- 
troduced from  without,  capable,  as  we  have  al- 
ready said,  of  being  diffused  throughout  the 
whole  system.  Secondly,  That  this  matter 
is  particularly  hurtful  to  the  liver,  that  it  is 
accumulated  in,  and  exerts  its  action  on  that 
viscus.  Thirdly,  That  after  this  matter  has 
attained  to  a  certain  state  of  accumulation, 
and  acquired  a  certain  degree  of  power,  it  ir- 
ritates the  texture  and  nerves  of  the  liver,  like 
a  foreign  stimulus,  retards  the  progress  of  the 
blood,  and  renders  that  fluid  acrimonious  and 
vitiated  in  its  qualities.  Fourthly,  That  this 
matter  by  its  powerful  action  on  the  nerves 
throws  the  whole  body  into  commotion,  and  is 
at  length,   by  the  fever  that  ensues,  expelled 


67 

and  dissipated  as  it  were  both  from  the  place 
primarily  affected,  and  from  every  other  part 
of  the  system.  Fifthly,  and  lastly,  That  a 
fomes  still  remains  behind,  which,  gaining 
strength  by  degrees,  may  produce  a  recurrence 
of  the  same  commotions. 


CHAP.    XL 


Of  the  diversified  action  of  the  febrile  cause. 


BUT  whatever  conclusions  may  be  formed 
relative  to  the  preceding  points  of  discussion, 
it  at  least  appears  obvious  what  a  great  variety- 
may  occur  in  fevers,  or  what  various  appear- 
ances these  diseases  may  assume.  The  febrile 
poison  may  put  on  forms  altogether  different 
from  each  other.  So  greatly  at  times  do  the  fe- 
vers which  it  induces  appear  to  differ  from  one 
another,  that  some  writers  have  considered  them 
as  belonging  to  different  species  :  yet  the  ac- 
tual difference  between  them  is  not  so  great : 
diseases  arising  from  the  same  source  may  pur- 
sue dissimilar  courses,  or  be  accompanied  by 
different  symptoms. 

Some  authors  contend  that  they  can  prove  by 
many  arguments,  that  vernal  and  autumnal  in- 
termittents  are  not  of  the  same  kind.     Vernal 


69 

intermittcnts,  say  they,  are  of  salutary  effect;  they 
require  little  or  no  medical  aid  ;  they  usually  ter- 
minate with  the  seventh  paroxysm  ;  they  are  not 
accompanied  by  malignant  symptoms  ;  they 
are  not  characterized  by  such  a  degree  of  nausea, 
vomiting,  and  burning  heat ;  the  urine  in  them 
is  not  so  high  coloured,  nor  does  it  deposit  such 
a  lateritious  sediment;  the  sweats  attending 
them  being  less  copious,  the  strength  of  the  pa- 
tients is  not  so  much  exhausted ;  vernal  inter- 
mi  ttents  do  not  commence  as  quartans,  nor  do 
the  tertians  assume  that  form  ;  finally,  autum- 
nal intermittcnts  are  eradicated  by  vernal  ones, 
and  vernal  ones  by  those  of  autumn. 

But  arguments  of  this  kind  are  altogether  in- 
conclusive. What  proves  at  once  that  these 
diseases  are  in  reality  of  the  same  nature,  is, 
that  during  the  course  of  the  same  epidemic 
prevalence,  they  do  not  differ  from  each  other 
in  appearance.  If,  for  instance,  an  epidemic 
intermittent  occur  in  the  spring,  it  abates  or  en- 
tirely disappears  in  the  course  of  the  summer, 
but,  on  the  approach  of  autumn,  oftentimes 
breaks  out  again,  is  attended  with  the  very  same 
symptoms,  and  assumes  the  same  character. 

Nor,  indeed,  are  vernal  and  autumnal  inter- 
mittcnts more  dissimilar  to  each  other,  even 
when  they  are  not  epidemic.    Both  their  symp- 


70 

toms  and  their  type  are  precisely  the  same. 
Their  only  difference  consists  in  this,  that  the 
vernal  intermittents  happen  at  a  time  best  cal- 
culated to  effect  their  solution  or  cure.  At 
that  season  our  bodies  are  renovated  as  it  were, 
perspiration  is  free  and  active,  and  hence  it  is 
that  those  autumnal  intermittents  which  run  on 
till  spring  usually  terminate  then. 

It  appears  then  that  there  is  only  more  or  less 
difference  in  the  effects  of  the  febrile  poison,  its 
nature  being  always  the  same.  The  most  strik- 
ing difference  in  its  effects  is  that  which  forms 
the  different  types  of  disease,  such  as  tertians, 
quartans,  &x.  These  affections,  however  dif- 
ferent from  each  other  in  appearance,  are  the 
same  in  their  nature,  for  they  are  sometimes 
changed  into  each  other.  Every  experienced 
practitioner  must  have  seen  tertians  changed 
into  quartans,  and  quartans  into  tertians  :  be- 
sides, the  same  symptoms  are  common  to  both 
forms  of  the  disease  :  in  both,  the  cold,  the  hot, 
and  the  sweating  stages  succeed  each  other  in 
the  same  order  :  if  any  difference  whatever  oc- 
cur in  the  causes  of  these  affections,  it  consits  in 
their  being  more  or  less  powerful  :  but  how  it 
happens  that  the  poison  comes  into  action  and 
excites  disease  every  third  or  every  fourth  day, 
is  a  question  that  cannot  be  determined. 


71 

There  are  notwithstanding,  in  the  opinion 
of  many  persons,  certain  points  in  which  ter- 
tians and  quartans  differ  from  each  other.  If 
we  may  give  credit  to  certain  writers,  it  is  even 
practicable  to  foresee  from  its  very  commence- 
ment what  type  the  disease  will  assume.  Ter- 
tians, for  instance,  are  marked  by  a  shivering 
and  a  great  coldness,  but  quartans  most  frequent- 
ly by  a  chilliness  or  shivering  alone:  if  a  real 
coldness  does  occur  in  quartans,  it  is  not  pun- 
gent and  pricking,  but  a  more  dull  sensation, 
as  if  the  bones  were  bruised;  the  cold  stage  is 
also,  for  the  most  part,  of  longer  duration,  par- 
ticularly in  persons  advanced  in  years,  to  whom, 
as  we  have  already  remarked,  it  proves  some- 
what dangerous. 

If  we  can  give  credit  to  certain  observations 
that  have  been  made,  the  pulse  exhibits  a  differ- 
ence no  less  striking  in  these  two  forms  of  dis- 
ease. Thus,  at  the  accession  of  tertians  it  is 
said  not  to  be  much  slower  than  natural,  but  is 
considerably  more  so  at  the  commencement  of 
quartans.  In  the  latter  form  of  disease,  as  in 
old  age,  it  is  slow  and  hard;  in  many  cases  tre- 
mulous, obscure,  and  very  unequal ;  after  hav- 
ing been  quick,  frequent  and  small,  the  pulsa- 
tions oftentimes  become  stronger,  and  are 
marked  by  considerable  intermissions.    In  con- 


72 

firmation  of  what  we  have  here  advanced,  Galen 
has  remarked,  that  the  pulse  seemed  confined, 
almost  as  much  as  in  the  case  of  an  ossified 
artery. 

The  hot  stage  in  quartans  is  not  so  intense 
and  burning  as  in  tertians.  The  flowing  of  the 
sweat  is  in  some  cases  less  and  in  others  more 
profuse.  The  urine  also  assumes  different  ap- 
pearances in  different  cases:  according  to  Galen, 
it  is  crude  and  pale  in  the  beginning,  but  be- 
comes higher  coloured  as  the  disease  advances: 
it  then  deposits  a  kind  of  settling  which  is  white, 
not  red  or  lateritious.  Some  physicians,  how- 
ever, have  witnessed  phenomena  altogether  dif- 
ferent from  these.  They  have  seen  the  urine 
saturated  or  turbid  at  the  commencement  of  the 
paroxysm,  and  afterwards  depositing  a  laudable 
sediment.  On  the  days  of  intermission  they 
have  observed  that  fluid  to  be  more  thin  and  lim- 
pid ;  but,  what  is  of  greater  moment,  it  became 
turbid  and  black  previously  to  the  solution  and 
termination  of  the  disease. 

There  is  no  doubt,  indeed,  but  these  pheno- 
mena have  been  observed;  but  they  must  not 
be  considered  as  constant  and  uniform.  As  far 
as  my  experience  and  observation  have  gone, 
the   difference  between   tertians   and   quartans 


is  in  general  not  so  great.  The  appetite  is  in- 
deed, for  the  most  part,  stronger  and  better  in 
quartans  than  in  tertians  ;  the  cold  lit  also  lasts 
longer  ;  but  the  shivering  and  agitation  of  the 
limbs  are  not  so  great  ;  the  pulse  is  more  de- 
pressed and  unequal ;  the  febrile  heat  is  less  in- 
tense; the  paroxysms  are  shorter  ;  the  sweats 
are  more  protracted,  but  less  profuse,  and  occur 
not  unfrequently  at  night  even  during  the  pe- 
riods of  intermission  ;  the  urine  is  of  a  lighter 
colour,  and  if  the  intermission  happen  to  be 
longer  than  usual,  becomes  oftentimes  thinner 
and  more  limpid  during  the  continuance  of  it ; 
not  unfrequently  however,  it  is  observed  to  con- 
tain a  latcritious  sediment. 

A  greater  difference  exists  between  tertians 
and  quartans  with  respect  to  their  course,  solu- 
tion, and  cure.  Quartans  are  of  the  longest 
duration,  running  on  for  a  year  and  sometimes 
longer.  When  they  continue  for  a  greater 
length  of  time,  they  are  cured  with  more  diffi- 
culty. They  are  said  to  have  oftentimes  yielded 
to  the  hemorrhoidal  flux.  But  on  these  several 
points  enough  and  even  more  than  enough  has 
been  already  advanced.  We  will  intentionally 
pass  over  other  circumstances  which  ancient 
writers  mention  as  peculiar  to  these  fevers, 
but  which,   though  they  may  be  true,   are  not 


4 


perfectly  conformable  to  our  own  experience. 
It  is  of  most  consequence  to  have  a  thorough 
knowledge  of  those  circumstances  that  are  most 
frequently  met  with  in  practice  ;  the  more 
rare  occurrences  are  not  so  much  the  objects 
of  art. 


CHAP.   XII. 


Of  febrile  affections  ivhich,  though  different  from  in- 
termittents, assume  their  external  appearance. 


INTERMITTING  fevers,  the  course  and 
nature  of  which  we  have  endeavoured  to  define, 
are,  in  general,  very  easily  distinguished  from 
other  diseases.  But  we  meet  occasionally  with 
certain  febrile  affections,  which,  though  altoge- 
ther different  from  intermittents,  assume  not- 
withstanding their  external  appearance  and  cha- 
racter, and  fallaciously  seem  to  be  of  the  same 
species.  Febrile  affections  of  this  description 
are  numerous,  and  arise  from  various  causes. 
It  becomes  an  object  of  consequence,  therefore, 
to  point  out  the  mode  of  distinguishing  them 
from  genuine  intermittents. 

In  certain  catarrhal  affections,  the  fever  lies 
dormant  or  intermits  during  the  day,  and  comes 
on  at  the  approach  of  night,  being  preceded  by 
a  chilly  fit.  After  various  pleuritic  affections, 
when    the    patients    have    been    tolerably    well 


76 

throughout  the  day,  paroxysms  occur  towards 
evening,  which  give  us  cause  to  suspect  the 
existence  of  an  abscess  or  some  other  relic  of 
the  disease.  In  those  fevers  to  which  lying-in 
women  are  subject,  something  like  an  intermis- 
sion takes  place.  Even  in  continued  fevers,  the 
system  is  oftentimes  in  some  measure  cool  and 
tranquil  in  the  morning,  but  night  brings  along 
with  it  a  paroxysm  sometimes  of  greater  and  at 
other  times  of  less  severity,  and  which  for  the 
most  part  is  not  preceded  by  a  cold  fit.  These 
fevers  disappear  in  general  by  degrees,  and  that 
without  the  assistance  of  febrifuge  medicines. 
Finally,  hysterical  affections  are  marked  at  times 
by  an  appearance  of  febrile  paroxysms  :  towards 
night  the  pulse  oftentimes  rises,  and  an  inex- 
perienced practitioner  would  consider  the  pa- 
tient as  affected  by  a  true  fever  :  but  in  a  short 
time  this  commotion  of  the  arteries  ceases  or 
abates,  nor  do  these  sudden  glows  of  heat  con- 
tinue as  long  as  real  febrile  paroxysms. 

Again,  there  are  other  affections  truly  febrile, 
which  physicians  call  quotidians,  because  they 
are  plainly  marked  by  daily  recurrences  or  pa- 
roxysms :  they  come  on  particularly  in  the 
afternoon  or  towards  evening :  they  are  fre- 
quently ushered  in  by  a  little  chilliness  or  a  very 
slight  shivering :  sometimes,  however,  these 
symptoms  are   entirely  wanting,  and  then   the 


77 

heat  is  neither  intense  nor  dry  and  burning,  but 
moist,  moderate,  and  unequally  diffused.  The 
pulse  is  small,  or  at  least  but  little  elevated, 
varying,  however,  in  this  respect,  in  different 
eases.  The  paroxysms  are  sometimes  longer 
and  sometimes  shorter,  they  do  not  go  off  by  a 
plentiful  sweat,  nor  do  they  in  general  terminate 
in  a  complete  apyrexy  :  some  vestige  of  febri- 
cula  still  remains.  The  urine  is  not  latcritious, 
but  thin  and  transparent  in  the  beginning,  and 
oftentimes  continues  so  throughout  the  whole 
course  of  the  disease  :  at  other  times,  however, 
as  the  disease  advances  it  becomes  thick  and 
turbid. 

These  febrile  affections,  which  are  so  very 
frequent,  are  observed  to  occur  in  those  persons 
who  labour  under  some  obstruction,  particular- 
ly of  parts  situated  in  the  abdomen.  They  at- 
tack, for  instance,  such  subjects  as  have  diseases 
of  the  liver  or  stomach,  and  also  such  as  are 
worn  down  by  long  watching,  passions,  or  la- 
borious exercises  whether  of  body  or  mind. 
Fevers  of  this  description  occur  also  in  persons 
who  indulge  in  frequent  debauches  of  the  table, 
as  well  as  in  those  who  waste  their  spirits  and 
consume  their  strength  in  pursuit  of  criminal 
pleasures.  Lastly,  affections  of  this  kind  take 
place  also  in  females  who  labour  under  obstruc- 
tions of  the  uterus  or  ovaria,  and  in  such  as  suf- 


78 

fer  greatly  from  a  want  of  the  menstrual  dis- 
charge. Even  persons  in  very  early  life  are  not 
exempt  from  these  fevers.  Girls  of  about  twelve 
years  of  age,  or  who  have  arrived  at  that  period 
of  life  when  the  catamenia  are  about  to  appear, 
are  particularly  apt  to  suffer  from  them. 

But  although  these  fevers  resemble  intermit- 
tents  in  their  type,  they  are  in  reality  altogether 
different  from  them  in  their  nature.  They  can- 
not be  considered  as  either  double  tertians  or 
triple  quartans.  In  the  former  of  these,  the  al- 
ternate paroxysms,  as  we  have  already  observed, 
accurately  correspond  to  each  other.  But 
in  the  quotidians  now  under  consideration,  the 
case  is  otherwise :  besides,  in  the  course  of 
these  diseases,  no  positive  apyrexy  occurs ;  nor 
does  the  urine,  in  general,  assume  a  lateritious 
appearance  :  there  is  also  an  absence  of  certain 
other  symptoms  which  we  have  mentioned  as 
being  attached  to  every  genuine  intermittent. 
Finally,  when  the  cure  of  these  affections  is  at- 
tempted by  specific  febrifuges,*  the  remedies 
either  produce  no  effect,  or  prove  injurious.  By 
such  treatment  a  hectic  fever  is  sometimes  pro- 


*  The  term  "  febrifuge"  occurs  very  frequently  in  the  course 
of  this  work.  It  is  made  to  denote  tonic  remedies  in  general,  but 
more  particularly  the  peruvian  bark.  It  is  seldom  used,  I  believe, 
by  our  author,  without  some  reference  to  this   latter  article 

Trans.    ' 


79 

duccd,  which  nature  alone,  or  the  use  of  gentler 
remedies  can  subdue. 

But,  as  quotidian  fevers  sometimes  resem- 
ble intermittents,  so  true  intermittents  assume 
occasionally  the  appearance  of  quotidians.  In 
those  subjects  who  have  been  long  harassed  by- 
tertians,  or  who  have  had  their  diseases  removed 
by  an  unskilful  mode  of  treatment,  a  certain 
fomes  still  remains,  by  which,  as  evening  ap- 
proaches, a  kind  of  febrile  paroxysm  is  pro- 
duced. But  here  obstructions  for  the  most 
part  exist,  occupying  various  parts  of  the  abdo- 
men. This  fever,  therefore,  which  arises  from 
the  relics  or  remaining  fomes  of  intermittents, 
approaches  very  near  to  the  nature  of  quotidi- 
ans. It  is  generally  rendered  worse  by  the  use 
of  febrifuge  medicines,  particularly  if  they  be 
possessed  of  heating  or  stimulating  qualities  : 
nor  indeed  are  remedies  of  this  description  ad- 
missible at  all,  unless  the  functions  of  the  affect- 
ed parts  be  first  restored. 

Having  stated  the  foregoing  observations, 
which  are  founded  on  actual  experience,  it 
would  be  quite  superfluous  to  go  into  the  con- 
sideration of  all  those  circumstances  which  the 
ancients  have  attributed  to  quotidian  fever. 
Respecting  this  form  of  fever  nothing  is  to  be 
found  in  the  genuine  writings  of  Hippocrates. 


80 

Celsus,  on  the  other  hand,  has  given  a  tedious 
account  of  it,  and  has  described  it  as  sometimes 
regular  and  sometimes  irregular  in  its  type. 
Galen  who  is  more  accurate  on  the  subject, 
has  mentioned  some  of  its  peculiarities  which 
he  had  become  acquainted  with  in  a  long  course 
of  experience.  That  writer  was  induced  by 
various  examples  to  attribute  its  origin  to  vis- 
ceral obstructions.  Yet  I  apprehend  that  in 
some  points  he  exceeded  the  bounds  of  experi- 
ence ;  for  the  disease  does  not  occur  as  fre- 
quently as  the  writings  of  certain  physicians 
would  lead  us  to  believe. 

Mercurialis  never  saw  this  disease  during  a 
most  extensive  practice  of  forty  years  duration. 
Riverius  very  judiciously  remarks,  that  out  of 
six  hundred  patients  who  sustained  daily  acces- 
sions of  fever,  scarcely  one  experienced  a  real 
quotidian  :  in  the  mean  time  he  mentions  some 
of  the  characters  and  properties  of  that  disease. 
Thus,  according  to  him,  it  produces  a  tension 
of  the  praecondia,  and  may  be  protracted  to  the 
fortieth  day,  or  even  to  the  expiration  of  the 
second  or  third  month  :  it  is  accompanied  by 
various  symptoms,  and  degenerates  at  last  into 
some  other  disease,  such  as  cachexy,  dropsy  or 
lethargy. 


CHAP.    XIII. 

Of  affections,  the  mask  or  external  character  of -which 
is  sometimes  put  on  by  intermittents  that  have  dege- 
neratedfrom  their  own  nature. 


BUT  if  there  are  certain  fevers  which  as- 
sume occasionally  the  mask  of  intermittents,  so 
there  are  also  other  affections,  the  mask  of 
which  intermittents  themselves  at  times  put  on. 
Sometimes  the  fomes  or  active  cause  of  an  inter- 
mitting fever  may  lie  hidden  or  be  accumulated  - 
in  a  certain  part,  so  that  that  part  may  appear  to 
be  the  only  or  principal  sufferer  :  at  other  times 
it  may  give  rise  to  peculiar  symptoms,  in  which 
the  whole  force  of  the  disease  appears  to  be  con- 
centred :  and,  lastly,  it  may  counterfeit  other 
diseases,  which  pursue  a  course  peculiarly  their 
own,  exhibiting  no  resemblance  and  possessing 
no  affinity  whatever  to  intermitting  fevers. 

We  will  first  adduce  a  few  of  the  most  sim- 
ple and  familiar  examples  on  the  subject.  Some- 


82 

times,  without  any  perceptible  change  in  the 
pulse,  the  most  acute  pains  take  place,  and  re- 
turn at  stated  periods.  Thus  I  have  frequently- 
observed  an  excruciating  affection  of  this  kind 
situated  above  the  eye,  unaccompanied  by  any 
other  symptom.  The  commencement  of  this 
pain  is  sometimes  attended  by  a  sort  of  palpita- 
tion around  the  affected  part.  I  have  also  met 
with  a  kind  of  periodical  opthalmia,  which  uni- 
formly made  its  attack  at  a  stated  hour.  Al- 
though an  inflammation  of  this  kind  does  not 
usually  disappear  in  a  short  space  of  time,  yet 
in  the  affection  under  consideration  the  eye  was 
soon  restored  to  its  natural  state. 

We  meet  occasionally  with  cases  of  excruci- 
ating periodical  hemicrania,  which  are  the  off- 
spring of  intermitting  fever,  or,  rather,  which 
are  intermitting  fevers  converted  into  hemi- 
crania. The  whole  head  is  also  at  times  attack- 
ed by  a  pain  arising  from  the  same  source.  I 
once  saw  a  person  so  dreadfully  tormented  with 
a  pain  of  this  kind,  as  to  be  rendered  almost  in- 
sane. At  first  view  the  nature  of  the  affection 
was  not  clearly  discovered  ;  but,  on  a  closer  ex- 
amination, it  was  completely  unveiled  ;  for  it 
always  made  its  attack  towards  noon,  raged  for 
a  few  hours  with  great  violence,  and  then  re- 
mitted. 


83 

But  the  febrile  cause  fixes  itself  not  only  in 
the  orbit,  and  in  the  eyes  themselves,  but  also 
on  the  external  surface  of  the  head.  Indeed  it 
is  capable  of  attacking  every  part  of  the  system 
separately.  So  true  is  this,  that  in  some  pa- 
tients certain  parts  seem  to  suffer  from  fever, 
while  all  the  others  are  exempt  from  it.  Some 
of  these  parts  are  periodically  affected  by  a  sense 
of  coldness  or  heat ;  others  by  convulsive  or 
tremulous  motions,  so  various  are  the  forms 
under  which  the  disease  appears. 

But,  what  is  not  less  surprising,  pains  arising 
from  a  febrile  cause,  yet  unaccompanied  by  any 
external  signs  of  fever,  oftentimes  attack  the  in- 
ternal parts  of  the  body.  I  remember  to  have 
seen  a  case  in  which  a  very  acute  pain  in  the 
stomach,  marked  by  periodical  recurrences,  was 
at  length  cured  entirely  by  febrifuge  remedies. 
This  pain  was  accompanied  by  no  change  in  the 
state  of  the  pulse,  no  preternatural  heat,  and 
during  its  continuance  the  functions  of  all  the 
other  parts  of  the  system  were  unimpaired. 

In  general,  however,  things  assume  a  differ- 
ent aspect.  When  the  febrile  poison  pervades 
various  parts,  it  usually  produces  in  them  more 
or  less  fever*  This  poison  is  sometimes  con- 
fined, as  to  its  sphere  of  action,   to  a  few  parts 


of  the  body,  and  at  other  times  attacks  a  greater 
number  of  them  ;  it  even  occasionally  passes  in 
succession  from  one  part  to  another.  I  once 
saw  a  patient  who  in  the  course  of  the  same  pa- 
roxysm experienced  the  most  acute  pains  in  the 
following  order :  they  commenced  in  the  legs 
and  thighs,  then  ascended  towards  the  abdomen, 
and  finally  to  the  head,  producing  a  kind  of  apo- 
plexy. There  are  still  other  and  very  dangerous 
forms  of  disease,  under  which  intermitting  fever 
sometimes  masks  itself.  Most  of  these  differ 
so  widely  from  its  natural  form,  that  in  put- 
ting them  on,  it  would  seem  to  have  changed 
its  nature,  and  cannot  even  be  detected  without 
difficulty. 

This  change  or  transformation  of  intermit- 
ting fever  may  arise  from  various  latent  causes. 
Whatever  these  causes  may  be,  the  febrile  poi- 
son is,  under  such  circumstances,  more  active 
and  deleterious,  and  is  diffused  from  its  own 
fomes  over  various  parts  of  the  body.  This 
diffusion  appears  from  the  erratic  or  wandering 
nature  of  the  poison,  in  as  much  as  it  may  lie 
hidden  or  be  fixed  in  various  places.  These 
observations  are  confirmed  by  troublesome  ob- 
structions which  originate  from  the  febrile  poi- 
son, and  remain  after  the  fever  itself  is  sub- 
dued. 


85 

But  when,  by  the  influence  of  these  causes, 
the  attacks  of  the  fever  take  on  unusual  and  dan- 
gerous symptoms,  these  do  not  generally  appear 
at  the  very  commencement  of  the  disease,  but 
show  themselves,  at  furthest,  in  the  third  or 
fifth  paroxysm.  In  this  stage  of  the  disease, 
either  the  cold  fit  cannot  be  removed  at  all,  and 
the  patients  sink  under  il ;  or  else  a  slight  de- 
gree of  warmth  takes  place,  but  soon  afterwards 
the  extremities  become  cold  again.  The  func- 
tions of  the  viscera  are  now  variously  disorder- 
ed, some  more,  others  less,  to  which  succeeds 
sometimes  an  inability  to  move,  or  else  a  toss- 
ing and  perpetual  anxiety.  Either  of  these  states 
denotes  the  utmost  danger. 

It  is  necessary  to  remark,  that  the  pulse  is 
almost  universally  so  small  and  frequent,  that  it 
can  scarcely  be  felt.  I  say,  almost  universally, 
for  there  are  some  cases  in  which  it  possesses 
more  strength.  Thus  when  a  determination  to 
the  head  takes  place,  and  the  patients  are  attack- 
ed by  lethargic  or  comatose  affections,  the  arte- 
ries act  with  greater  force.  Their  action  is 
equally  strong  when  the  disease  assumes  a  rheu- 
matic form.  We  must  not  be  surprised  at  this 
variety  in  the  force  of  the  arteries,  since  the  fe- 
brile poison  exerts  its  power  so  variously. 
Sometimes,  for  instance,  this  poison  attacks  cer- 


86 

tain  parts  of  the  body  like  a  caustic,  corrodes 
them,  and  even  draws  from  them  discharges  of 
mucus  and  blood.  In  other  parts  again  it  excites 
spasmodic  motions  or  convulsions.  This  latter 
mode  of  attack  is  very  frequently  met  with  in 
practice. 

The  fever  thus  masked  under  such  a  foreign 
or  counterfeit  form,  may  pursue  a  variety  of 
courses,  and  depart  entirely  from  the  common 
fashion  or  type  of  paroxysms.  Sometimes  those 
symptoms  which  have  so  unexpectedly  taken 
place,  run  on  in  form  of  a  continued  fever.  At 
other  times,  and  that  more  frequently,  they  con- 
tinue only  for  a  few  days,  abating  sooner  or  later 
in  different  subjects.  Under  these  circumstan- 
ces the  nature  of  the  fever  cannot  be  easily  dis- 
covered, for  its  symptoms  do  not  perfectly  either 
remit  or  intermit.  The  oppressed  parts  do  not 
recover  their  proper  tone,  nor  are  their  functions 
restored  to  health. 

But  not  unfrequently  the  febrile  poison,  even 
when  thrown  on  particular  parts,  preserves  its 
nature  and  acts  conformably  to  its  proper  laws; 
for  it  still  attacks  and  remits  periodically  in  the 
form  of  paroxsms.  Hence  it  appears  that  this 
poison  may  be  in  some  ?neasure  subdued  or  dis- 
sipated and  exhausted,  even  without  intense  fe- 


87 

brilc  action  or  any  remarkable  increase  of  heat : 
I  say,  in  some  measure  subdued,  for  there  stilf 
remain  behind  certain  vestiges  of  these  local  af- 
fections, which,  in  a  subsequent  paroxysm,  pro- 
duce for  the  most  part  symptoms  of  a  more  ge- 
neral and  worse  nature.  But,  what  is  more 
unusual,  after  a  perfect  intermission  of  seve- 
ral days,  the  disease  sometimes  breaks  out 
afresh. 

We  must  not  suppose  that  the  force  of  the 
febrile  poison,  when  wandering  about  and  thrown 
on  certain  parts  of  the  body,  manifests  itself  at 
all  times  in  the  same  way,  or  proves  in  every 
case  equally  injurious.  When  the  paroxysms 
have  been  broken  by  the  operation  of  febrifuge 
remedies,  it  sometimes  happens  that  the  poison 
or  its  relics  are  thrown  on  the  external  parts  : 
these  parts  are  then  attacked  by  pains  more  or 
less  severe,  which  are  removed  in  no  other  way 
than  by  a  recurrence  of  the  fever.  But  more 
frequently  the  poison  is  thrown  on  the  internal 
parts ;  in  this  case  the  abdomen  swells,  or  the 
functions  of  some  of  the  viscera  become  dis- 
ordered. But,  in  order  that  all  things  may  be 
restored  to  their  natural  and  healthy  state,  it  is 
still  necessary,  in  certain  subjects,  that  there 
should  be  a  return  of  real  fever  :  at  least,  in  these 
subjects,  nature  not   unfrequently   cures  such 


88 

diseased  affections  in  that  way.  Hence  it 
appears  how  greatly  motion  and  heat  contri- 
bute to  the  subduing  or  elimination  of  febrile 
poison. 


CHAP.  XIV. 


Of  the  malignant  form  of  Inter mittents. 


AFTER  what  has  been  premised,  we  are 
now  prepared  to  enter  on  the  history  of  malig- 
nant intermittents.  Oftentimes  almost  the  whole 
force  of  these  diseases  falls  on  the  brain  :  the 
patients  become  comatose ;  the  mind  is  disor- 
dered ;  a  lethargy  is  induced,  and,  at  times,  even 
a  true  palsy  and  apoplexy  follow.  In  some 
cases,  (though  this  is  a  rare  phenomenon)  a  kind 
of  catalepsy  has  been  met  with.  We  must  not 
be  surprised,  then,  at  the  occurrence  of  convul- 
sive motions,  subsultus  tendinum,  tremors,  de- 
fects of  vision,  hearing,  and  other  senses,  or, 
finally,  an  entire  prostration  of  the  vital  prin- 
ciple. 

All  these  symptoms,  so  very  unexpected,  are 
marked  by  variety  in  their  origin,  progress,  and 
decline.  They  sometimes  proceed  from  a  slight 
and  at  other  times  from  a  serious  and  dangerous 
beginning.    In  some  cases  their  violence  is  such 


90 

from  their  commencement,  that  they  appear  to 
be  idiopathic,   that  is,   altogether  foreign  from 
the  nature  of  an  intermittent.     But  their  true 
nature  becomes  at  length  unmasked,  for  after 
a  certain  time  they  usually  remit,  and  then  pro- 
ceed in   the  form   of  paroxyms.      In  different 
subjects  the  remission  is  more  or  less  complete. 
Some   persons   during   the    remission    remain 
heavy  and  almost  senseless  ;    others  labour  un- 
der a  total  loss  of  memory  :   but,  what  is  less 
frequently  met  with,  some  patients  who  in  the 
second  paroxysm  appear  to  be  entirely  free  from 
danger,   experience,   on  the  recurrence  of  the 
third,  all  the  alarming  symptoms  of  the  first. 
Even  when  a  perfect  intermission  has  lasted  for 
several  days,  all  apprehension  for  the  future  is 
not  to  be  abandoned;   for,  as  we  have  already 
observed,  a  relapse  many  times  occurs,  and  the 
whole  phalanx  of  dangers   breaks  forth  anew. 
But  these  threatening  symptoms  may  be  subdued 
either  by  the  powers  of  nature  or  by  proper  re- 
medies.    At  times  they  are  carried   off  by   a 
diarrhoea  or  a  copious  discharge  of  urine.     For 
the  most  part,  however,  they  yield  to   certain 
remedies  only. 

The  febrile  poison  falls  not  only  on  the  brain, 
but  also  on  the  organs  of  respiration.  It  less 
frequently,  however,  attacks  these  latter  parts, 
nor  indeed  is  the  reason  of  this  sufficiently  un- 


91 

derstood.  Wb.cn  it  docs  attack  them  its  mode 
of  action  is  not  always  tlic  same.  It  mostly 
excites  spasms  in  them,  which  arc  at  the  same 
time  communicated  to  other  parts  of  the  system. 
But  from  these  spasms,  or  from  the  irritating 
and  almost  corrosive  action  of  the  poison  arise 
various  pains.  These  sometimes  attack  the 
diaphragm,  and  settle  there,  raging  with  the  ut- 
most severity.  At  other  times  they  become 
fixed  in  the  sides,  and  occasion  such  torture  to 
the  patients,  as  to  render  them  unable  to  change 
their  position. 

No  wonder,  then,  if  from  these  causes  respir- 
ation becomes  confined  and  difficult,  attended 
with  cough,  panting,  and  shortness  of  breath. 
Indeed,  at  times,  the  disease  assumes  something 
of  the  form  of  suffocative  catarrh  or  asthma,  from 
a  congestion  and  oppression  of  the  lungs  by 
means  of  a  thick  mucus.  But  it,  occasionally, 
appears  in  another  shape  no  less  formidable, 
namely,  that  of  a  severe  pleurisy  or  peripneu- 
mony.  The  patient  is  then  affected  by  a  spitting 
of  blood,  a  fixed  and  lancinating  pain  in  the 
thorax,  and  a  depressed  pulse.  This  latter 
symptom  does  not  well  agree  with  the  preced- 
ing one. 

The  stomach  is  apt  to  be  a  ye  distinguished 
sufferer  from  the   action  of  the  febrile  poison. 


92 

Sometimes  this  organ  becomes  the  seat  of  the 
most  intolerable  anguish  ;  at  other  times  of  a 
sharp  and  gnawing  pain  :  you  might  suppose 
it  to  be  affected  by  inflammation  or  even  erosion. 
Hence  arise  nausea,  and  forcible,  though  fruit- 
less efforts  to  vomit.  In  this  state  of  the  dis- 
ease, the  occurrence  of  deliquium  animi,  the  face 
and  whole  countenance  being  bathed  in  sweat, 
a  dimness  of  vision,  a  small  and  feeble  pulse, 
and  a  coldness  of  the  skin,  seem  to  threaten  ap- 
proaching death.  Nor  indeed  is  it  possible  for 
the  patients  to  survive,  if  these  symptoms  con- 
tinue long,  increase  in  force,  or  recur  in  several 
successive  paroxysms. 

In  the  midst  of  these  troublesome  and  dan- 
gerous symptoms,  a  distressing  vomiting  often- 
times occurs.  The  matter  evacuated  in  this 
way  is  bilious,  yellow,  porraceous,  foetid,  some- 
times bloody  and  black,  and  is  thrown  up  with 
great  force.  In  some  patients  similar  evacua- 
tions occur  by  stool,  although  the  epigastric 
region  alone  suffers  pain  and  anguish.  In  the 
mean  time  it  is  not  in  the  stomach  and  bowels 
alone  that  the  force  of  the  disease  manifests  it- 
self. The  tongue  is  scurffy,  and  the  urine  is 
secreted  in  small  quantity,  owing  to  the  spasms 
that  affect  the  kidneys.  These  spasms  are  com- 
municated to  the  external  parts  and  produce  in 
them  various  motions  and  effects.     The  same 


93 

symptoms  therefore  occur  in  intermitting  fever 
which  take  place  in  cholera  morbus.  There 
exists,  however,  this  difference,  that  in  fever 
these  symptoms  end  when  the  paroxysm  ends  ; 
whereas  in  cholera  there  is  no  such  respite. 

At  times  the  febrile  poison  expends  its  force 
not  on  the  stomach,  but  on  that  portion  of  the 
alimentary  tube  which  is  situated  beneath  it. 
Hence  arise  excruciating  pains,  as  if  the  intes- 
tines were  acted  on  by  a  caustic.  The  evacua- 
tions by  stool  are  profuse  and  various,  being 
either  serous,  bilious,  or  mixed.  But  in  some 
patients  the  acrimony  of  the  irritating  cause  is 
such,  that  the  stools  are  mucous  or  bloody  as  in 
dysentery  :  at  times  they  are  marked  with  pure 
blood,  and  at  other  times  they  resemble  the  lo- 
tara  carnis,  or  water  in  which  raw  flesh  has 
been  washed.  To  these  symptoms  great  pros- 
tration of  strength  succeeds.  The  patients  are 
affected  with  singultus,  become  cold,  and  lie 
almost  lifeless.  A  person  inexperienced  in  the 
disease,  would  scarcely  believe  it  possible  for 
them  to  rise  again.  But,  strange  to  tell,  at  the 
termination  of  the  paroxysm,  these  terrible 
symptoms  abate,  and  oftentimes  entirely  disap- 
pear. In  various  diseases  of  the  intestines,  the 
irritation  remains  even  after  the  cause  is  remov- 
ed, but  when  the  febrile  poison  is  dissipated  or 


94 

exhausted,  it  seems  to  carry  all  its  effects  along 
with  it. 

The  force  of  the  miasmata  may  fall  on  the 
external  as  well  as  on  the  internal  parts  of  the 
system.  Thus,  papulae  or  pimples  of  various 
kinds  occur  at  times  over  the  whole  surface  of 
the  body,  and  yield  to  the  use  of  febrifuge  reme- 
dies. At  another  time  the  skin  is  suffused  with 
a  deep  red,  which  is  lighter  however  in  some 
parts  than  in  others.  But  more  frequently  a  kind 
of  Sudor  Anglic  anus  breaks  out.  In  many 
cases  this  flows  abundantly  from  the  forehead 
and  breast ;  it  is  every  where  warm  ;  and  the 
more  plentifully  it  flows,  the  m'ore  intense  is  the 
fever.  -  After  a  certain  space  of  time,  sometimes 
longer,  sometimes  shorter,  the  sweat  becomes 
cold ;  the  pulse  is  depressed  and  in  some  cases 
creeping.  Under  these  circumstances,  some 
patients  experience  a  tightness  and  oppression 
about  the  praecordia,  others  a  sense  of  heat  and 
burning  in  the  stomach,  while  all  are  affected 
with  restlessness,  tossing,  and  a  suppression  of 
urine.  The  appearance  of  the  body  itself  be- 
speaks impending  danger,  for  the  flesh  becomes 
of  a  livid  or  blueish  colour. 

When  the  fever  is  ushered  in  by  a  severe 
chill  and  shivering,  the  patient  is  usually  attacked 


95 

by  pains  in  various  parts  of  his  body.  Ilence 
it  appears,  that  in  whatever  form  the  febrile  poi- 
son makes  its  attaek,  it  may  ultimately  produce 
the  same  kind  of  affection.  In  those  profuse 
sweats  of  which  we  have  just  spoken,  the  sick, 
sometimes  experience  in  their  legs  and  thighs 
such  sharp  and  excruciating  pains,  that  the  parts 
would  seem  as  if  pierced  with  a  sword.  In  cer- 
tain cases  a  kind  of  rheumatic  pain  is  diffused 
throughout  the  whole  body,  in  others  it  settles  in 
some  particular  part,  and  in  others  again  wanders 
about  from  place  to  place.  Though  this  pain 
seems  to  be  the  leading  symptom,  yet  it  is  ac- 
companied by  various  others.  In  some  patients 
it  produces  deli  qui  um  animi,  in  others  spasmo- 
dic affections,  and  is  not  unfrequently  attended 
with  inflammatory  local  affections,  which  shift 
from  one  part  of  the  body  to  another. 

But  if  the  febrile  poison  may  prove  injurious 
to  certain  parts,  and  even  become  fixed  in  them, 
it  may  also  attack  the  vital  principle  itself,  and 
derange  the  whole  economy  of  the  system.  This 
is  the  case  in  those  persons  who  labour  under 
an  alarming  syncope  during  the  paroxysms  of 
the  disease.  Under  these  circumstances  the 
countenance  is  cadaverous,  the  eyes  are  closed, 
the  respiration  is  laborious,  and  every  thing 
seems  to  threaten  immediate  dissolution.. 


96 

But  there  are  cases  in  which  the  principle  of 
life  and  motion  does  not  seem  to  be  so  imme- 
diately attacked  as  the  source  of  heat.  Some- 
times when  the  paroxysm  is  ushered  in  by  a  cold 
fit,  no  hot  fit  succeeds  ;  at  other  times,  after  the 
hot  fit  has  commenced,  it  is  gradually  extin- 
guished again.  The  external  surface  of  the 
body  has  then  a  marbled  appearance,  the  counte- 
nance a  leaden  cast,  the  extremities  are  livid, 
and,  to  embrace  every  thing  in  a  few  words, 
all  those  symptoms  occur  which  are  met  with  in 
the  malignant  causus.*  There  are  also  at  times 
accidental  symptoms  which  do  not  uniformly 
prevail,  such  as  intense  thirst,  a  dullness  and 
feebleness  of  intellect,  a  diminished  flow  of 
urine,  &x. 

In  the  proteiform  course  of  intermittents 
many  things  occur  different  from  all  we  have  laid 
down  on  the  subject.  But  we  thought  it  best 
to  mention  nothing  except  what  has  fallen  with- 
in the  limits  of  our  own  experience.  Our  ob- 
servations are  confirmed  by  those  of  the  cele- 
brated Morton,  and  also  by  those  of  the  very 
learned  and  accurate  Torti.  But  there  is  ano- 
ther more  ancient  and  very  respectable  physician, 
who  has  considered  with  no  less  discernment 


*  A  name  given  by  the  Greek  physicians  to  ardent  or  inflamma- 
matorv  bilious  fevers. 


97 

the  metamorphoses  or  irregularities  of  intermit- 
ting fevers.  I  allude  to  Salius  Diversus,  who 
has  paid  the  greatest  attention  to  these  diseases, 
and  from  whose  writings  it  will  not  be  uninter- 
esting to  extract  the  following  paragraph. 

"  In  the  commencement  of  some  intermit- 
tents,  says  he,  while  the  patient  experiences  a 
slight  chilliness  or  shivering,  such  a  great  retro- 
cession of  heat  occurs,  that  the  skin  becomes 
quite  cold,  the  countenance  like  that  of  a  person 
in  a  dying  state,  and  the  pulse  so  small  and  fee- 
ble as  to  be  scarcely  perceptible.  As  the  hot 
stage  comes  on  the  pulse  increases  a  little,  but 
is  still  small,  unequal,  frequent,  and  weak  :  the 
thirst  is  obstinate  and  distressing,  with  great 
anxiety,  dejection,  and  restlessness  :  the  sense 
of  heat  to  the  patient  himself  is  intense  and 
burning,  while  to  the  touch  of  another  person  it 
is  either  imperceptible  or  very  slight :  there  is  a 
great  debility  or  alienation  of  mind,  with  cold 
sweats,  palpitation  of  the  heart,  and  trembling. 
As  the  febrile  paroxysm  declines  all  these  al- 
arming symptoms  abate,  and  at  the  very  com- 
mencement of  the  decline  of  the  paroxysm,  the 
pulse  rises,  and  the  heat  returns.  The  paroxysms 
of  these  fevers  continue  at  times  for  sixteen  or 
eighteen  hours,  and  I  have  observed  that,  on  the 
irights  preceding  the  paroxysms,  the  patients 
though  not  feverish  are  restless  and  uneasy." 


98 

Valesius  has  also  had  occasion  to  witness 
the  deleterious  power  of  similar  fevers,  and  has 
expressly  denominated  them  malignant.  Louis 
Mercatus  has  given  their  history  in  a  very  able 
and  definite  manner,  laying  down  with  great 
clearness  and  precision  their  diagnosis  and  prog- 
nosis, and  delineating  their  proteiform  nature 
and  various  appearances  with  such  accuracy,  as 
to  render  it  evident  that  there  is  no  form  of  dis- 
ease which  they  cannot  assume.  Deriving  his 
knowledge  on  the  subject  from  his  own  exten- 
sive experience,  not  from  the  writings  of  others, 
that  author  omitted  scarcely  one  of  all  those 
symptoms  that  are  apt  to  deceive  physicians  or 
prove  destructive  to  patients. 


CHAP.    XV 


Of  the  change  of  Intermittents  into  Remittents  and 

continued  fevers. 


OF  the  foregoing  description  are  oftentimes 
those  affections,  the  form  of  which  intermitting 
fever  assumes;  but  that  disease  can  also  put  on, 
and  lie  concealed  under,  the  mask  of  other  fevers, 
which  seem  to  be  equally  foreign  from  its  nature. 
That  physicians  may  be  able  to  detect  it  under 
every  possible  mask  or  disguise,  we  make  a  few 
farther  remarks  on  its  various  appearances  and 
various  courses  or  types. 

Most  physicians  are  of  opinion  that  an  inter- 
mittent may  be  joined  or  associated  with  other 
fevers  :  almost  every  one,  for  instance,  thinks 
that  he  has  seen  it  joined  with  a  true  quotidian; 
but  a  true  quotidian  very  rarely  occurs,  and  it  is 
extremely  difficult  to  distinguish  it  from  other 
forms   of  disease.      How,    then,   can    any*  one 


100 

ascertain,  in  a  satisfactory  manner,  that  it  is  join- 
ed to  a  single  or  double  tertian  ?  Must  it  not  lie 
concealed  under  the  symptoms  of  its  associate 
diseases  ?  All  the  ancients,  and  many  modern 
physicians  who  lived  before  the  time  of  Harvey, 
were  too  much  devoted  to  theory.  They  fan- 
cifully believed  in  the  existence  of  a  commixture 
or  conflict  between  phlegm  and  bile,  and  asserted 
that  as  the  one  or  the  other  of  these  gained  the 
ascendency,  fevers  of  various  descriptions  made 
their  appearance. 

The  association  of  an  intermittent  with  cer- 
tain other  fevers  is  a  matter  of  less  uncertainty. 
It  is  occasionally  joined  with  pleurisy,  and  pre- 
serves its  regular  remissions  and  exacerbations. 
I  have  also  seen  it,  at  times,  go  on  in  the  same 
regular  periodical  course,  when  associated  even 
with  small  pox ;  but  its  junction  with  real  con- 
tinued fevers,  which  is  so  often  spoken  of,  is  a 
circumstance  not  so  easily  discovered.  Galen 
very  properly  acknowledges  the  difficulty  of  ar- 
riving at  certainty  on  this  point.  For  my  own 
part,  I  am  inclined  to  believe,  for  reasons  which 
appear  to  me  satisfactory,  that  such  an  associa- 
tion is  not  only  oftentimes  suspected  to  exist 
when  in  reality  it  does  not,  but  that  its  exist- 
ence is  even  contrary  to  the  principles  of  na- 
ture. 


101 

Opinions  on  these  subjects  should  be  drawn 
from  observation  and  reasoning.  That  an  inter- 
mittent may  indeed  become  a  continued  fever 
cannot  be  denied.  When  it  assumes  a  type 
that  is  not  natural  to  it,  the  time  of  its  continu- 
ance in  that  form  is  various  and  uncertain.  It 
runs  on  for  eight,  eleven,  fourteen,  or  even 
twenty  days.  It  is  the  form,  however,  and  not 
the  nature  of  the  disease  that  is  changed.  It  is 
still  marked  by  paroxysms  more  or  less  evident, 
and  which  return  at  stated  hours.  Besides,  it 
terminates  for  the  most  part  in  a  true  intermit- 
tent, namely,  in  a  single  or  double  tertian. 
Whence  it  appears,  that  there  is  no  new  disease 
induced,  but  that  the  former  one,  which  was  a 
continued  fever,  has  lost  one  part  of  itself,  or  is 
divided  into  two  distinct  parts  by  means  of  an 
intermission. 

Nor  does  this  change  consist  less  with  rea- 
son than  with  experience.  For,  when  the  power 
of  the  febrile  poison  is  great,  the  paroxysms 
must  neeessarily  be  of  longer  duration  :  they 
may  even  be  so  protracted  as  to  touch  or  run 
into  one  another.  In  such  a  case  they  assume 
the  appearance  of  a  continued  fever.  But,  in  as 
much  as  the  violence  of  the  disease  increases  at 
stated  hours,  and  there  is  a  regular  periodical 
recurrence  of  certain  symptoms,  the  intermittent 
form  and  habit  are  still  retained  and  manifested. 


102 

Besides,  the  paroxysms  become  daily  shorter  or 
longer,  sometimes  so  very  long  as  to  run  into 
each  other.  Still  the  disease  is  distinguished  by 
the  violence  with  which  the  paroxysms  com- 
mence, and  by  a  previous  remission  or  sense  of 
coldness. 

But  that  we  may  not  be  thought  to  digress 
in  pursuit  of  uncertainties,  we  will  decline  any 
further  disquisition  on  this  subject.  It  is  enough 
for  us  to  know  that  intermittents  do  assume  the 
appearance  of  continued  fevers,  that  they  resem- 
ble them  more  or  less  closely,  that  a  greater  or 
a  less  number  of  paroxysms  succeed  each  other 
without  an  intermission,  and  that  the  remissions 
may  be  more  or  less  evident  and  striking.  There 
is  also  a  great  diversity  in  the  circumstances  or 
symptoms  that  usher  in,  as  well  as  in  those  that 
terminate,  the  paroxysms.  In  some  cases  a 
chilliness  occurs,  while  in  others  the  patients  are 
entirely  free  from  it ;  the  same  thing  is  true  with 
regard  to  sweating,  for  sometimes  the  discharge 
by  the  skin  flows  plentifully,  sometimes  very 
moderately,  and  at  other  times  not  at  all. 

Hence  we  may  understand  what  is  meant  by 
remittents,  subintrants,  and  double  tertians  con- 
tinued. A  remittent  is  a  disease  in  which,  after 
a  paroxysm  has  continued  for  a  time  it  abates, 
until  at  or  near  to  a  stated  hour  another  pa- 


roxysm  takes  place.  A  sul /intrant  is  a  disease 
in  which  the  first  paroxysm  has  not  terminated 
when  the  second  commences,  so  that  each  pre- 
ceding paroxysm  seems  to  run  into  each  suc- 
ceeding one. 

Hence  it  appears  that  subintrants  and  re- 
mittents are  diseases  of  the  same  kind,  differing 
only  in  degree  ;  or  rather,  that  they  differ  only 
in  name,  being  in  reality  the  very  same.  As 
to  double  tertians  continued,  they  are  diseases 
which  run  on  in  a  continued  form,  but  are 
marked  besides  by  daily  exacerbations  occurring 
at  stated  hours.  Hence  it  is  easy  to  see  that 
they  are  of  the  same  nature  with  remittents  and 
subintrants. 

Nearly  allied  to  these  is  the  semitertian, 
which  was  so  much  dreaded  by  the  ancient  phy- 
sicians. This  disease,  according  to  Hippocrates, 
commences  with  a  shivering,  and  is  continued 
and  acute,  but  is  lighter  and  more  severe  every 
other  day  alternately.  According  to  Celsus  it 
occupies  thirty-six  hours  out  of  forty-eight,  and 
does  not  disappear  entirely  during  the  remis- 
sion. In  the  mean  time  it  has  such  frequent 
accessions,  that  it  might  be  taken  for  a  disease 
jf  a  different  kind.  But  Galen  has  more  accu- 
rately said  of  it,  that  it  is  a  continued  disease, 
but  is  marked  bv  an  exacerbation  and  a  chill 


104 

every  third  day;  he  says  that  it  consists  of  two 
fevers,  a  tertian,  and  a  continued  quotidian,  and 
occupies  forty- eight  hours  in  its  period.*  In 
some  things,  indeed,  that  writer  seems  to  con- 
tradict himself,  and  this  is  particularly  observa- 
ble in  what  he  has  here  and  there  written  on  the 
subject  of  the  semi- tertian. 

From  these  ciscumstances,  or  rather  from 
the  hidden  nature  of  this  form  of  fever,  many 
disputes     have    arisen     respecting    it     among 
more    modern     writers.     Some    have    endea- 
voured  to  ascertain   clearly  the   sentiments  of 
the    ancient     physicians    on   the    subject ;     to 
these    many   have    added    something  of  their 
own,   derived  either  from  opinion,  or  observa- 
tion.      Some,    for    instance,     have    conceived 
that  two  paroxysms  occur  on  the  same  day ; 
this   wras   the    case   with   Riverius,   who    even 
makes   mention   of  a  quadruple-tertian   being 
joined  with  a  continued  quotidian.    Others  have 
suspected  the  continued  fever  to  arise  from  an 
inflammation  of  some  viscus,  and  have  derived 
from  thence  the  shiverings  that  sometimes  suc- 
ceed each  other.     All  these  writers,  however, 
agree  that  the  disease  is  a  compound  of  a  ter- 
tian and  a  continued  fever,  and  have  attributed 

*  The  word  "  period"  as  used  in  this  place,  includes  both  the 
paroxysm  and  the  succeeding-  interval  of  remission.  These  two  terms 
of  time  added  together  make  up  the  space  of  forty-eight  hours. 


105 

to  the  joint  influence  of  these  two,  certain 
inequalities  and  irregularities  by  which  it  is 
marked. 

Feeling  but  little  interest  in  these  controver- 
sies, we  will  not  enquire  into  the  minutiae  of  the 
sentiments  of  former  writers  respecting  this  dis- 
ease, but  only  how  their  general  sentiments 
agree  with  what  we  derive  from  observation. 
The  febris  hemitritaa  or  semitertian  fever, 
then,  we  consider  as  a  continued  double  tertian. 
Such  however  is  the  peculiarity  of  its  type,  that 
one  of  its  paroxysms  is  ushered  in  by  a  cold  fit, 
while  the  next  is  not,  and  so  on  alternately.  It 
is  also  accompanied  by  wandering  and  uncertain 
rigors  and  shiverings,  which  occur  more  or  less 
regularly  at  stated  hours.  Hence  it  appears  that 
the  hemitritasa  or  semitertian  fever  is  a  disease  of 
a  malignant  aspect,  and  approaches  somewhat  to 
a  malignant  causus. 

In  the  same  point  of  view  was  this  disease 
considered  both  by  the  ancients  and  their  im- 
mediate successors.  Hippocrates  pronounces 
it  fatal,  and  says  that  it  is  accompanied  by  vo- 
miting, tremors,  and  a  sense  of  burning  at  the 
stomach.  Galen  represents  it  as  extremely  dan- 
gerous :  the  pulse  in  it,  he  observes,  is  slow  and 
crawling,  the  heat  forsakes  the  extremities  and 
retreats  to  the  central  parts  of  the  body,  particu- 


106 

larly  to  the  abdomen  and  thorax,  and  it  is  at- 
tended with  a  comatose  disposition,  or  with  de- 
lirium and  watchfulness.  By  Rondeletius  it  is  de- 
nommatedfebris  syncopdlis,  BySchenkius  it  is 
described  as  of  a  pestilential  nature.  Spigelius 
declares  it  to  be  a  real  pestilence.  Forestus  was 
accustomed  to  meet  with  it  during  the  preva- 
lence of  malignant  fevers.  Valaeus  considered 
the  rigors  and  tremors,  with  which  he  generally 
observed  it  to  be  accompanied,  as  strong  evi- 
dences of  its  malignity. 

No  wonder,  then,  if  the  several  descriptions 
of  the  semitertian,  as  given  by  medical  writers, 
should  differ  widely  from  each  other.  All  the 
symptoms  which  we  have  enumerated  do  not 
occur  in  the  same  case  of  fever.  In  some  cases 
more  of  these  symptoms  are  manifested,  in 
others  fewer,  and  in  others  again  symptoms  al- 
together different  appear.  At  times  the  disease 
is  introduced  by  a  severe  chill,  at  other  times  by 
a  slight  chill  or  shivering.  In  some  instances 
cold  and  hot  fits  succeed  each  other  alternately, 
and  the  exacerbations  or  paroxysms  are  nume- 
rous and  frequent.  Whatever  symptoms  are 
unfavourable  in  intermittents,  (and  we  have  al- 
ready said  that  the  symptoms  of  this  description 
are  various,)  are  dangerous  when  they  occur  in 
the  semitertian.    Hence  the  signs  and  evidences 


107 

of  malignity  in  these  two  diseases  are  alike  plain 
and  intelligible. 

Of  nearly  the  same  kind  arc  the  febres  tri- 
taiopbia,  a  sort  of  tertians  so  called  by  Galen, 
but  which  nevertheless  approach  nearer  to  re- 
mittents, and  are  therefore  more  mild.  Yet 
even  these  are  oftentimes  dangerous,  particular- 
ly when  they  have  irregular  and  inordinate  exa- 
cerbations. But  there  are  other  fevers  closely 
allied  to  these,  which  are  no  less  dangerous, 
namely  the  febres  ardentes,  or  causi,  of  the 
ancients.  These,  as  Galen  observes,  carry  with 
them  conclusive  evidence  that  they  are  tertians 
in  disguise  :  in  this  alone  do  they  differ  from 
common  tertians,  namely,  that  they  are  not 
ushered  in  by  a  cold  fit,  nor  do  they  perfectly 
intermit.  It  is  certain,  however,  that  they  ter- 
minate in  tertians  or  true  intermittents,  from 
which,  if  we  regard  the  name,  they  appear  not- 
withstanding to  differ  very  widely. 


CHAP.   XVI. 


Various  observations  adduced  in  confirmation  of  the 
foregoing  opinions  and  doctrines. 


HENCE  it  appears,  that  intermittents  may 
be  masked  by  and  of  themselves,  as  is  the  case 
when  they  put  on  the  form  of  continued  fevers 
or  remmittents.  But,  that  their  disguise,  how- 
ever various,  may  be  more  readily  detected,  and 
their  nature  more  accurately  understood,  I  will 
endeavour  to  give  a  faithful  history  of  those  that 
have  fallen  under  my  notice  in  certain  epidemic 
seasons. 

The  summer  of  a  certain  year  having  been 
warm  and  dry,  fevers  prevailed  extensively  in 
the  autumn.  These  fevers  took  on,  at  first,  a 
continued  form,  but  retained  it  for  only  five  or 
six  days:  they  resolved  themselves  then  into 
true  intermittents.  In  the  autumn  of  the  fol- 
lowing year,  the  fevers  generally  commenced 
with  the  type  of  double  or  single  tertians,  but 


109 

soon  degenerated  into  continued  fevers  of  fifteen 
or  twenty  days  continuance.  During  this  pe- 
riod various  paroxysms  occurred,  in  some  cases 
at  stated  hours,  either  at  night,  early  in  the 
morning,  or,  not  unfrequently,  in  the  afternoon. 
Occasionally  the  paroxysms  were  lighter,  and 
more  violent  on  alternate  days.  It  was  not  un- 
common for  the  sick  to  suffer  three  exacerba- 
tions on  the  same  day,  or  on  alternate  days. 

Seldom  in  these  fevers  were  the  exacerba- 
tions preceded  by  a  regular  cold  fit.  Yet  some 
patients  experienced  at  their  commencement,  a 
slight  sense  of  chilliness  :  in  such  cases, 
the  fever  did  not  rage  with  so  much  vio- 
lence, as  in  others,  where  the  paroxysms  were 
not  introduced  by  a  chill.  Ultimately,  however, 
these  fevers  were  for  the  most  part  changed  into 
regular  or  irregular  intermittents.  Some  per- 
sons remained  tolerably  well  during  the  day, 
but  were  attacked  by  fever  on  the  approach  of 
night.  Many  others  experienced  various  symp- 
toms, which  it  would  be  altogether  superfluous 
to  enumerate  at  present. 

Two  years  afterwards  another  epidemic  pre- 
vailed, in  which  the  diseases  assumed  the  form 
of  triple  tertians.  In  these,  the  exacerbations 
were  preceded  by  a  cold  fit,  which  furnished  sa- 


110 

tisfactory  evidence  of  their  being  of  the  nature 
of  intermittents. 

In  this  epidemic,  however,  the  fevers  did  not 
always  assume  the  same  type :  their  symptoms 
were  also  different ;  I  saw  many  cases  where  the 
disease,  without  any  previous  cold  fit,  ran  on 
like  a  continued  fever  till  the  eleventh,  four- 
teenth, or  twentieth  day.  In  these  cases  nothing, 
in  general,  occurred  till  towards  their  close, 
from  which  it  could  be  inferred  that  the  disease 
was  of  the  nature  of  a  remittent ;  then  it  seemed 
to  abate  at  stated  times,  and  to  be  marked  by 
lucid  intervals.  Still,  however,  the  violence  of 
the  paroxysms  was  such  as  to  threaten  the  sick 
with  the  utmost  danger. 

In  the  spring  of  the  following  year,  fevers 
assumed  a  different  aspect.  Most  of  them  were 
slight  in  the  beginning  :  for  the  first  six  or  ten 
days  they  pursued  a  continued  course,  without 
manifesting  any  thing  of  an  intermitting  or  re- 
mitting type  :  the  paroxysms  were  severe,  and 
not  preceded  by  any  cold  fit,  unless  perhaps  in 
certain  cases,  where  the  patients  experienced  a 
slight  chilliness  accompanied  by  something  of  a 
cough  :  this  disclosed  to  us  the  nature  of  the  dis- 
ease. At  times  the  fever  took  on  the  form  of 
an  irregular   intermittent  from   its  very    com- 


Ill 

mencemcnt.  The  same  type  was  assumed  by 
those  attacks  of  disease  which  began  as  continu- 
ed fevers  and  changed  to  intermittents  ;  they 
became  at  last  a  kind  of  double  tertians. 

In   these  continued  fevers  I  have  observed 
an  appearance  different  from  any  yet  mentioned. 
In  many  persons  several  remissions  and  exacer- 
bations occured  on  the  same  day  :    in  others  a 
sense  of  heat  and  cold  continued  to  succeed  each 
other  alternately,  for  several  days.     At  length, 
however,  these  fevers  were   changed  into  true 
remittents  or  intermittents,  as  well  as  the  others 
of  which  we  have  treated.   But  there  were  cases 
in   which,  without  this  alternate  vicissitude  of 
heat  and  cold,  the  fever  continued  to  rage  with 
great  violence  for  three  or  four  days  or  more  : 
a  remission  then  took  place,  which  lasted  one 
day  or  perhaps  longer  :  after  this  the  fever  re- 
turned again,  and  raged  without  intermission  for 
three   or   four  days  longer.     Most  frequently, 
however,   these  remissions    and   exacerbations 
succeeded  each  other  in  such  a  way  as  not  to 
constitute  any  regular  type  of  fever. 

Hence  it  appears  that  all  these  epidemics 
may  be  reduced  to  the  following  kinds  or  de- 
scriptions of  disease.  1.  Genuine  intermit- 
ting fevers.  2.  Fevers  which  are  changed 
into  remittents.     3.    Fevers   which  assume  at 


112 

first  a  continued  form,  although  they  originate 
from  the  real  cause  that  produces  inter mittents. 
4.  Others  which,  from  having  been  intermit- 
tents,  become  continued  fevers.  5.  Fevers 
which  run  on  in  a  continued  form  for  five  or  six 
days  or  even  more.  6.  Those  of  the  same 
nature  that  run  on  as  continued  fevers  for  fifteen 
or  twenty  days.  7.  Fevers  marked  by  re- 
missions longer  or  shorter,  more  or  less  con- 
spicuous, and  sometimes  not  even  obvious  to 
the  senses.  8.  Fevers  with  exacerbations 
sometimes  preceded  by  a  cold  fit,  and  sometimes 
not.  9.  Fevers  altogether  irregular  both  as  to 
exacerbations  and  remissions. 


CHAP.   XVIL 

Further  observations  setting  forth  the  variety  and 
danger  of  such  fevers. 


AMONG  the  most  remarkable  epidemics 
within  my  recollection, I  will  mention  one  which 
originated  from  a  very  extensive  pond  filled 
with  putrid  substances.  Previously  to  the  dis- 
ease to  which  I  allude,  the  neighbourhood  where 
it  prevailed  had  been  infested  by  fevers  such  as 
we  have  just  described :  but  there  occurred  at 
length  a  remittent  inclining  to  a  continued  form, 
in  the  paroxysms  of  which  the  head  was  greatly 
affected.  This  disease  was,  for  the  most  part, 
marked  with  great  oppression  at  the  breast  and 
about  the  precordia,  delirium,  and  convulsions  : 
it  oftentimes  assumed  the  appearance  of  true 
apoplexy,  but  more  frequently  that  of  lethargy  : 
at  times  the  sick  lay  motionless,  deprived  of  the 
exercise  and  power  of  their  senses  ;  not  unfre- 
quently  the  paroxysms  commenced  with  severe 
head-ache,  and  the  most  excruciating  pains  in  the 


114 

joints.  On  the  remission  of  the  fever  all  these 
symptoms  abated,  and  sometimes  the  sick  ap- 
peared to  be  quite  out  of  danger. 

At  other  times  the  disease  assumed  an  as- 
pect somewhat  different ;  the  febrile  symptoms 
ran  high,  with  an  acute  pain  in  the  side  :  the 
breast,  as  in  peripneumony,  was  oppressed  with 
a  heaviness  and  a  difficulty  of  breathing :  in 
some  cases  there  was  a  continual  and  very  dis- 
tressing vomiting  :  in  others,  suffocating  sensa- 
tions, pains  in  the  bowels,  and  such  like  symp- 
toms, raged  with  great  violence  during  the  whole 
course  of  the  paroxysms  :  besides  spasms  and 
convulsive  motions,  many  of  the  sick  were  sub- 
ject to  syncope  ;  most  of  them  to  such  extreme 
debility,  that  they  seemed  ready  to  expire; 
seme  of  them  indeed  lay  as  if  already  dead  ; 
during  this  great  prostration  of  strength,  the 
surface  of  the  body  wras  cold  and  of  a  marbled 
appearance. 

In  all  these  cases  the  force  of  the  pulse  was 
various.  At  times  the  violence  of  the  symp- 
toms wras  so  great,  as  to  break  in  on  the  regular 
course  of  the  paroxysms  and  render  them  ob- 
scure ;  the  pulse  was  then  contracted  and  weak, 
as  if  there  had  been  a  deficiency  of  vital  energy ; 
but  at  other  times,  and  that  most  commonly,  the 
febrile  symptoms  were  high  ;  under  these  cir- 


115 

cumstanccs  the  pulse  was  strong  and  very  fre- 
quent ;  in  some  instances,  however,  it  was  less 
elevated,  and  struck  the  lingers  with  less  force: 
still  it  was  sufficiently  forcible  to  show  of  itself 
that  the  fever  was  very  high. 

In  the  following  year  a  fever  of  the  same 
kind  became  prevalent.  It  was  a  double  tertian 
and  continued  subintrant.  In  this  disease  apo- 
plectic and  lethargic  symptoms  came  on  at  the 
very  commencement  of  the  cold  fit,  and,  such 
was  their  force,  that  they  continued  throughout 
the  whole  course  of  the  paroxysm;  but  as  the 
paroxysm  passed  off,  the  sick  revived  as  it  were 
from  this  deplorable  condition,  and  returned  to 
the  exercise  of  their  senses  and  their  intellect : 
you  would  have  sworn  that  they  had  suffered  no 
injury.  So  great  was  the  remission  of  the  fever 
and  the  intermission  of  the  bad  symptoms,  that, 
provided  the  subjects  were  young,  they  did  not 
at  first  view  appear  to  "be  sick  :  but  when  ad- 
vanced in  years,  their  situation  was  much  more 
dangerous,  and  unless  art  came  opportunely  to 
their  relief,  they  soon  fell  victims  to  the  dis- 
ease. 

Three  years  afterwards  I  met  with  another 
epidemic  of  the  same  kind  with,  or  at  least  not 
very  dissimilar  to,  the  foregoing  ones.  This 
disease  prevailed  throughout   the  summer  and 


116 

autumn,  and  proved  extremely  fatal  in  its  course 
But  that  its  symptoms  may  be  the  more  clearly- 
comprehended,  I  will  describe  a  few  curious 
cases  of  it :  from  these  it  will  be  easy  to  judge 
of  the  great  variety  that  may  occur  in  the  effects 
of  febrile  poison.  It  will  appear,  in  particular, 
how  dangerous  this  poison  may  be,  even  in 
cases  where  the  sick  entertain  the  most  sanguine 
hopes  of  a  recovery,  and  where  no  danger  can 
be  apprehended  from  the  violence  of  the  dis- 
ease. 

A  young  woman  was  attacked  by  a  remit* 
ting  fever.  In  the  third  paroxysm  she  became 
insensible;  her  lungs  were  oppressed,  her  breath- 
ing became  stertorous,  and  in  eight  hours  she 
died.  The  fate  of  my  next  patient  was  no  less 
unfortunate  and  melancholy.  He  had  been  at- 
tacked by  a  double  tertian  fever.  During  the 
third  paroxysm  he  fell  into  a  delirium  which 
continued  for  three  days.  During  the  day  his 
fever  was  moderate,  but  it  encreased  on  the  ap* 
proach  of  night,  arid  put  a  period  tQ  his  exist, 
en  ce. 

Another  person  was  attacked  by  a  remitting 
fever,  somewhat  inclined  to  become  a  continued 
one.  On  the  fifth  day,  he  fell  into  a  lethargy  or 
coma,  and  an  oppression  of  the  breast  coming 
on,  he  expired,     In  a  certain  female  subject,  a, 


U7 

disease  of  the  same  kind  assumed  a  different  ap- 
pearance, and  pursued  a  different  course.  The 
patient  was  attacked,  for  instance,  by  a  genuine 
intermittent;  but  on  the  fourth  or  fifth  pa- 
roxysm her  mind  became  deranged..., she  con- 
tinued in  that  state,  without  much  fever,  for 
six  days,  and  then  recovered  her  senses  ;  but 
the  fever  again  encreasing,  she  was  carried  off 
by  the  next  paroxysm. 

A  certain  gentlemen  ill  of  a  remitting  fever, 
put  himself  under  my  care.  He  had  daily  a  rigor 
and  shivering  :  at  length  on  the  fifth  day,  he  fell 
into  a  lethargy  which  continued  for  twenty-four 
hours.  By  degrees,  however,  he  recovered  his 
senses,  and  was  of  a  sound  and  firm  mind  for 
one  day,  but  a  shivering  and  paroxysm  occur- 
ring again,  he  died  of  a  kind  of  asthmatic  suffo- 
cation. No  less  unexpected  was  the  fate  of 
several  other  patients,  who,  after  moderate  pa- 
roxysms, became  cold  on  the  surface  of  the 
body  and  were  seized  with  faintings ;  their 
strength  then  failed  entirely,  and,  after  suffering 
great  oppression,  they  expired, 

It  appears  from  the  foregoing  circumstances, 
that  these  fevers  attack  more  particularly  the 
brain,  the  seat  of  the  intellect,  but  that  they 
also  do  great  violence  and  injury  to  the  lungs, 
Nor  are  the  pra?cordia  less  affected,  and  even 


118 

the  heart  itself  is  a  great  sufferer.  In  a  word, 
even  the  vital  principle  is  attacked  and  over- 
whelmed, as  it  were,  by  the  febrile  poison,  and 
from  hence  are  to  be  deduced  the  dangerous 
symptoms  which  the  sick  experience  :  these 
symptoms  are  so  violent,  particularly  in  persons 
advanced  in  years,  that,  unless  the  greatest  at- 
tention be  paid  to  them  in  the  commencement 
of  the  disease,  they  run  on  to  a  fatal  issue. 
Youthful  persons  more  readily  recover ;  yet 
many  even  of  them  are  carried  off  either 
through  a  neglect  of  remedies,  or  by  the  force 
of  the  disease  proving  superior  to  the  resources 
of  art. 

It  may  be  thought  singular  in  these  diseases, 
that  sometimes  from  so  slight  a  beginning,  the 
danger  should  become  so  urgent  and  threaten- 
ing in  the  course  of  a  few  days.  But  it  is  a 
problem  no  less  difficult  to  solve,  how  a  cause 
which  so  disorders  the  brain,  and  so  oppresses 
the  lungs,  can  of  its  own  accord  give  the  sys- 
tem a  temporary  respite,  or  cease  for  a  time  to 
act.  Thus,  after  the  third  or  fourth  day  the 
action  of  this  cause  is  suspended,  and  for  a  day 
or  more  the  patients  seem  free  from  disease. 
Other  maladies  do  not  pursue  such  a  course ; 
in  them  the  affected  parts  recover  only  by  de- 
grees ;  and  after  they  have  recovered,  or  appear 
to  have  recovered  in  the  space  of  a  day  or   two, 


119 

the  life  of  the  patient  is  seldom  brought  into 
clanger  again  by  a  sudden  return  of  the  disease  ; 
at  least  this  is  not  generally  the  ease,  as  it  is  in 
malignant  intermittent. 

Hence  may  be  deduced  a  rule  or  conclusion 
of  no  small  moment  in  acute  diseases.  It  ap- 
pears, for  instance,  that  there  may  be  great 
disorder  in  the  functions  of  the  body  without 
either  real  inflammation  or  any  fixed  disease  in 
the  solid  parts.  Many  patients  are  delirious, 
raving,  and  appear  to  labour  under  a  peripneu- 
mony,  others  suffer  the  most  excruciating  pains, 
while  others  again  have  their  stomach  and 
bowels  greatly  disordered;  they  appear,  indeed, 
to  be  in  as  much  danger  as  if  they  were  la- 
bouring under  the  greatest  inflammation,  un- 
der a  wound,  or  some  strong  irritation  about  to 
extinguish  the  vital  principle  ;  yet  those  parts 
which  had  experienced  such  deep  and  distress- 
ing affections,  may  in  a  short  time  be  entirely 
relieved.  Hence  it  appears  that  these  terrible 
symptoms  may  arise  from  some  wandering  sti- 
mulus, which  flies  off  and  returns,  or  acts  and 
lies  dormant,  alternately ;  and  that  they  are 
sometimes  more  alarming  in  appearance,  than 
dangerous  in  reality. 


CHAP.  XVIIL 

# 
Of  the  method  of  detecting  or  distinguishing  Intermit* 
tents  when  disguised  under  the  mask  or  appearance 
of  other  diseases* 


HAVING  thus  delineated  the  different 
phases  or  appearances  of  intermittent  s,  and 
given  an  accurate  history  of  the  symptoms 
under  which  they  are  usually  masked,  it  remains 
that  I  should  mention  the  signs  by  which  the 
nature  of  these  masked  diseases  may  be  detect- 
ed. They  possess,  for  the  most  part,  such  vio- 
lence, that  unless  their  nature  and  tendency  be 
well  understood,  they  may  prove  highly  dange- 
rous to  the  persons  whom  they  attack. 

The  origin  and  nature  of  these  fevers  may 
be  known  from  their  modes  of  attack :  if  they 
have  intermitted  or  only  remitted,  and  after-* 
wards  returned  and  run  on  with  unusual  symp- 
toms, there  is  ground  to  suspect  that  they  are 
masked  diseases.     This  suspicion  will  be  con- 


mt 


121 

verted  into  certainty,  if  the  exacerbations  should 
be  ushered  in  by  a  cold  fit.  But  should  there 
be  nothing  but  a  slight  chilliness,  recourse  must 
then  be  had  to  other  signs,  for  the  disease  exhi- 
bits only  the  appearance  of  a  continued  fever 
marked  by  periodical  exacerbations.  But  there 
are  many  fevers  of  this  description,  that  have  no 
affinity  to  remittents. 

But  if  fevers,  which  are  even  not  ushered  in 
by  a  cold  fit,  be  marked  by  paroxysms  sudden- 
ly occurring,  if  the  patients,  when  apparently 
well,  be  attacked  instantaneously  as  if  they  had 
received  a  blow  ;  if  stretchings  and  pains  of  the 
head,  instead  of  a  cold  fit,  precede  the  paroxysms, 
under  these  circumstances,  there  is  good  reason 
to  believe  that  the  disease  is  an  intermittent  un- 
der a  masked  form. 

The  same  conclusion  is  to  be  drawn  relative 
to  the  nature  of  the  disease,  when  it  has  pa- 
roxysms that  are  succeeded  by  a  striking  remis- 
sion. So  great,  at  times,  is  the  violence  of  these 
paroxysms,  that  they  are  accompanied  with  real 
danger,  whereas  during  their  remission,  which 
is  quite  a  lucid  interval,  the  patients  seem  to  be 
in  no  danger  whatever.  Under  such  circum- 
stances, there  can  be  no  doubt  but  the  diseaae 
is  a  remitting  fever  wearing  the  mask  of  a  con- 
tinued one. 


122 

The  nature  of  the  fever  is  equally  manifest, 
if  the  exacerbations  terminate  in  a  copious 
sweat ;  if  the  paroxysms  return  about  the  same 
hour ;  if  they  exactly  correspond  with  each  other 
every  day  or  on  alternate  days ;  if  there  occur 
very  violent  and  alarming  symptoms  which  ap- 
pear and  terminate  periodically,  such  as  deliri- 
um, fierce  ravings,  lethargy,  most  acute  pains  in 
the  head,  a  failure  of  strength,  tormina  of  the 
intestines,  Sec. 

Lastly,  masked  intermittents,  may  be  no  less 
certainly  detected,  as  was  formerly  observed,  by 
the  colour  of  the  urine.  In  that  disease  the 
urine  is  very  often  lateritious,  which  is  a  sign, 
almost  infallible,  that  the  disease  belongs  to  the 
family  of  intermittents.  But  the  urine  is  lateri- 
tious only  during  the  remission ;  whence  it 
ought  to  be  attended  to  and  examined  with  the 
utmost  care. 

The  following  instances  wilt  show  with  what 
confidence  these  signs  may  be  depended  on,  and 
how  readily  the  disease  may  be  detected  amidst  1 
the  various  and  unusual  symptoms  that  attend 
it  and  render  it  obscure.  I  once  attended  a  fe- 
male patient,  who  was  thunder-struck,  so  to 
speak,  by  hysterical  affections,  tormented  with 
pains  shooting  through  her  whole  body,  and  ap- 
peared indeed  on  the  point  of  dissolution.     Da- 


123 

ring  this  prostration  of  strength,  some  paroxysms 
suddenly  occurred,  which  convinced  me  that 
the  disease  was  an  intermitting  fever  in  disguise. 
I,  therefore,  had  recourse  to  febrifuge  medicines, 
which  soon  restored  my  patient  to  health. 

I  once  attended  another  female  patient  who 
laboured  under  an  hsemopthisis  :  she  had  an 
acute  pain  in  her  side  ;  and  was  reduced  to  a 
state  of  extreme  danger  by  means  of  various  and 
repeated  exacerbations.  But  when  I  was  in- 
formed that  the  disease  had  commenced  with  a 
chill,  and  that  some  of  the  earlier  paroxysms  had 
terminated  in  a  sweat,  I  immediately  determined 
on  the  exhibition  of  febrifuge  remedies,  which 
in  a  short  time  removed  the  fever,  and  all  the 
symptoms  that  had  appeared  so  formidable. 

A  gentleman  whom  I  once  attended  in  a  very- 
severe  pleurisy,  experienced  unusual  and  peri- 
odical exacerbations.  These  exacerbations  came 
on  not  by  degrees,  but  very  suddenly.  Besides, 
during  the  paroxysms  there  was  a  copious  dis- 
charge  of  blood  from  the  mouth,  a  symptom 
which  is  extremely  rare.  In  this  state  of  things 
I  conceived  an  opinion,  that  all  the  unfavourable 
appearances  of  the  case  were  owing  to  the  latent 
cause  or  fomes  of  intermitting  fever,  and  that  a 
cure  was  to  be  accomplished  only  by  febrifuge 
medicines.  This  practice  was  accordingly  adopt- 


124 

ed,  and  the  patient  who  had  been  in  the  utmost 
danger,  was  in  a  short  time  restored  to  health. 

A  gentleman  accustomed  to  hunting  was  at- 
tacked by  a  fever  of  extreme  violence.  In  a 
short  time  he  fell  into  a  fierce  delirium,  and  ex- 
perienced a  burning  heat,  and  a  restlessness  that 
nothing  could  restrain.  But  as  these  symptoms 
alternately  increased  and  abated  in  violence  at 
stated  periods,  I  began  immediately  to  suspect 
that  the  disease  was  a  masked  intermittent.  Re- 
course was  had  without  delay  to  febrifuge  reme- 
dies, to  which  the  disease  soon  yielded,  although 
it  appeared  to  have  been  aggravated  by  other 
modes  of  treatment. 

A  young  female  was  attacked  by  a  continued 
fever  somewhat  inclined  to  remit  :  but  the  re- 
mission was  so  short  and  slight  as  to  be  scarcely 
perceptible.  In  the  mean  time  the  danger  was 
extreme.  Such  was  the  violence  of  the  pa- 
roxysms that  the  patient  seemed  ready  to  ex- 
pire. Alarmed  at  this  dangerous  state  of  things, 
the  first  lucid  interval  that  occurred  although  it 
was  very  short,  I  exhibited  febrifuge  medicine 
in  large  quantity,  and  that  not  without  advan- 
tage, for  all  the  symptoms  were  rendered  much 
milder. 

Other  examples  of  the  same  kind  might  be 
adduced,  but  the  foregoing  are  sufficient  for  oil* 


125 

purpose.  I  must  not,  however,  omit  to  mention, 
that  during  the  prevalence  of  an  epidemic  inter- 
mittent, I  am  pretty  generally  led  to  suspect  that  all 
cases  of  fever  partake  more  or  less  of  the  nature 
of  intermittents.  When  there  is  no  general  pre- 
valence of  intermittents,  the  periodical  return  of 
exacerbations,  the  disease  being  one  day  milder 
and  the  next  more  severe,  an  evident  remission 
however  short  it  may  be,  and  a  sudden  recur- 
rence of  violent  symptoms.... these  circumstan- 
ces, I  say,  furnish  me  in  general  with  satisfactory 
evidence  that  the  fevers  are  intermittents  in  dis- 
guise. On  such  occasions  the  urine  retains  in 
many  cases  nearly  its  natural  colour. 


CHAP.    XIX, 


Of  the  consequences  to  be  apprehended  from  the  leading 
symptoms  of  the  fevers  wider  consideration. 


FROM  masked  forms  of  fever  let  us  return 
to  true  intermittents,  and  enquire  into  their  ef- 
fects and  dangerous  relics  or  consequences. 
Those  relics  or  consequences  which  we  shall 
enumerate  are  not  uniform  occurrences,  for 
such  are  the  nature  and  powers  of  the  animal 
economy,  that  the  fever  itself  generally  returns, 
and  does  away  all  danger.  But  the  dangers 
which  we  are  about  to  mention  in  this  place  are 
not  to  be  considered  as  necessarily  attached  to 
every  case  of  intermitting  fever  ;  they  are  only 
such  as  do  or  may  occasionally  take  place  in  the 
course  of  this  disease. 

We  have  already  enquired  into  the  immediate 
effects  of  the  cold  fit,  and  cannot,  therefore,  be 
ignorant  of  the  dangerous  consequences  to  which 


127 

it  is  likely  to  give  rise.  There  is  no  doubt,  in- 
deed, but  from  the  constriction  which  it  induces, 
and  the  consequent  stagnation  of  blood  in  the 
lungs  and  liver,  these  parts  are  pre-disposed  to 
various  obstructions,  and  irregular  states  of  ac- 
action.  Hence  the  liver  is  so  often  diseased. 
From  the  constriction  of  that  organ,  the  bile 
does  not  pass  freely  through  the  ducts  :  the  pa- 
tients become  livid  ;  the  digestive  powers  of  the 
stomach  are  weakened  ;  and  some  of  the  other 
viscera  are  injured  in  a  similar  way,  and  render- 
ed unfit  for  the  performance  of  their  functions. 

But  the  greatest  violence  may  be  done  to  the 
heart.  Its  ventricles  together  with  the  vena  cava 
may  be  much  enlarged.  Hence  the  palpitations 
and  polypous  concretions,  to  which  those  per- 
sons are  subject,  who  have  laboured  under  severe 
and  long  continued  intermittents.  The  mass 
of  blood  stagnating  in  the  lungs  may  prove 
equally  injurious.  It  produces  occasionally  a 
spitting  of  blood,  or  a  kind  of  asthma.  These 
symptoms  do  not,  indeed,  very  frequently  occur. 
It  is  sufficient,  however,  that  they  may  occur. 


There  is  still,  as  we  have  already  intimated, 
another  point  of  view  in  which  the  power  of  the 
cold  fit  proves  highly  dangerous.  It  depresses 
the  vital  principle  in  such  a  manner  as  to  ren- 
der it  at  times  incapable  of  re-acting:  hence  this 


128 

principle  is,  sometimes,  so  completely  over- 
whelmed, that  the  patients  die  under  the  influ- 
ence of  the  cold  fit.  Nor  is  this,  indeed,  to  be 
wondered  at,  when  the  pulse  either  ceases  to 
beat,  or  becomes  small  and  frequent,  when  res- 
piration is  disturbed,  and,  lastly,  when  the  fluids 
stagnate  in  the  brain  and  in  various  other  parts 
of  the  system.  Hence  the  sick  are  in  real  danger, 
in  cases  where  the  cold  fit  is  of  long  duration.  I 
'have  seen  many  persons  reduced  to  such  an 
alarming  state,  that  without  medical  assistance, 
they  would  necessarily  have  expired.  To  pa- 
tients who  are  in  the  prime  of  life  the  cold  fit  of 
an  intermittent  is  not  so  often  dangerous  ;  but 
to  persons  advanced  in  years  it  is  very  frequent- 
ly so. 

The  danger  arising  from  the  hot  stage  of  fe- 
ver is  not  so  great.  As  soon  as  a  sick  person 
has  escaped  from,  or  passed  over  the  cold  stage, 
he  is  usually  considered  as  safe.  But  is  there 
not  a  secret  taint  introduced  into,  or  generated 
in  the  system,  which  increases  by  degrees,  and 
at  length  breaks  out  when  not  expected  ?  In  an 
intermitting  fever,  a  tertian  for  instance,  the  heat 
of  the  body  rises  as  high  as  the  39°  of  Reaumur, 
and  higher  still  in  compound  fevers.  But  if  in 
a  person  in  health  the  temperature  should  rise 
equally  as  high,  every  day,  or  every  other  day, 
and  '  continue  at  that  degree  for  six  or  eight 


129 

hours,  would  he  be  free  from  clanger,  even  al- 
though he  should  enjoy  the  usual  temperature  of 
the  human  body  during  the  remainder  of  the 
day  and  night  ? 

On  this  point  we  may  form  some  opinion, 
from  the  effects  usually  produced  by  a  high  de- 
gree of  heat.  What  a  rarefaction  takes  place  in 
the  texture  of  the  softer  parts  of  the  body  ? 
What  a  distraction  or  laceration  of  the  more 
tender  fibres  ?  What  a  change  in  the  fluids, 
which  are  the  source  of  heat  ?  In  as  much  as 
men  and  other  animals  are  oftentimes  destroyed 
by  passing  through  high  degrees  of  heat,  it  is 
wonderful  that  sick  persons  are  not  more  injured 
by  the  great  burning  that  occurs  in  intermitting 
fever. 

But  however  patients  may  seem  to  escape 
danger,  when  parched  by  a  strong  febrile  heat, 
the  organs  of  the  body  and  their  functions  are 
necessarily  injured  by  it.  Some  patients  are 
subject  to  great  agitation  and  tossing  during  the 
hot  stage  of  the  fever  :  others  again  suffer  the 
most  distressing  anxiety  about  the  region  of  the 
heart.  The  burning  heat  that  exists  in  the  lungs 
proves  equally  troublesome  and  oppressive.  The 
head  itself  feels  as  if  on  fire,  and  there  is  no  doubt 
but  the  very  tender  medulla  of  the  brain  suffers 
from  this  intense  heat. 


130 

How  great  then  is  the  injury  that  may  be 
clone  to  these  and  other  parts  of  the  system, 
which  are  burnt  up,  as  it  were,  by  this  febrile 
fire  ?  Were  we  to  trust  to  theory  alone,  the  dan- 
ger would  indeed  seem  to  be  great  and  immedi- 
ate. But  experience  and  observation  teach  us, 
that  the  powers  of  nature  are  such  as  ought  to 
prevent  us  from  despairing  of  the  fate  of  the  sick 
in  these  scorching  fevers.  Unquestionably,  how- 
ever, the  system  must  suffer  much  from  the  in- 
tense heat  of  the  paroxysms,  and  their  frequent 
returns  must  pave  the  way  to  many  diseases. 

In  summing  up  the  causes  that  tend  to  the 
injury  of  the  system,  we  must  add  the  action  of 
the  vessels,  which  corresponds  to  the  degree  of 
heat,  and  which,  during  the  course  of  the  pa- 
roxysms, is  so  great,  that  the  frequency  of  the 
pulse  is  doubled,  and  the  degree  of  heat  greatly 
increased.  Hence  we  may  infer,  in  general, 
what  the  vessels  themselves  suffer,  both  the 
larger  ones,  and  the  capillaries  which  terminate 
in  a  tender  pulp.  The  texture  and  function  of 
the  glands  and  other  parts  are  necessarily  injured. 
From  the  increased  rapidity  and  force  in  the  mo- 
tion of  the  blood  arises  a  most  acute  pain  of  the 
head,  with  a  more  frequent  and  difficult  respira- 
tion. But  a  circumstance  still  more  dangerous 
is,  that  there  is  a  kind  of  congestion  formed  in  the 
vena  portse  and  liver  ;  for  it  is  not  practicable  for 


131 

the  blood  to  circulate  through  the  intricate  u  lad- 
ings of  that  organ,  as  rapidly  as  it  flows  from  the 
arteries  into  the  veins. 


Sweats,  even  when  profuse,  do  not  portend 
the  same  degree  of  danger.  But  although  they 
contribute  greatly  to  the  relief  of  the  system 
when  the  paroxysm  is  declining,  they  do  not  en- 
tirely remove  the  cause  of  the  fever.  Even  the 
relief  which  they  afford  tends  to  exhaust  the  sick. 
Suppose,  for  instance,  a  person  in  consequence 
of  some  error  in  diet,  or  after  a  debauch  in  eat- 
ing should  sweat  very  profusely  for  three  or  four 
hours  every  other  day  ;  could  such  an  event  ul- 
timately contribute  to  health  ?  or  would  it  not 
rather  be  attended  with  danger,  since  it  is  known 
by  experience  that  five  or  six  pounds  of  the 
fluids  of  the  body  are  discharged  through  the 
pores  of  the  skin  during  that  space  of  time  ? 
There  can  be  no  doubt  as  to  the  effect  on  the 
system  in  the  case  of  febrile  sweats,  when  pro- 
fuse, long  continued,  and  frequently  repeated. 

Nor  are  the  fluids  discharged  by  the  skin 
simply  aqueous,  although  if  they  were,  even 
then  their  loss  would  be  injurious  :  the  thicker 
juices  themselves,  which  are  destined  to  the  nou- 
rishment and  reparation  of  the  system  make 
their  escape;  whence  the  vital  organs  are  neces- 
sarily debilitated.      Sick  persons  are  sometimes 


132 

so  greatly  disposed  to  such  discharges  from  the 
skin,  that  they  flow  copiously  without  any  known 
cause,  particularly  during  the  night.  Even  after 
the  fever  is  removed,  this  disposition  to  sweat 
frequently  continues,  and  can  scarcely  be  check- 
ed. But,  what  is  of  more  consequence,  there 
still  remains,  under  such  circumstances,  either 
some  fomes  of  the  disease,  or  else  a  local  affec- 
tion of  some  particular  part  of  the  system. 

The  thinner  parts  of  the  fluids,  in  particular, 
having  escaped  by  the  cutaneous  pores,  it  is  evi- 
dent that  those  which  remain  in  the  vessels  are 
more  gross  ;  a  circumstance  which  seems  to 
threaten  no  small  degree  of  mischief  to  the  sys- 
tem. On  this  theory,  however,  too  much  reli- 
ance must  not  be  placed.  The  grosser  parts  of 
the  blood  are  at  the  same  time  dissolved  or 
made  thinner,  a  circumstance  which,  taken  in 
conjunction  with  the  influence  of  the  febrile  heat, 
tends  to  keep  it  in  motion.  This  dissolution 
is  greatly  promoted  by  acrid  and  alkalescent  bile, 
which,  being  regurgitated  into  the  blood,  is  dif- 
fused throughout  the  vascular  system.  The 
other  humours  of  the  body  are  also  rendered 
acrid,  as  appears  from  pustular  eruptions  which 
occur  about  the  mouth.  Hence  patients  who 
have  laboured  long  under  fever,  appear  blood- 
less and  pale. 


133 

The  change  in  the  humours  appears  also 
from  the  urine  itself.  During  the  febrile  action, 
that  fluid  is  flame-coloured,  as  already  mention- 
ed, but,  as  the  paroxysm  declines,  becoming 
thick,  frothy  and  very  red,  it  puts  on  at  length 
a  brick-dust  colour.  This  colour  appears  in 
particular  in  the  sediment  which  is  generally 
copious.  The  sediment  is  nothing  but  a  red- 
coloured  earth,  as  I  have  oftentimes  ascertained 
by  experiment.  This  earthy  sediment  is  apt  to 
lodge  and  create  a  temporary  obstruction  in  the 
vessels  of  the  kidneys. 

This  kind  of  urine  belongs  so  peculiarly  to 
intermitting  fever,  that,  provided  the  disease  be 
genuine,  it  is  seldom  wanting.  Indeed  there  is 
no  solid  reason  to  believe  that  the  system  is  free 
from  the  fomes  of  the  fever,  while  the  urine  re- 
tains its  lateritious  colour,  or  is  in  any  measure 
tinctured  with  red.  This  phenomenon  does  or 
can  prove  fallacious  only  in  cases  where  the  sick 
labour  under  some  hepatic  affection.  If  at  any 
time  the  urine  should  exhibit  a  white  matter 
settling  copiously  to  the  bottom  of  the  vessel, 
this  is  to  be  considered  as  a  favourable  symp- 
tom, and  even  a  sign  of  a  crisis  in  the  disease. 
I  must  confess,  however,  that  this  phenomenon 
has  but  seldom  fallen  under  my  notice. 


134 

In  some  intermitting  fevers  the  urine  does 
not  assume  a  lateritious  colour.  I  allude  parti- 
cularly to  certain  vernal  intermittents,  or  to 
those  that  change  into  continued  or  remitting 
fevers.  Even  in  these,  however,  the  urine  does 
exhibit  something  of  a  lateritious  appearance 
during  their  remissions.  At  those  times,  when 
the  secretory  vessels  of  the  kidneys  are  suffered 
to  relax,  in  consequence  of  an  abatement  of  the 
febrile  spasm,  the  grosser  and  red  coloured  par- 
ticles are  allowed  to  escape.  Whence  it  ap- 
pears, that  at  the  commencement  of  the  disease, 
if  it  be  very  severe,  the  urine  does  not  depart 
from  its  natural  colour,  but  assumes  a  red 
and  lateritious  cast  when  the  symptoms  abate.* 

*  Physicians,  like  other  characters,  are  apt  to  fly  from  one  ex- 
treme to  the  other.  In  former  times  the  appearances  of  the  urine 
of  sick  persons  were,  perhaps,  on  all  occasions,  too  closely  and  too 
credulously  consulted ;  at  present  they  appear  to  be  too  much  ne- 
glected. Such  a  copious  and  important  excretion  must  very  gene- 
rally exhibit  certain  characters,  that  might  serve  as  something  of  an 
index  to  the  state  of  the  system.  By  paying  a  proper  attention  to 
the  appearances  of  the  urine,  I  am  persuaded  that  physicians  might 
oftentimes  discover  and  predict  the  crises  of  diseases,  much  to  their 
own  credit,  and  to  the  benefit  of  their  patients Trans. 


CHAP.   XX, 


Of  various  affections  attendant  on  Intcr?nittents. 


WE  have  now  seen  what  is  to  be  appre- 
hended from  each  leading  symptom  properly 
and  necessarily  attached  to  intermittents.  It 
remains  to  ascertain  what  those  affections  are, 
which,  not  being  attributable  to  any  of  the 
symptoms  in  particular,  must  be  referred  to 
them  all  collectively,  or  rather  to  the  disease  it- 
self, taken  as  a  whole.  These  affections  are  not 
indeed  perpetual,  or  uniform,  because  they  may 
cither  occur  or  be  wanting :  but  it  remains  to 
be  enquired  what  injury  they  may  do,  when  pre- 
sent, to  certain  organs  of  the  body. 

It  is  very  common  in  intermitting  fever,  for 
patients  to  experience  pains  in  the  head,  some- 
times slight  and  at  other  times  extremely  acute. 
It  would  seem,  at  first  sight,  that  the  violence  of 
these  pains  is  to  be  attributed  to  the  impetus  of 
the  blood  against  the  brain.    But  that  is  not  the 


136 

cause  to  which  the  mischief  is  to  be  always  refer- 
red. The  blood  circulates,  at  times,  with  ex- 
treme violence  without  producing  any  such  affec- 
tions of  the  head.  We  have  already  mentioned 
that  the  febrile  poison  oftentimes  attacks  the 
seat  of  the  intellect,  producing  convulsions,  le- 
thargy, and  even  madness.  For  the  same  rea- 
son it  stimulates  the  membranes  of  the  brain. 
Hence  arises  the  most  excruciating  pain,  which 
usually  rages  during  the  actual  continuance  of 
the  fever,  and  ceases  during  its  intermission. 

Other  patients  are  heard  to  complain  of  af- 
fections of  the  stomach.  That  organ  is  affected 
with  nausea,  vomiting,  and  loathing  of  food,  or 
with  a  sense  of  heaviness,  burning,  and  tight- 
ness. Some  patients  experience  in  it  at  the 
same  time  pains  of  different  kinds.  But  a 
symptom  which  occurs  no  less  frequently,  and 
is  of  no  less  importance  is,  a  distension  or 
swelling  of  the  stomach.  This  symptom  is  some- 
times met  with  even  in  intermittents  that  have 
not  been  of  long  duration,  and  continues  in  many 
cases  after  the  febrile  symptoms  have  terminated: 
but  it  occurs  most  frequently  in  those  which 
have  been  of  long  continuance,  or  which  have 
been  treated  in  an  injudicious  manner. 

But  we  more  frequently  meet  with  a  swell- 
ing of  the  abdomen   or  lower  belly,  which  as- 


137 

sumcs  a  variety  of  appearances.  It  is  sometimes 
soft,  and  at  other  times  the  integuments  appear 
like  dry  parchment ;  but  most  frequently  the 
abdomen  is  very  much  distended.  On  some 
occasions  its  hardness  and  resistance  to  the  touch 
arc  so  great  as  to  resemble  marble.  Notwith- 
standing this,  it  is  as  true  as  it  is  surprising, 
that  on  these  occasions,  there  can  be  nothing- 
found  in  the  abdomen  but  air  distending  the  in- 
testines by  its  elastic  force. 

All  these  symptoms  proceed,  for  the  most 
part,  from  some  derangement  in  the  functions 
of  the  liver.  The  secretion  of  bile,  for  instance, 
is  either  checked  or  diminished,  or  that  fluid  be- 
comes acrid  and  unfit  for  the  business  of  healthy 
digestion.  If  the  fever  be  of  a  higher  grade,  the 
sick  sometimes  complain  of  a  sense  of  heaviness 
and  anxiety  thence  arising,  or  of  severe  pains 
in  the  right  hypochondrium.  Some  persons 
suffer  a  slight  attack  of  hepatitis.  Hence  we 
plainly  perceive  why  the  countenance  becomes 
yellow  or  livid,  and  how  readily  an  intermitting 
fever  may  be  succeeded  by  a  jaundice,  a  circum- 
stance which  frequently  occurs  in  certain  epi- 
demics.* 


*  Attacks  of  jaundice  were  uncommonly  frequent  ftJDOftg  the 
citizens  of  Philadelphia  during  the  winter  of  179^-4.     The  | 
position  to  that  complaint  had  heen  produced  by  the  maligna 


138 

There  are  many  other  troublesome  symp- 
toms which  originate  from  the  same  source.  It 
is  not  to  be  wondered  at  if  such  a  serious  affec- 
tion of  an  organ  so  necessary  to  life  should  prove 
highly  injurious  to  the  surrounding  parts  ;  if  it 
should  render  the  intestines  tumid,  and  cause 
even  the  external  parts  of  the  body  to  swell.  In 
some  epidemics  I  have  seen  this  swelling  occur 
as  early  as  the  eighth  or  ninth  day  of  the  disease. 
In  general,  however,  it  makes  its  appearance 
later,  and  arises,  like  dropsy,  from  some  morbid 
affection  of  the  viscera. 

But  the  liver  proves  the  cause  of  still  further 
evils  in  the  course  of  intermitting  fever.  With- 
in the  texture  of  this  viscus  the  blood  accumu- 
lates and  there  stagnates.     That  blood  which  is 


Hemic  of  the  preceding-  autumn.  In  its  future  occurrences  the 
malignant  fever  was  not  productive  of  jaundice  to  the  same  extent. 
The  explanation  of  this  fact  does  not  appear  very  difficult.  During 
the  epidemic  of  1793,  but  few  of  our  physicians  treated  the  disease 
by  copious  blood-letting  and  purging.  Hence  hepatic  congestion 
was  not  in  general  sufficiently  removed.  Of  this  remaining  conges- 
tion jaundice  was  a  natural  consequence.  On  all  subsequent  occur- 
rences of  the  malignant  fever,  copious  blood-letting-  and  purging 
were  more  generally  adopted  in  practice.  Hence  the  liver  was  un- 
loaded and  consequently  obstruction  and  jaundice  prevented.  I  be- 
lieve it  may  be  laid  down  as  a  principle  to  which  there  is  no  exception, 
that  proper  and  timely  evacuations  will  always  prevent  bilious  aifec- 
tions  of  every  description  from  terminating'  in  either  jaundice  or 
dropsy Trans. 


139 

thrown  into  the  vena  portae  cannot  go  forward  : 
the  other  parts  of  the  abdomen  therefore  must 
necessarily  become  turgid,  because  the  blood 
which  flows  constantly  into  them,  is  subject  to 
a  similar  stagnation  or  delay.  The  spleen  in 
particular  becomes  turgid,  and  is  oftentimes 
greatly  increased  in  bulk  :  the  parietes  of  the 
stomach  and  intestines  become  thickened,  and 
the  mesentery  also  is  subject  to  tumefaction. 
From  this  state  of  things  arise  obstructions,  pu- 
trid diarrhoeas,  dysenteries,  and  dangerous  dis- 
charges of  blood.  All  these  symptoms  frequently 
occur  in  certain  epidemics  and  in  fevers  of  long 
duration. 

Hence  it  appears  that  the  force  of  flatus  not 
only  distends  the  abdomen,  but  also  increases 
the  size  of  the  viscera.  The  blood  and  other 
fluids  being  accumulated  and  made  to  stagnate 
in  certain  internal  parts,  are  converted  into  solids 
and  thus  augment  the  bulk  of  these  parts.  The 
truth  of  this  will  be  demonstrated  by  the  dissec- 
tions of  which  we  shall  speak  hereafter.  We 
must  not  be  surprised,  therefore,  at  finding  the 
abdomen  to  appear  uneven,  filled  as  it  were  with 
tumors,  and  much  harder  than  in  a  natural  or 
healthy  state.  From  the  irritation  of  the  fever 
some  decree  of  rigidity  cannot  fail  to  occur  in 

O  Da 

tliis  part. 


140 

It  is  much  more  surprising  that,  during  the 
existence  of  this  abdominal  tumefaction,  the  fe- 
ver in  many  cases  not  only  remits,  but  even 
ceases  altogether  or  changes  its  nature.  When 
the  febrile  poison  exerts  its  force  on  the  viscera 
of  the  abdomen,  it  appears  to  desert  the  other 
parts  of  the  body,  or  rather  to  act  on  them  in  a 
different  way.  The  same  thing  takes  place  in 
swellings  of  the  lower  parts,  of  which  we  will 
treat  presently.  When  such  swellings  occur, 
the  fever  disappears  or  gives  ground  to  hope 
that  it  soon  will  disappear.  But  this  exemption 
from  fever  is  not  universal.  In  some  subjects 
the  fever  continues,  even  when  the  abdomen, 
the  lower  extremities,  and  other  parts  of  the 
body  are  greatly  tumefied.  Under  such  circum- 
stances a  new  disease  is  superadded  to  the  ori- 
ginal one. 

Although  the  foregoing  effects  of  intermit- 
ting fever  are  very  distressing,  we  must  not 
consider  them  as  necessarily  fatal.  Youthful 
persons  who  are  most  subject  to  them,  and  who 
are  sometimes  so  reduced  bv  them  that  death 
appears  inevitable,  do,  notwithstanding,  often- 
times recover  from  them,  and  that  sometimes  by 
the  powers  of  nature  alone.  In  adults  also, 
when  the  functions  of  the  abdominal  viscera  are 
so  much  diseased,  that  it  seems  scarcely  practic- 
able for  the  relics  of  life  to  be  continued  any 


141 

longer,  remarkable  recoveries  sometimes  occur. 
Many  persons  by  the  proper  administration  of 
remedies,  and  many  others  by  a  change  of  cli- 
mate, and  even  by  the  approach  of  summer  are 
restored  to  such  perfect  health,  that  no  one 
would  suspect  them  to  have  been  indisposed. 

From  these  circumstances  it  would  seem  that 
the  obstructions  arising  from  intermitting  fever 
arc  of  a  peculiar  kind,  and  not  so  dangerous 
as  those  arising  from  other  causes.  Hence 
remedies  may  be  administered  and  hopes  in- 
dulged even  in  cases  of  the  most  unpromising 
aspect. 


CHAP.    XXL 


Of  affections  which  remain  after  the  febrile  form  of  the 
disease  has  been  removed. 


SO  much  for  those  affections  which  occur 
during  the  course  of  intermittents.  But  there 
are  many  others,  and  those  of  no  inconsiderable 
moment,  which  remain  after  the  febrile  form  of 
the  disease  has  been  cured.  Thus,  some  pa- 
tients are  subject  to  a  most  acute  and  distressing 
pain  in  the  head.  To  such  a  height  does  this 
pain  sometimes  arise,  that  the  whole  original 
disease  would  seem  to  be  changed  into  it.  The 
patients  sometimes  declare  that  the  head  feels  as 
if  it  were  cleft  asunder  in  the  middle.  Under 
such  circumstances  it  cannot  be  supposed  that 
the  whole  of  the  febrile  poison  is  eliminated  from 
the  system.  In  some  instances,  however,  after 
baving'  given  rise  to  such  excruciating  pains. 


143 

it  is  dissipated  cither  by  the  spontaneous  powers 
of  nature,  or  by  the  aid  of  diluents  alone. 

At  other  times,  after  the  febrile  symptoms 
are  gone,  the  whole  body  seems  as  if  it  would 
melt  away.  At  night,  in  particular,  the  sweats 
are  so  profuse  and  oppressive,  that  they  exhaust 
in  a  short  time  the  strength  of  the  system.  Dur- 
ing this  deluge,  it  is  a  great  error  to  suppose 
that  the  fever  is  cured  :  the  febrile  cause  seems 
to  be  only  thrown  on  the  skin.  At  times,  in- 
deed, sweats  may  occur  from  mere  debility  of 
the  system  ;  but  they  never  flow  in  such  abun- 
dance, unless  some  morbid  cause  be  acting  on 
the  viscera.  By  such  a  fomes  the  discharge  by 
the  skin  is  rendered  so  profuse  that  it  can 
scarcely  be  restrained;  and  if  it  be  restrained 
by  an  unskilful  mode  of  treatment,  the  step 
proves  always  injurious  to  the  patient,  as  I  have 
learnt  from  repeated  observation. 

Of  all  the  complaints  that  remain  or  can  re- 
main after  the  fever  is  removed,  by  far  the  most 
troublesome  are  the  morbid  affections  of  the  vis- 
cera. Indeed  when  we  consider  the  great  pow- 
er which  the  febrile  poison  sometimes  pos- 
sesses, we  cannot  be  surprised  at  certain  vestiges 
of  it  remaining  in  the  system  for  a  considerable 
time.  These  show  themselves  more  particular- 
ly in  the  liver;  and  from  that  organ  arise  many 


144 

affections,  from  which  the  sick  are  with  great 
difficulty  relieved.  There  are  also  other  parts 
of  the  system  in  which  very  troublesome  and 
grievous  relics  of  the  disease  remain  :  the  pan- 
creas becomes  indurated  ;  the  spleen  is  enlarged ; 
the  intestines  with  difficulty  recover  their  healthy 
functions  ;  the  appetite  is  weak ;  the  strength 
is  exhausted  ;  and  the  countenance  is  overcast 
with  a  livid  or  yellowish  hue. 

Hence  it  appears  how  readily  this  disease 
may  be  succeeded  by  a  watery  swelling  in  va- 
rious parts  of  the  body.  As  soon  as  the  vio- 
lence of  the  fever  abates,  the  feet  and  legs  in 
many  cases  become  cedematous.  This  effusion 
into  the  cellular  membrane  takes  place,  partly 
from  the  obstructions  that  remain,  and  partly  in 
consequence  of  the  force  of  the  febrile  poison 
being  determined  to  the  lower  extremities. 
Hence  the  occurrence  of  a  watery  swelling  of 
this  kind  may  be  considered  as  a  sign  that  the 
fever  is  declining.  Youthful  persons  are  not  sc 
subject  to  swellings  of  this  nature.  Indeed  such 
affections  occur  most  frequently  among  persons 
in  indigent  circumstances,  either  because  these 
subjects  are  deprived  of  the  advantage  of  able 
medical  aid,  or  because  their  bodies,  being 
worn  out  by  fatigue,  are  thereby  rendered  more 
liable  to  obstructions. 


145 

This  swelling  of  the  feet  and  legs  oftentimes 
degenerates  into  true  and  general  dropsy ;  and 
oftentimes  into  an  anasarca  only.  But  it  occurs 
in  certain  epidemics  more  frequently  than  in 
others.  Last  year,  for  instance,  was  remark- 
able for  swellings  of  the  feet,  legs,  arms  and 
hands  :  the  lungs  themselves  were  oppressed  by 
the  effusion  ;  sometimes  the  difficulty  of  breath- 
ing was  very  great :  the  sick  were  harrassed 
by  a  troublesome  cough,  particularly  in  cases  of 
general  anasarca.  These  affections  occurred 
more  frequently  as  the  consequences  of  irregu- 
lar intermittents. 

Occasionally,  however,  they  are  produced 
by  simple  intermittents.  A  man  aged  thirty, 
was  lately  ill  of  a  tertian  fever.  The  disease 
having  been  neglected  for  several  months,  as- 
sumed an  irregular  type.  It  was  at  length  suc- 
ceeded by  a  general  anasacra,  which  no  remedies 
could  remove.  What  seemed  most  surprising 
in  this  case  was,  that  on  dissection  scarcely  any 
disease  was  discovered  in  the  viscera,  which 
could  be  considered  as  the  cause  of  the  anasar- 
cous  swelling.  Hence  it  appears,  that  an  uni- 
versal diffusion  of  the  febrile  poison  can  produce 
an  universal  and  fatal  effusion  into  the  cellular 

membrane. 

u 


CHAP.    XXII. 


Of  relapses  in  Inter mittents, 


FROM  these  affections  of  the  viscera  in  in- 
termittents,  it  is  evident  that  the  febrile  poison 
may,  for  a  long  time,  remain  in  the  system,  and 
produce  frequent  and  unexpected  returns  of  the 
fever.  So  subject  are  patients  to  relapses  in  this 
disease,  that,  in  the  opinion  of  some  persons, 
great  precautions  ought  still  to  be  used  on  the 
day  and  at  the  hour  of  its  usual  occurrence.  It 
has  been  observed  by  certain  writers  that  after 
the  entire  solution  of  the  fever,  and  even  after 
a  long  intermission  of  its  paroxysms,  those  pa- 
roxysms are  apt  to  recur  about  the  same  hour 
of  their  original  commencement,  in  case  any  im- 
prudence be  committed  about  that  time.  I  will 
not  vouch  for  the  perfect  accuracy  of  this  ob- 
servation. 


147 

Be  these  circumstances  as  they  may,  it  ap- 
pears from  actual  experience,  that  if  the  fever  be 
not  radically  cured,  it  does  not  give  a  respite  of 
more  than  fourteen  or  fifteen  days.*  This, 
however,  is  not  always  the  case,  but  it  is  to  be 
considered  only  as  a  general  rule.  Sometimes 
the  disease  grants  a  much  longer  respite ;  thus, 
for  example,  the  patient  is  not  unfrequently  ex- 
empt from  it  throughout  the  winter,  and  attack- 
ed by  it  again  in  the  spring  :  it  disappears  a 
second  time  during  the  summer  months,  but 
returns  again  in  the  autumn,  unless  prevented  by 
proper  remedies.  In  the  intervals  between  those 
periods  the  disease  is  oftentimes  excited  into 
action  by  various  causes. 

But  as  these  causes  are  various,  so  are  also 
the  febrile  relapses  which  they  produce.  Often- 
times when  the  prospect  of  a  recovery  is  very 
flattering,  all  the  symptoms  return  as  at  first : 
the  paroxysms  for  instance  recur  with  various 

*  Intermitting'  fever  lias  certainly  a  strong  disposition  to  return 
at  K.;cekty  periods,  for  a  considerable  time  after  the  suspension  of  its 
paroxysms.  The  knowledge  of  this  fact  is  of  much  importance  both 
to  physicians  and  their  patients.  By  using-  proper  precautions  at 
these  periods,  the  return  of  the  disease  may  be  easily  prevented. 
As  a  week  is  about  the  fourth  part  of  a  lunation,  some  physicians 
have  attributed  this  hebdomidal  recurrence  of  intermittents  to  lunar 
influence.  Conformably  to  this  opinion,  they  contend  that  the  dis- 
ease manifests  the  strongest  disposition  to  return  about  the  full  and 
change  of  the  moon.  Be  this  matter  as  it  may,  there  appears  to  be 
but  little  reason  to  doubt  the  reality  of  at  least  some  degree  of  lu- 
nar influence  on  the  human  system.... Ti -an*. 


148 

degrees  of  force  and  duration  ;  in  a  certain  time 
they  cease  again  and  are  again  renewed,  but 
sometimes  with  more  irregularity  than  before. 
The  disease  now  and  then  assumes  the  form  of 
a  remittent  or  a  continued  fever,  and  afterwards 
returns  to  that  of  an  intermittent.  Thus  it 
oftentimes  runs  on  for  a  great  length  of  time, 
harassing  the  sick  by  various  and  irregular 
symptoms. 

These  circumstances  may  occur  at  any  time, 
but  they  happen  most  frequently  during  the 
prevalence  of  epidemics.  I  have  met  with  these 
alternate  appearances,  and  with  this  alternate 
cessation  and  return  of  the  complaint,  more  es- 
pecially in  those  fevers  that  rage  in  marshy  situ- 
ations. When  these  diseases  have  continued 
for  a  certain  time  they  scarcely  admit  of  a  per- 
manent cure.  Relapses  happen  on  the  most 
trivial  occasions.  Oftentimes  when  the  patients 
seem  to  be  nearly  restored  to  health,  that  is,  re- 
lieved from  the  paroxysms,  they  are  suddenly 
carried  off  by  the  disease.  Others  drag  on  with 
difficulty  a  wretched  existence  from  autumn  till 
summer.  Nor  are  they  all  freed  from  the  dis- 
ease even  then  :  many  of  them  are  only  somewhat 
relieved.  In  the  mean  time  relapses  are  very  apt  to 
occur,  in  consequence  of  the  relics  of  the  fever 
that  remain  in  the  system,  and  the  various 
symptoms  by  which  the  sick  are  affected. 


149 

In  these  relapses  the  appearances  are  various. 
The  paroxysms  recur  indeed  at  stated  hours 
and  on  stated  days,  but  without  a  perfect  inter- 
mission intervening.  On  the  days  of  intermis- 
sion some  degree  of  fever  still  seems  to  prey  on 
the  internal  parts  of  the  system.  In  some  of 
these  cases,  the  sick  arc  scarcely  able  to  sustain 
themselves,  having  at  the  same  time  a  pale  and 
yellowish  appearance.  The  fever  is  a  kind  of 
continued  one,  although  marked  with  paroxysms 
that  pursue  the  usual  order.  Hence  there  seems 
to  be  a  two-fold  cause  of  the  disease  or  febrile 
action  ;  one  of  these  consists  in  a  diseased  affec- 
tion of  the  viscera  ;  the  other  in  the  presence  of 
the  miasma,  which  constitutes  the  fomes  of  in- 
termitting fever. 

In  some  instances,  these  diseases  seem  to  in- 
cline more  to  the  form  of  hectic  fever.  The 
regular  periodical  paroxysms  cease,  but  the 
pulse  rises  in  the  night,  without  either  a  cold  or 
a  hot  fit  of  any  consequence.  The  intermediate 
days  are  never  free  from  some  degree  of  fever, 
particularly  in  those  patients,  who  have  been 
treated  unskilfully.  Relics  of  the  same  kind  are 
met  with  in  those  who  suffer  frequent  relapses 
in  consequence  of  an  affection  of  the  viscera,  or 
of  the  force  of  the  febrile  poison. 

We  will  proceed  no  further  in  considering 
the  various  kinds  of  relapses.    But  although  in 


150 

certain  cases  they  are  so  frequent  and  diversified, 
it  is  still  the  opinion  of  some  writers,  that  persons 
who  have  once  laboured  under  intermitting  fe- 
ver, and  been  perfectly  cured  by  a  true  crisis 
and  proper  remedies,  are  in  general  less  liable  to 
it  during  the  remainder  of  their  lives  than  they 
were  before.  There  are  at  least  very  few  per- 
sons who  have  been  subject  to  frequent  attacks 
of  quartan  fever.  I  do  not  mean  by  this,  that 
those  who  have  been  once  subject  to  intermit- 
ting fever  have  nothing  to  apprehend  from  epi- 
demics, or  from  those  places  in  which  epidemics 
of  the  kind  usually  prevail :  for  when  their 
bodies  are  surrounded  by  febrile  miasma,  that 
poison  cannot  fail  to  make  some  impression  on 
them,  notwithstanding  their  being  less  pre-dis- 
posed  to  receive  its  action.  The  meaning  of 
physicians  on  this  subject  appears  to  have  been, 
that  those  persons  who  have  once  experienced 
the  effects  of  the  poison  of  intermitting  fever, 
are  not,  in  general,  so  susceptible  of  them 
again. 

Be  this  matter  as  it  may,  it  appears  from 
what  has  been  said,  that  there  are  two  points  of 
primary  consideration  with  respect  to  the  relics 
of  intermitting  fever.  Either  the  febrile  fomes 
remains  in  the  system  and  re-produces  a  regular 
intermittent ;  or  some  principal  and  important 
parts  of  the  system  suffer  serious  local  affections. 


151 

In  these  cases  relapses  are  to  be  dreaded,  and 
when  they  take  place  do  not  easily  admit  of  a 
cure  :  or  if  the  intermitting  form  of  the  fever  be 
removed,  still  the  patients  are  apt  to  continue 
infirm  and  sickly  during  the  remainder  of  their 
lives  :  in  particular,  obstructions  of  the  viscera 
remain,  which  greatly  impede  the  performance 
of  their  functions. 


CHAP.   XXIII. 


Of  the  morbid  appearances  discovered  in  the  dissection 
of  the  bodies  of  those  that  have  died  of  Litennitten 


IN  the  dissection  of  dead  bodies  the  fore- 
going obstructions  and  local  affections  are  dis- 
covered. It  is  not  my  intention  to  treat  of  those 
that  are  found  in  bodies  that  have  died  of  a  com- 
pound remitting  fever.  In  that  disease  the  vital 
principle  is  overwhelmed  or  extinguished  by 
the  force  of  the  febrile  poison  ;  the  head  is  se- 
verely attacked  ;  other  parts  suffer  great  injury  ; 
the  whole  system  is  thrown  into  commotion  by 
spasms  and  irritation,  and  hence  death  is  pro- 
duced in  the  same  manner  as  in  continued 
fevers. 

But  simple  intcrmittents,  or  those  that  dege- 
nerate into  hectic  or  such  like  fevers,  leave 
rious  vestiges  of  themselves  in  the  bod  v.  Cer: 


153 

parts,  however,  they  attack  with  more  violence 
than  they  do  others.  The  head,  for  instance, 
seldom  exhibits  any  morbid  appearances,  al- 
though it  sometimes  experiences  the  most  ex- 
cruciating pains. 

But  the  organs  of  circulation  and  respiration 
suffer  greatly,  as  we  have  already  mentioned. 
The  auricles  of  the  heart,  and  the  pulmonary 
vessels  are  turgid  with  black  blood.  A  great 
congestion  takes  place  in  the  minute  lobules  of 
the  lungs,  and  there  is  water  effused  into  the 
cavity  of  the  thorax.  In  some  cases  the  peri- 
cardium is  distended  with  water.  This  latter 
circumstance  is  particularly  observable  in  those 
who  die  of  intermitting  fever  in  maritime  situ- 
ations. 

As  the  stomach  is  so  often  affected  with  vo- 
miting, it  is  no  wonder,  as  already  mentioned, 
that  it  should  be  found  greatly  distended  with 
flatus.  The  distension  and  the  irritation  from 
whence  this  distension  arises,  sometimes  pro- 
ceed so  far  as  unquestionably  to  prove  the  cause 
of  death,  by  occasioning  in  many  cases  a  spasm 
of  the  parietes  of  the  stomach.  I  have  seen  per- 
sons who,  when  apparently  free  from  fever, 
have  been  destroyed  by  overloading  their  sto- 
mach at  supper.  In  these  cases  the  stomach 
was  wonderfully  distended  either  with  flatus  or 


154 

with  water,  or  was  overpowered  by  the  quantity 
of  food  taken  in. 

But  the  deepest  ravages  are  found  in  the 
liver.     That  organ  is  for  the  most  part  pale, 
bloodless,  and  somewhat  wasted  away.  At  times, 
however,   it  is  enlarged  in   its  size,  indurated, 
and  variegated  on  its  surface  with  small  yellow 
glands;   at  other  times  again  it  is  turgid  with 
blood,  and  that  very  black.     In  some  patients  I 
have  found  an  abscess  of  the  liver  after  tertian 
fever ;   while  in  others,  again,  I  have  seen  the 
vena  porta?  converted  into  a  very  large  tube. 
Many  other  affections  of  the  liver  are  mentioned 
by  medical   writers  ;    it  has   been  found  very 
remarkably     enlarged ;     the    ducts    distributed 
throughout  its  substance  are  entirely  obstructed. 
The  gall-bladder  is  also  found  obstructed,   and 
distended  with  bile. 

The  pancreas  is  also  subject  to  the  ravages 
of  intermitting  fever.  In  some  dead  bodies 
only  certain  parts  of  that  viscus  are  found  ob- 
structed;  in  others  its  whole  mass  is  either 
schirrous  or  greatly  enlarged;  some  physicians 
have  seen  it  in  a  state  of  suppuration  ;  for  this 
reason,  as  I  have  elsewhere  observed,  they  have 
considered  it  as  the  great  repository  of  the  fomes 
of  intermitting  fever.  It  is  not,  indeed,  to  be 
wondered  at,  that  obstructions  should  occur  in 


155 

this  viscus,  since   the  blood    stagnates,    or  at 
least  moves  very  slowly  in  the  hepatic  veins. 

For  the  same  reason  the  spleen  has  been  sub- 
ject to  the  same  charge.  Its  bulk,  for  instance, 
is  sometimes  greatly  enlarged.  I  have  even 
known  it  to  acquire  this  increase  of  bulk  in  a 
short  space  of  time.  But,  what  seems  more 
surprising,  that  viscus  has  returned  to  its  natu- 
ral state  again,  by  the  exhibition  of  febrifuge  re- 
medies alone.  But  the  spleen  not  un frequently 
suffers  another  kind  of  morbid  affection  :  it  is 
filled  with  black  blood  resembling  tar  or  pitch  : 
it  then  runs  into  something  of  a  gangrenous 
state.  A  woman  laboured  under  a  neglected 
quartan  ;  being  destitute  of  the  common  com- 
forts of  life,  she  died  suddenly.  In  the  dissec- 
tion of  her  body,  the  spleen  was  found  in  some- 
what of  a  dissolved  state  ;  and  a  large  quantity 
of  blood  was  effused  into  the  abdomen. 

Hence  it  appears,  as  mentioned  on  a  former 
occasion,  how  liable  to  disease  the  peritoneum 
and  messentcry  are ;  in  these  parts  schirri  and 
abscesses  have  been  found.  Having  oftentimes 
examined  these  parts,  I  have  plainly  observed 
the  glands  of  the  mesentery  in  a  diseased  state. 
In  very  young  people,  in  particular,  I  have  seen 
these  glands  obstructed  and  greatly  increased  in 
size.     In  the  duplicative  of  the  peritoneum  va- 


156 

rious  tumors  occur,  which  either  produce  a  con- 
gestion, or  are  the  effects  of  one.  The  fluids 
in  consequence  of  stagnating  become  consoli- 
dated, and  firm,  and  thus  form  a  kind  of  steato- 
matous  substance. 

In  the  intestines  certain  appearances  are 
observed,  which  may  be  attributed  to  the  fever ; 
these  parts,  as  we  have  already  observed,  are 
greatly  distended  ;  but  as  they  are  distended  in 
some  places,  they  are  constricted  in  others.  In 
the  colon,  in  particular,  I  have  found  various 
contractions  of  its  diameter,  especially  where  it 
passes  over  the  left  kidney,  and  dips  down 
again,  previously  to  its  terminating  in  the  intes- 
tenum  rectum.  From  these  contractions  or 
narrownesses  many  consequences  arise,  which  I 
shall  not  mention  at  present,  as  they  may  be 
readily  foreseen  by  every  medical  reader. 

There  are  still  other  morbid  affections  which 
take  place  after  intermitting  fever.  These,  taken 
in  conjunction  with  such  as  have  been  already 
mentioned,  enable  us  to  judge  whether  or  not 
intermittents  ought  to  be  ranked  among  the  sa- 
lutary processes  or  states  of  action  of  nature. 
That  this  is  the  case,  many  writers  haveattempted 
to  prove,  both  by  argument,  and  by  the  autho- 
rity of  the  ancients.  But  can  a  disease  be  of 
itself  salutary,  or  can  it  be  considered  as  such  in 


157 

its  nature  and  real  tendency,  when,  during  its 
course,  so  much  local  injury  is  done  to  various 
parts  of  the  system  ? 

Theory  is  too  oftentimes  nothing  more  than 
the  visionary  offspring  of  the  imagination  :  it  is 
experience  alone  on  which  we  can  finally  depend. 
Many  physicians  seem  to  be  convinced  by  ex- 
perience that  quartans  contribute  much  to  lon- 
gevity. This  only,  in  my  opinion,  can  be  main- 
tained on  the  subject,  namely,  that  intermittents 
may  sometimes  cure  certain  other  diseases. 
There  are,  for  example,  relaxed  or  debilitated 
bodies  in  which  the  motions  and  actions  of  the 
internal  parts  of  the  system  are  too  weak  :  there 
are  also  certain  nervous  and  convulsive  affections 
which  may  be  removed  by  adding  strength  to 
the  motions  of  the  internal  parts:  by  this  in- 
creased motion,  stagnations  are  removed;  new 
power  is  bestowed  on  the  vital  organs  ;  noxious 
humours  are  thrown  off  by  perspiration;  a  new- 
eras  is  or  constitution  is  given  to  the  blood ; 
and  the  whole  habit  of  the  body  is  changed. 

A  certain  description  of  febrile  paroxysms, 
therefore  may  restore  or  confirm  health.  But  if 
these  paroxysms  be  very  severe  and  long  continu- 
ed, they  not  only  will  not  prove  salutary,  but  will 
do  mischief,  and  that  the  more  dangerous  in  its 
nature,  in  proportion  as  the  system   is  more 


158 

weak  and  delicate,  or  more  affected  by  other  dis- 
eases. Persons  subject  to  jaundice,  cough  or 
any  other  pulmonary  affection,  have  no  advan- 
tage to  expect  from  an  attack  of  intermitting  fe- 
ver. This  at  least  is  generally  true,  nor  can  it 
indeed  be  otherwise,  unless  there  be  in  the  sys- 
tem certain  noxious  humours,  which  produce 
these  affections,  and  which  may,  by  the  action  of 
the  fever,  be  changed  or  corrected. 


BOOK  SECOND. 

OF  THE 

TREATMENT  OF  INTERMITTING 

AND  REMITTING  FEVERS. 


CHAPTER    I. 

Of  the  difficulty  of  curing  Intermittents,  and  wherein 
that  difficulty  consists. 

IT  now  remains  to  consider  the  treatment 
and  cure  of  intermitting  fevers.  To  many  it 
will  seem  scarcely  necessary  to  touch  on  this 
subject;  for  there  is  no  one  who  does  not  con- 
sider himself  competent  to  the  cure  of  these 
diseases.  A  firm  belief  has  hence  arisen,  that 
few  or  no  persons  ever  die  of  intermittents. 
These  fevers  sometimes  terminate  spontaneous- 
ly, or  are  in  many  instances  easily  cured  ;  nos- 
trums for  that  purpose  are  in  the  hands  of  every 
one,  and  are  even  publicly  sold  under  the  sanc- 
tion of  medical  characters.  Whatever  precepts 
and  modes  of  practice,  therefore,  may  be  laid 
down  on  the  subject,  will  be  considered  by  many 
as  an  ostentation  of  learning. 


160 

But  intermitting  fever  is  sometimes  ex- 
tremely dangreous,  and  in  many  cases  difficult 
to  be  removed.  The  mode  of  cure  itself  may 
prove  injurious  ;  and  numerous  controversies 
have  arisen  respecting  the  proper  mode.  As 
there  is  no  opinion,  however  ridiculous  that  has 
not  originated  with  or  been  supported  by  some 
philosophers  ;  so  there  is  no  remedy,  however 
absurd  and  injurious,  that  has  not  been  the  se- 
cret nostrum  of  some  physician. 

Nature  herself  appears  to  us  to  act  caprici- 
ously in  the  cure  of  diseases.  Thus,  fevers  are 
sometimes  cured  alike  by  heat  and  by  cold  ;  in 
some  cases  acrid  substances,  in  others  demul- 
cents, effect  a  cure  ;  in  some,  wine  and  ardent 
spirits,  in  others,  copious  draughts  of  water; 
even  poisons  themselves  have  become  celebrated 
for  various  cures;  finally,  there  is  scarcely  any 
thing  whether  noxious  or  innocent,  that  has  not 
cured  intermitting  fevers.  Even  when  these 
diseases  have  been  attacked  to  no  purpose  in  a 
rational  mode  of  practice,  it  has  not  unfrequent- 
ly  happened,  that  they  have  been  completely 
subdued  by  a  very  preposterous  and  perverted 
mode. 

The  road,  therefore,  which  leads  to  the  cure 
of  inter mittents,  instead  of  being  plain  and  easy, 
is,  oil  the  other  hand,  extremely  difficult  and  la* 


161 

borious.  The  greater  the  number  of  remedies 
appears  to  be,  the  easier  it  is  to  err  in  the  ehoice 
of  them.  That  an  opinion  may  be  the  more 
readily  formed  respecting  them,  we  will  premise 
a  few  considerations. 

Those  things  that  are  not  consistent  with 
themselves,  or  which  do  not  generally  succeed 
in  effecting  a  cure,  cannot  be  considered  as  reme- 
dies ;  but  of  this  description  are  many  things 
that  are  carried  about  and  sold  as  antidotes. 
Much  more  ought  we  to  reject  whatever  may  be 
attended  with  any  degree  of  danger,  such  as 
acrid  and  heating  substances,  which  are  almost 
always  hurtful,  even  when  they  effect  a  cure. 
The  same  thing  must  be  said  respecting  reme- 
dies of  opposite  powers.  Of  two  remedies  pos- 
sessing contrary  qualities,  one  must  be  hurtful, 
particularly  if  their  action  on  the  system  be 
powerful. 

From  so  many  cures,  which  are  attributed  to 
these  remedies,  it  will  appear  that  nothing  can 
be  deduced,  if  we  enquire  into  their  true  cause. 
Such  are  the  nature  and  principles  of  the  febrile 
cause,  that  at  times  nothing  seems  necessary  to 
the  cure  of  intermitting  fever,  but  some  striking 
and  sudden  change;  hence  fear  or  terror  sudden- 
ly induced  sometimes  eradicates  the  disease. 
The  same  effect  is  produced  by  great  heat,  ex- 


162 

ercise,  the  use  of  acrid  substances,  &c.  but 
these  arc  not  certain  and  well  establish*  d  reme- 
dies ;  for,  though  they  may  succeed  in  one  case, 
they  fail  in  many.  Besides,  if  they  do  not  hit 
their  mark,  and  destroy  the  fever  as  it  were  by 
a  single  blow,  they  are  sure  to  render  it  more 
obstinate  and  dangerous. 

Nor  can  even  the  remedies  proper  in  inter- 
mittents  be  safely  exhibited  unless  with  the  ut- 
most circumspection  and  care.  There  are  some 
remedies  which  may  remove  the  disease,  and 
prove  at  the  same  time  hurtful  to  the  patient. 
Hence  the  dissentions  between  physicians  of  dif- 
ferent countries  ;  they  trust  and  distrust  certain 
remedies,  and  that,  at  times,  for  reasons  alike 
unsatisfactory.  Those  physicians  who  even  use 
the  same  remedies,  are  scarcely  able  to  agree  re- 
specting the  proper  method.  Thus  the  lives  of 
their  patients  are  sometimes  exposed  to  danger 
by  their  controversies. 

Amid  so  great  a  variety  of  opinions,  it  is  a 
matter  of  no  small  moment  to  select  the  best  me- 
thod of  cure.  This  method  consists  in  the  pro- 
per use  of  two  kinds  of  remedies,  namely,  those 
which  are  called  general,  or  common  to  other 
diseases,  and  those  that  are  specific,  or  peculiar- 
ly suited  to  intermitting  fever.  The  general 
remedies,  such  as  evacuants,  diluents,  and  ape- 


163 

rientSj  arc  the  most  powerful  ;  by  their  use  the 
body  is  reduced  nearer  to  its  natural  state.  The 
circulation  of  the  blood  is  easier,  the  several 
parts  of  the  system  perform  their  functions  bet- 
ter, and  the  depraved  juices  are  altered  or  eject- 
ed. Specific  remedies,  therefore,  may  be  ad- 
ministered most  certainly  and  safely,  after  general 
remedies  have  been  premised.  By  these  latter 
remedies  the  way  is  paved  for  a  cure,  while  by 
the  former  the  cure  is  accomplished. 


CHAP.    iL 


Whether  or  not  all  Inter  mitt  ents  are  to  be  treated  with 
the  same  remedies  ?  Whether  or  not,  when  left  to 
themselves,  they  terminate  or  come  to  a  crisis  spon- 
taneously ?  and  whether  or  not  an  attempt  should  be 
made  to  cure  them  at  their  very  commencement  f  , 


WE  must  now  enquire  whether  or  not  every 
intermitting  fever  ought  to  be  treated  in  the 
same  manner.  There  is  a  wide  difference  be- 
tween vernal  and  autumnal  intermittents  :  their 
nature  is  indeed  the  same,  but  the  febrile  poison 
seems  to  be  milder  in  the  former  than  it  is  in  the 
latter :  this,  however,  is  not  always  the  case, 
for  we  sometimes  observe  vernal  intermittents  to 
be  possessed  of  a  malignant  character. 

But,  in  general,  these  diseases  of  the  spring 
are  easily  removed.  After  having  run  on  for  a 
short  time,  they  very  frequently  terminate  of 
their  own  accord.     An  attention   to  regimen 


165 

alone  is  adequate  to  the  eure  of  them.  If  they 
require  any  remedies,  neutral  salts  and  other 
aperients  are  for  the  most  part  sufficient.  It 
would  seem  that  if  there  be  any  fevers  of  a  salu- 
tary tendency  it  must  be  these  ;  they  open  the 
vessels  and  pores  that  have  been  obstructed  du- 
ring the  winter ;  they  communicate  motion  to 
the  stagnating  fluids,  and,  by  means  of  febrile 
action,  either  change  them  or  discharge  them 
through  the  different  emunctories. 

Fevers  happen  also  at  other  seasons  of  the 
year  which  are  by  no  means  obstinate  or  difficult 
to  be  cured.  This  arises  either  from  these  dis- 
eases attacking  persons  of  favourable  habits  of 
body,  and  not  abounding  in  depraved  humours ; 
or,  what  is  very  common,  from  the  febrile  poi- 
son being  extremely  weak.  In  attempting  the 
cure  of  such  diseases,  but  little  can  be  done ;  at 
least  a  few  remedies  are  sufficient,  such  as  dilu- 
ents, aperients,  and  mild  purgatives.  If  specifics 
be  necessary,  it  is  not  requisite  that  they  should 
be  exhibited  with  such  great  precaution.  Thus 
the  method  of  cure  ought  to  be  suited  to  the  cha- 
racter of  the  disease. 

Here  a  question  of  great  moment  arises, 
namely,  whether  or  not,  if  intermittents  be  left 
to  themselves,  they  admit  of  a  spontaneous  cure  ? 


16(3 

Some  writers  believe  that  they  terminate  after 
the  seventh  paroxysm,  and  that  they  have  a  fixed 
period  of  duration  as  well  as  continued  fevers.  I 
am,  indeed,  of  opinion,  that  if  in  intermitting  fe- 
ver the  patients  be  confined  to  a  strict  regimen, 
such  as  is  usually  prescribed  in  acute  diseases, 
the  intermittent  will  soon  come  to  a  close.  Se- 
veral examples  have  occurred  to  convince  me 
of  the  truth  of  this.  But  to  do  away  every  re- 
maining doubt  on  the  subject,  it  would  be  ne- 
cessary to  confine  a  certain  number  of  sick 
persons  to  this  regimen  alone  without  any  other 
remedy. 

But,  (a  circumstance  which  is  less  doubtful) 
if,  during  the  observance  of  such  a  regimen, 
gentle  remedies  be  administered,  these  diseases 
are  in  general  very  easily  cured,  provided  they 
be  not  marked  with  great  violence  ;  and  provi- 
ded there  be  no  serious  epidemic  prevailing.  But 
there  is  a  necessity  for  using  the  remedies  just 
mentioned,  because  there  is  frequently  too  much 
blood  in  the  system  ;  because  the  primae  viae 
abound  with  depraved  humours ;  and  there  is 
sometimes  a  great  accumulation  of  bile.  All 
these  impediments  must  be  forthwith  removed, 
in  order  that  nature  may  be  able  to  do  her  work 
spontaneously,  and  by  her  own  inherent  pow- 
ers. 


167 

If  nature  be  thus  dealt  with  and  regulated, 
she  usually  brings  about  a  kind  of  crisis  in  the 
disease.  The  third  paroxysm  is  more  severe 
than  the  two  preceding  ones,  but  the  sixth  is 
the  most  severe  of  any.  The  seventh,  which  is 
generally  the  last,  grows  milder,  but  is  succeeded 
either  by  a  gentle  sweat,  or  a  diarrhoea,  or  the 
morbid  cause  is  carried  off  by  both  these  modes 
of  evacuation  occurring  at  the  same  time.  Some- 
times these  efforts  of  nature  occur  several  days 
;ifter  the  seventh  paroxysm.  It  must  be  acknow- 
ledged, however,  that  in  many  cases  no  critical 
evacuation  can  be  observed.  This  happens 
more  particularly  when  the  system  is  disturbed 
by  a  multiplicity  of  remedies,  or  the  febrile 
symptoms  subdued  at  once  by  their  specific 
power. 

There  arises  another  question  of  no  less  con- 
sequence relative  to  the  use  of  both  general  and 
specific  remedies  in  these  diseases.  It  is  enquir- 
ed, for  instance,  whether  or  not  it  be  best  to 
attempt  the  cure  of  intermittents  immmedi- 
atvlv  on  their  commencement,  or  to  suffer  them 
lo  run  on  unmolested  for  a  certain  length  of 
time  ? 

We  do  not  here  allude  to  those  patients  on 
whom  intermittents  may  have  a  salutary  effect. 


168 

If  these  complaints  are  likely  to  eradicate  some 
other  disease,  they  may  then,  indeed,  be  left 
to  nature  for  some  time.  But  if  they  attack 
persons  in  health,  will  they,  under  these  cir- 
cumstances, prove  serviceable  to  them  ?  and 
whether  will  it  be  better  for  those  attacked  to  be 
relieved  from  them,  or  to  suffer  the  poison  of 
them  to  rage  through  their  systems  ?  We  are 
persuaded  from  every  view  of  the  subject,  that 
the  poison  ought  to  be  eliminated  from  the  body 
as  soon  as  possible. 

I  am  in  the  habit  of  paying  particular  atten- 
tion to  the  force  and  character  of  the  fever,  and, 
as  soon  as  I  discover  that  it  cannot  he  subdued 
without  difficulty  by  the  powers  of  nature,  hav- 
ing first  prepared  the  system  in  the  proper  man- 
ner, I  have  immediate  recourse  to  specific 
remedies.  Nor  have  I  ever,  in  the  course  of 
many  years,  known  any  mischief  to  arise  from 
this  mode  of  practice.  Even  fevers  of  a  bad 
aspect  have  been  removed  without  leaving  any 
vestiges  of  themselves  behind.  On  this  circum- 
stance alone  the  issue  of  the  matter  entirely 
depends,  namely,  that  the  medicines  be  skill- 
fully administered,  and  the  system  properly 
prepared  for  them  by  a  diluting,  cooling,  and 
opening  regimen.  I  acknowledge,  indeed,  that 
if  physicians  have  recourse  immediately  to  ft- 


169 

brifugC  medicines,  and  those  of  heating  quali- 
ties, they  will,  in  many  instances,  do  mischief; 
but  it  docs  not  follow  from  thence,  that  inter- 
mittents  ought  for  a  certain  time  to  be  left  to 
themselves.  When  thus  neglected  they  gene- 
rally take  deeper  root  and  become  more  obsti- 
nate and  difficult  to  be  cured. 


CHAP.    IIL 


Of  Blood-letting. 


THE  first  remedy  that  presents  itself  is 
blood-letting.  Yet  it  must  be  confessed  that  this 
alone  is  not  a  cure  for  intermitting  fevers.  It 
is,  therefore,  that  it  is  so  often  spoken  of  unfa- 
vourably, and  accounted  altogether  useless  :  if 
some  writers  are  to  be  credited,  it  is  even  to  be 
considered  as  injurious.  Perhaps  this  opinion 
has  been  derived  from  the  effects  of  very  copious 
hemorrhages,  which,  at  times,  have  appeared  to 
add  strength  to  these  fevers.  It  does  not,  how- 
ever, follow  from  thence,  that  blood-letting  is 
to  be  entirely  rejected,  as  if  incapable  of  doing 
good  in  such  diseases. 

On  this  subject  nature  and  experience  fur- 
nish us  many  things  worthy  of  notice.  I  have 
oftentimes  seen  double  tertians  converted  into 
simple  tertians  by  a  single  blood-letting.     Half 


171 

of  the  disease,  therefore,  may  be  removed  by  the 
loss  of  blood.  But,  what  is  of  no  less  moment, 
T  have  learnt  from  certain  and  repeated  observa- 
tion, that  the  paroxysms  are  rendered  much 
milder  by  it,  and  made  to  recur  at  a  later  hour. 
Besides,  after  blood-letting,  the  febrile  heat  is 
less  distressing,  the  sweats  are  less  profuse,  the 
pain  in  the  head  is  milder,  and  all  the  functions 
of  the  body  go  on  with  more  regularity. 

It  may  be  laid  down,  therefore,  as  an  esta- 
blished principle,  that  if  venesection  does  not 
absolutely  cure  intermittents,  it  paves  the  way 
for  other  remedies,  and  is  on  that  account  ^high- 
ly  necessary.  It  remains,  therefore,  only  to  be 
-determined,  whether  or  not  it  be  necessarv  in  all 
oases,  whether  it  may  not  be,  or  rather  ought 
not  to  be  omitted  in  some,  and,  finally,  what  are 
the  limits  that  ought  to  be  set  to  it  ? 

It  would,  indeed,  be  absurd  to  have  recourse 
to  blood-letting  in  every  febrile  affection.  There 
are  cases  in  which  it  is  allowable  and  even  neces- 
sary to  abstain  from  it ;  these  are  such  as  are 
mild  in  themselves,  or  such  as  attack  persons  al- 
ready Aery  much  exhausted  and  debilitated. 
Fevers  of  this  description  stand  the  less  in  need 
of  such  a  remedy,  in  as  much  as  many  of  them, 
and  those  of  a  serious  aspect,  have  been  occasi- 
onally cured  without  blcod-lctting.     33ivt  these 


172 

few  examples  ought  not  to  divert  our  attention 
from  the  precepts  of  reason  and  the  result  of  ex- 
perience.  It  is  safer  to  have  recourse  to  blood- 
letting even  when  not  absolutely  necessary,  than 
to  neglect  it  when  it  is  necessary. 

It  would  be  particularly  injurious  to  omit 
blood-letting  in  cases  where  the  blood-vessels 
are  turgid,  the  fever  intense,  and  the  patients  dis- 
tressed with  a  burning  heat,  or,  an  extremely 
acute  pain  of  the  head :  by  such  an  omission 
the  fever  would  be  rendered  worse,  and  the  va- 
rious functions  of  the  system  probably  injured. 
To  the  neglect  of  blood-letting  is  the  obstinacy 
of  fevers  to  be  generally  attributed ;  from  this 
source  must  we  oftentimes  derive  the  failure  and 
even  hurtful  effects  of  febrifuge  remedies.  It  ap- 
pears from  the  best  founded  experience,  that  a 
fulness  of  blood,  an  impetuous  circulation,  and 
the  febrile  heat  thence  arising  are  unfavourable 
to  the  success  of  such  medicines. 

How  far  blood-letting  ought  to  be  carried, 
it  is  impossible  to  state.  This  depends  on  the 
constitutions  of  patients,  and  the  violence  of 
their  symptoms.  In  as  much  as  these  circum- 
stances may  be  various,  so  may  the  amount  of 
blood  necessary  to  be  drawn  ;  at  times,  indeed, 
it  must  be  large.  The  nearer  the  fevers  approach 
to  a  continued  form,  the  more  frequently  must 


recourse  be  had  to  the  remedy  of  blood-letting. 
This  precept,  which  is  founded  on  experience 
and  reason,  shall  here  be  illustrated  by  a  few 
examples. 

In  an  epidemic  constitution  which  once  pre- 
vailed in  this  place,  the  fevers  were  double  ter- 
tians, and  many  assumed  even  the  appearance  of 
continued  fevers.  In  these  the  sick  experienced 
no  relief  till  after  three  or  four  blood-lettings. 
In  many  cases  the  pulse  was  so  hard,  and  the 
pain  of  the  head  so  acute,  that  the  practitioners 
were  obliged  to  repeat  the  blood-lettings  five  or 
six  times.  If  this  remedy  was  neglected,  the 
heat  was  intense  and  burning;  the  pains  of  the 
head  were  intolerable  ;  and  the  disease  generally 
put  on  a  true  continued  form.  But  after  the 
tone  of  the  system  had  been  reduced  by  blood- 
letting, all  the  symptoms  soon  remitted,  and  left 
an  opening  for  the  exhibition  of  other  remedies. 

In  tertian  fevers  of  a  spurious  and  violent 
kind,  I  have  oftentimes  met  with  a  similar  occur- 
rence. When  blood-letting  was  used  too  spar- 
ingly, the  symptoms  were  usually  rendered 
worse  ;  it  was  in  vain  that  relief  was  looked  for 
from  other  remedies.  But  when  practitioners, 
urged  to  it  by  the  obstinacy  of  the  disease,  had 
recourse  again  to  blood-letting,  after  having  used 
it  too  sparingly  at  first,  the  state  of  the  sick  was 


174 

immediately  changed  for  the  better,  the  heat 
abated,  and  the  paroxysms  became  more  mild. 
Other  remedies  which  had  before  been  exhibit- 
ed to  no  purpose,  now  succeeded  in  producing 
a  cure. 

In  the  mean  time,  in  simple  intermittent s, 
and  even  in  double  tertians,  provided  they  do 
not  assume  a  continued  form,  one  or  two  blood- 
lettings will  be  generally  sufficient.  Nor  ought 
the  practitioner  to  go  beyond  this,  in  case  the 
apyrexia  between  the  paroxysms  be  perfect,  and 
the  fever  during  the  paroxysms  so  moderate  that 
it  can  to  appearance  be  borne,  without  any  ma- 
terial injury  t>eing  done  -to  the  functions  of  the 
body. 

But,  under  what  regulation  shall  blood-let- 
ting be  used,  in  those  intermittents  which  dis- 
appear for  a  certain  time,  and  then  recur  again  ? 
must  it  be  had  recourse  to  as  often  as  they  thus 
make  their  appearance  ?  It  would  seem  useless 
and  improper  to  continue  to  lose  blood  in  cases 
where  it  has  been  frequently  lost  already ;  in 
cases  where  the  disease  has  oftentimes  disappear- 
ed for  a  few  days,  and  then  returned  again ; 
where  its  long  duration  has  brought  on  a  cha- 
chectic  habit  of  body  ;  and  where,  from  the 
summer  or  autumn  it  has  been  protracted  to  the 
midst  of  winter.    Finally,  to  include  every  thing 


175 

in  a  few  words,  the  strength  of  the  system  ought 
to  be  such  as  to  be  able  to  bear  blood-letting,  nor 
should  we  ever  have  recourse  to  it  unless  com- 
pelled by  the  violence  of  the  symptoms. 

We  have  already  observed  that  blood-letting 
docs  not  eradicate  the  cause  of  the  disease,  but 
merely  curbs  its  violence.    But  what  benefit  can 
be  derived  from  such  a  check,  in  cases  where  the 
vital  energy  is  already  too  languid  ?    The  objec- 
tions which  we  here  raise  can  serve  only  to  re- 
strain imprudence.   No  one  but  a  madman  will, 
in  treating  a  febrile  complaint,  persist  long  in  at- 
tempting to  overcome  it  by  very  profuse  blood- 
letting.    To  this  practice,  when  carried  to  ex- 
cess, the  king  of  Spain  is  said  to  have  fallen  a 
victim,  and  from  the  same  cause  several  others 
have,  to  my  certain  knowledge,  shared  the  same 
fate.     I  do  not  mean,  by  what  is  here  said,  that 
blood-letting  is  to  be  rejected  in   every  case  of 
fever  of  long  standing.     If  the  pulse  demands  or 
admits  of  it,   if  the  febrile  symptoms  run   too 
high,  it  becomes  unsafe  to  neglect  this  remedy. 


CHAP.  IV. 


Of  cleansing  the  prima:  via:. 


BOTH  before  and  after  blood-letting,  a  very 
light  diet  must  be  strictly  enjoined,  and  that  even 
on  the  days  of  intermission.  This  is  necessary, 
at  least  in  the  beginning  of  the  disease,  and  must 
be  considered  as  laying  the  foundation  for  a  per- 
fect cure.  At  the  same  time  diluents  must  be 
used,  in  order  that  the  system  may  be  properly 
cleansed ;  for  evacuating  medicines  do  not  act 
with  success,  unless  aided  by  a  plentiful  use  of 
aqueous  drinks.  The  use  of  such  drinks  is 
particularly  necessary  to  persons  inured  to  ex- 
ercise, and  such  as  are  plethoric,  bilious,  and  of 
a  dry  temperament.  In  addition  to  these  dilu- 
ents, recourse  should  be  had  to  injections,  for 
the  purpose  of  evacuating  the  lower  intestines. 

These  things  being  done,  measures  must 
now  be  taken  to  cleanse  the  primae  viae,  and  the 


177 

whole  intestinal  tube.  The  fomes  of  the  fever 
does  not  indeed  reside  in  this  part  of  the  sys- 
tem :  but  the  disease  may  be  rendered  much 
worse  by  depraved,  putrid,  or  bilious  humours: 
by  such  humours  the  blood  is  vitiated,  an  acri- 
mony is  created  in  it,  and  heat  and  irritation  are 
produced  ;  at  least  from  them  arises  some  impe- 
diment to  the  efficacy  and  success  of  febrifuge 
remedies.  Experience  bears  testimony  to  the 
truth  of  this,  because,  while  the  stomach  and 
intestines  are  overloaded  with  crude  humours, 
the  cure  of  intermittents  continues  to  be  diffi- 
cult. Affections  which  may  be  easily  removed 
after  proper  evacuations,  take  deep  root  and  be- 
come obstinate  if  such  evacuations  be  omitted 
or  neglected. 

But  with  which  ought  we  to  begin,  emetics, 
or  cathartics?  It  will  perhaps  to  some  seem, 
best  to  refrain  from  emetics,  because,  at  the 
commencement  of  the  paroxysms,  the  sick  are 
subject  to  painful  and  repeated  vomiting.  Add 
to  this,  that  whatever  offensive  matters  remain  in 
the  recesses  of  the  stomach,  must  be  necessarily 
expelled  by  the  efforts  and  kind  offices  of  nature. 
But  experience  has  taught  us  that  such  efforts 
are  useles ;  for  the  fever  continues,  notwith- 
standing, extremely  violent,  and  recurs  at  stated 
periods.      This  febrile  vomiting,  therefore,  not 

only  is  not  useful,  but  even  does  mischief,    be- 

i  a 


178 

cause  in  the  commencement  of  the  fever  there 
is  a  general  constriction  of  all  parts  of  the 
system  ;  hence  the  stomach  cannot  be  properly 
evacuated ;  it  is  only  affected  by  a  morbid  ir- 
ritation, which  distressess  it,  and  subverts  its 
action* 

The  cure  of  the  disease,  therefore,  calls  for 
a  vomiting  to  be  excited  by  art.  It  has  been 
already  demonstrated  that  the  liver  is  very  par- 
ticularly affected  :  it  becomes  the  seat  of  a  col- 
lection of  vitiated  bile :  the  blood  stagnates  in 
the  branches  of  the  vena  portae  ;  and  unless  this 
stagnation  be  removed,  it  will  operate  in  con- 
junction with  the  vitiated  bile  like  a  second 
ibmes  of  disease,  which  readily  produces  fever. 
But  we  cannot  with  more  certainty  remove  this 
stagnation  and  bilious  congestion,  in  any  other 
way,  than  by  emetic  medicines  :  for  when  these 
excite  vomiting,  the  liver  is,  as  it  were,  in  a 
press,  where  it  is  agitated  by  alternate  and  re- 
peated concussions.  By  such  pressure  and  con- 
cussions the  blood  is  forced  out  of  its  small  ves- 
sels, while  the  bile  is  pressed  into  the  intestines, 
and  from  thence  with  the  other  juices  of  the  sto- 
mach discharged  by  the  mouth. 

This  medicine  appears  particularly  neces- 
sary in  certain  fevers,  or  in  certain  epidemic 
constitutions  ;  for  the  sick  throw  up  vast  quan- 


179 

lities  of  green,  tough  bile,  similar  in  consistence 
to  very  thick  oil.  But  what  is  truly  surprising, 
or  at  least  of  great  moment,  so  rapid  is  the  for- 
mation of  this  bile,  that  to  vomit  once  is  seldom 
sufficient ;  for  after  a  short  time,  such  a  fresh  ac- 
cumulation of  bile  takes  plase,  that  another  pa- 
roxysm of  vomiting  occurs  as  plenteous  as  be- 
fore. But  as  often  as  this  redundancy  of  bile 
returns,  so  often  does  fever  also  recur  ;  whence 
it  can  be  made  to  appear  by  many  arguments, 
that  the  disease  is  actually  kept  up  by  the  bile, 
a  fluid  it)  other  respects  so  necessary  to  the 
system. 

Nor  is  there  any  doubt  but  stagnations  also 
occur  in  other  parts  of  the  body.  That  this  is 
true,  appears  from  the  power  and  influence  of  the 
cold  fit,  and  also  from  the  irregularity  and  in- 
creased force  of  the  circulation.  The  same  thing 
may  be  inferred  from  the  obstructions  that  so 
often  follow  intermitting  fevers.  But  the  circu- 
lation of  the  fluids  is  greatly  promoted  by  the 
influence  and  operation  of  emetic  medicines. 
These  medicines  rouse  the  nervous  energies,  and 
throw  into  action  the  capillary  vessels  through- 
out the  whole  system.  Hence  the  fluids  which 
had  begun  to  stagnate  and  grow  solid,  as  it  were, 
in  the  extreme  vessels,  are  again  urged  onward 
in  the  course  of  circulation. 


180 

All  these  things  are  confirmed  by  innumer- 
able experiments.  Emetic  medicines  are,  indeed, 
so  efficacious  in  intermittents,  that  they  often- 
times bring  them  to  a  close  as  it  were  by  a  single 
blow.  Should  they  even  survive,  their  force  is 
much  diminished.  But,  what  is  of  the  utmost 
moment,  the  system  is  thus  prepared  for  the  use 
of  other  remedies,  which  would  have  been  ad- 
ministered in  vain,  and  even  to  the  injury  of  the 
patient,  haul  they  not  been  preceded  by  the  oper- 
ation of  emetics.  A  very  material  object,  then, 
in  the  exhibition  of  emetics  is,  to  pave  the  way 
for  the  safe  and  certain  use  of  febrifuge  reme- 
dies. 

It  is  a  circumstance  no  less  certain,  that  when 
emetics  are  neglected,  the  disease  is  apt  to  be- 
come stubborn  ond  tedious.  In  such  a  case  it 
can  be  successfully  combatted  only  by  emetic 
medicines.  This  is  an  argument  greatly  in  their 
favour.  I  have  learnt  from  innumerable  experi- 
ments, that  there  is  no  hope  of  a  recovery  with- 
out copious  vomiting.  So  efficacious  has  this 
remedy  appeared  to  me  to  be,  that  I  have  con- 
sidered it  practicable  to  prevent  impending  fevers 
by  its  proper  use.  Nor,  indeed,  have  I  been  de- 
ceived in  this  opinion.  I  have  kept  many  per- 
sons free  from  intermittents,  though  strongly 
inclined  to  them,  by  the  repeated  use  of  eme- 
tics. 


181 

Young  persons  and  adults  arc  alike  benefited 
by  the  operation  of  emetics.  Nor  is  the  use  of 
tartarized  antimony  to  be  considered  as  hazard- 
ous to  the  former.  Experience  has  taught  me 
that  the  action  of  that  medicine  is  milder  in  chil- 
dren than  in  persons  further  advanced  in  years. 
Many  times,  however,  to  avoid  alarming  my  pa- 
tients or  their  friends,  I  have  administered  Ker- 
mes  mineral  instead  of  it,  and  that  with  a  happy 
effect.  In  the  case  of  a  female  child  three  years 
old,  who  laboured  under  a  tertian  fever  which 
also  at  times  assumed  the  quartan  form,  I  remem- 
ber to  have  used  this  latter  remedy.  As  often  as 
vomiting  was  excited  by  it,  so  often  did  I  obtain 
for  my  patient  a  respite  of  eight  or  twelve  days. 
In  this  manner  did  the  disease  continue  to  the 
great  distress  and  eminent  danger  of  the  child, 
from  autumn  throughout  the  winter,  and  even 
to  the  following  summer,  when  the  powers  of  na- 
ture and  the  change  of  the  season  effected  a 
cure. 

But  it  is  necessary  that  vomiting  be  excited 
either  by  this  or  some  other  medicines.  For  if, 
as  sometimes  happens,  their  action  be  directed 
to  the  bowels  so  as  to  produce  a  purging,  their 
effect  is  not  equally  salutary.  I  have  remarked 
this  in  many  cases  of  disease,  but  particularly  in 
a  certain  epidemic  constitution,  in  which  medi- 
cines usually  passed  oft' by  the  bowels.    From  an 


182 

intestinal  evacuation,  however  copious,  the  same 
benefit  was  not  derived,  as  commonly  result- 
ed from  vomiting.  In  this  case  it  appeared  to 
me  that  ipecacuanna  was  preferable  to  tartarized 
antimony,  because  it  produced  with  more  cer- 
tainty an  evacuation  of  the  stomach. 

If  it  were  requisite  to  confirm  these  things 
by  the  authority  of  others,  arguments  might  be 
drawn  from  sundry  medical  writings.  Vomiting 
is  necessary,  says  Celsus,  in  all  cases  where  the 
paroxysms  are  introduced  by  a  coldness  and  a 
shivering.  Galen  makes  mention  of  many  per- 
sons being  perfectly  cured  by  vomiting  alone. 
Paulus  and  Aetius  speak  also  in  praise  of  eme- 
tics. Some  more  modern  writers  attribute  also 
great  efficacy  to  these  medicines.  Among  these 
Riverius  extols  them  greatly  :  in  his  opinion 
they  are  more  certain  and  useful  in  their  opera- 
tion than  any  other  remedy  :  he  considers  them 
particularly  beneficial  when  administered  for 
three  mornings  in  succession.  Such  a  practice 
must  not,  however,  be  ventured  on  but  with 
great  caution. 

There  are  some  physicians  Mho  fly  to  wild 
spikenard,  as  the  only  sheet-anchor  of  safety  in 
protracted  iniermittents.  Others,  according  to 
Jacotius,  cure  them  with  salt  of  vitriol.  Some 
have  recourse,  and  that  successfully,  to  the  aqua 


183 

bencdlcta  of  Rulandus  ;  while  others  do  not 
shrink  from  the  adoption  of  more  powerful  me- 
dicines, such  as  red  precipitate,  and  other  pre- 
parations of  mercury.  But  the  human  mind  is 
so  fluctuating  and  unsteady,  that  it  cannot  with- 
out great  difficulty  be  brought  to  rest  at  any 
fixed  point.  Tossed  on  the  uncertain  tide  of 
opinion,  it  is  constantly  borne  about  in  pursuit 
of  new  discoveries.  Hence  it  is  that  physicians 
will  neither  tread  in  the  footsteps  of  the  ancients, 
nor  be  led  by  the  observations  of  others,  to  re- 
peat the  experiments  on  which  those  observa- 
tions were  founded. 


CHAP.   V. 


Of  the  use  of  Purgatives. 


1  WOULD  not,  however,  be  understood 
to  mean,  that  no  intermittent  can  be  cured  with- 
out the  use  of  emetics.  Many  diseases  of  the 
kind  are  removed  or  terminate  of  themselves 
without  any  previous  vomiting.  Some  of  them 
are  too  slight  to  stand  in  need  of  such  a  powerful 
remedy.  Besides,  impediments  sometimes  oc- 
cur which  forbid  the  use  of  emetics.  In  many 
cases,  for  instance,  the  stomach  cannot  bear 
their  irritating  power.  They  are  particularly 
hurtful  in  affections  of  the  lunsrs.  Thev  are  also 
hurtful  to  cachectic  patients,  who  labour  under 
local  affections  of  other  parts.  Finally,  it  would 
be  unreasonable  and  absurd  to  harass  the  sick 
with  emetics,  on  each  return  of  long  continued 
intermittents. 


185 

But  when  this  remedy  cannot  be  called  to 
our  aid,  purgatives  must  by  no  means  be  omit- 
ted. If  the  stomach  only  be  evacuated  by  the 
emetic,  or  the  bowels,  as  often  happens,  be  but 
slightly  moved,  they  must  be  solicited  to  fur- 
ther discharges.  Some  practitioners,  therefore, 
are  in  the  habit  of  employing  emetics  and  cathar- 
tics combined  together.  To  me,  however,  it 
would  seem  better  to  exhibit,  first,  some  gentle 
purgative,  and  afterwards  when  it  has  begun  to 
operate,  to  administer  an  emetic.  In  this  way 
both  the  desired  effects  are  obtained.  The 
cleansing  of  the  bowels  by  means  of  purgative 
medicines  is  so  necessary,  that,  unless  it  be  pre- 
viously attended  to,  other  remedies  are  very  fre- 
quently employed  to  no  purpose.  This  posi- 
tion can  be  established  by  numerous  argu- 
ments. 

It  may  be  laid  down  as  a  general  principle 
that  a  plethora,  of  whatever  kind  it  may  be,  is 
hurtful  in  fevers.  It  is  necessary,  therefore,  to 
expel,  as  soon  as  practicable,  all  depraved  and 
putrid  juices  from  the  intestinal  tube.  This 
cleansing  of  the  alimentary  canal  is  of  the  more 
consequence,  in  as  much  as  it  relaxes  the  sur- 
rounding parts,  makes  the  blood  circulate  more 
freely,  and  opens  the  secretory  and  excretory 
ducts.  In  consequence  of  this  relaxed  state  of 
things,  the  bile,  which  acts  an  important  part  in 

b  b 


186 

intermittents,  will  pass  off  with  more  ease.  The 
urine  also,  the  free  secretion  of  which  is  of  such 
moment,  will  pass  more  copiously  through  the 
kidneys. 

Certain  remedies,  besides  their  purgative  pow- 
ers, are  also  possessed  of  other  properties  no  less 
useful.  Many  of  these  not  only  act  on  the  intes- 
tines, but  are  truly  aperient;  they  stimulate 
the  liver  for  instance,  and  produce  a  flow  of  bile 
from  it.  Thus,  when  that  viscus  is  obstructed, 
laxatives  are  prescribed,  such  as  burdock- root, 
vitriolated  tartar,  and  arcanum  duplicatum : 
senna  itself  is  also  given  at  times  in  certain 
doses,  of  the  effects  of  which  we  have  satisfacto- 
ry evidence. 

But  to  speak  more  particularly  of  intermit- 
ting fevers,  it  is  well  known  that  they  have  been 
cured  by  certain  purgatives,  and  those  not  mild 
and  lubricating,  but  stimulating  and  acrid. 
Scammony,  hedge-hyssop,  the  powder  of  cor- 
nachinus,  the  pills  of  sagapenum  by  Querceta- 
nus,  and  theantimonial  preparations  of  Bontius, 
have  been  of  service  in  many  quartans.  The 
preparation  of  Riverius  composed  of  calomel 
and  jalap  has  produced  the  same  happy  effects. 
1  am  acquainted  with  a  popular  or  vulgar  reme- 
dy, which  has  cured  vast  numbers  of  people  in 
the  country  ;  it  is  a  powder  composed  of  scam- 


187 

mony,  turpith  mineral,  jalap,  senna,  cream  of 
tartar,  rhubarb,  cinnamon,  and  ginger.  Simi- 
lar effects  have  been  produced  by  another  reme- 
dy of  the  same  kind,  devised  by  Hclvctius,  and 
since  his  time  vended  about  as  a  secret.  The 
strength  of  this  nostrum  jesides  in  the  gum 
which  it  contains. 

But  whatever  be  the  strength  of  these  reme- 
dies, it  is  best  that  they  be  not  too  acrid,  else 
they  will  prove  injurious  to  those  whose  stomach 
and  bowels  are  tender  and  irritable.  Besides, 
milder  remedies  are  sufficient  for  the  cure  of  in- 
termittents.  In  the  mean  time  it  is  not  sufficient 
that  they  be  administered  once  ;  in  various  dis- 
eases of  the  kind  frequent  recourse  must  be  had 
to  them,  in  order  to  pave  the  way  for  a  certain 
cure.  This  is  particularly  necessary  when  there 
is  an  accumulation  of  bile,  when  the  intestines 
are  loaded  with  a  collection  of  offensive  and  ill 
digested  humours,  and,  lastly,  when  the  febrile 
action  is  high. 

An  open  habit  of  body  is  peculiarly  necessary 
in  the  course  of  the  cure.  It  is  certain  that  if 
the  discharge  from  the  bowels  goes  on  gently  and 
as  it  were  spontaneously,  and  the  bile  be  thus 
drawn  off,  the  fomes  of  the  fever  will  be  the  more 
readily  eradicated.  The  truth  of  this  is  confirm- 
ed by  several  of  the  phenomena  of  the  disease. 


188 

There  are  many  persons,  for  instance,  to  whom 
febrifuge  remedies  had  been  exhibited  for  a  long 
time  without  any  advantage  :  but  while  these  re- 
medies, when  given  alone,  were  useless  or  per- 
haps hurtful,  they  oftentimes  removed  the  fevers, 
when  laxatives  were  joined  with  them.  After 
the  fevers  are  thus  overcome,  they  are  for  the 
most  part  ready  to  return  again,  in  case  a  cos- 
tive habit  occurs.  Nor  can  the  evil  be  prevented 
in  any  other  way  than  by  the  exhibition  of  some 
mild  purgative  joined  to  febrifuge  remedies. 

I  know  that  the  sentiments  here  advanced  are 
contrary  to  the  opinions  entertained  by  many 
physicians,  These  consider  it  wrong  to  open 
the  bowels  in  the  cure  of  intermittents.  They 
assert  that,  after  the  disease  has  terminated,  it 
will  even  return  again,  in  case  a  purgative  me- 
dicine be  administered.  Experience  is  adduced 
in  confirmation  c£the  truth  of  this  by  many  wri- 
ters, and  even  Sydenham  himself  sanctions  it  by 
his  authority.  But  the  circumstances  which  led 
him  and  others  to  the  adoption  of  this  opinion, 
are  wholly  unfounded. 

It  is  certain  that  if  at  any  time  purgative 
medicines,  when  used  in  the  cure  of  intermit- 
tents, have  seemed  to  do  mischief,  the  circum- 
stance has  been  owing  to  some  error.  Either 
some  necessary  preliminaries  have  been  neglect- 


189 

ed,  or  the  evacuation  of  bile  itself  has  not  been 
attended  to.  When  that  fluid  has  begun  to  ac- 
cumulate, evacuants  too  heating  and  irritating, 
or  such  as  evacuate  but  imperfectly,  have  been 
administered.  It  may  also  have  happened  that 
they  were  not  joined  with  febrifuge  remedies, 
or  that  they  were  given  in  improper  doses.  No 
wonder,  then,  that  the  fever  appeared  to  increase. 
But  the  fault  lay  in  the  physicians,  not  in  the 
purgatives. 

As  to  those  fevers  which  have  terminated, 
and  which  seem  to  be  cured,  their  poison  may, 
as  formerly  mentioned,  lie  dormant  for  a  long 
time.  It  may  even  be  silently  accumulated, 
and  thus  gather  strength.  If,  when  things  are 
in  this  state,  the  body  be  much  disturbed  by  an 
ill-timed  purge,  it  is  not  to  be  wondered  at,  if 
the  fever  which  had  lain  in  ambush,  as  it  were, 
ready  to  break  forth,  should  suddenly  and  un- 
expectedly make  its  appearance.  The  febrile 
poison  would  not  have  acted  thus,  had  it  been 
subdued;  and  had  the  purgative  been  admini- 
stered with  the  necessary  precaution,* it  would 
have  eradicated  the  last  relics  of  the  poison.  The 
proper  use  of  purgative  medicines  does  not,  then, 
pave  the  way  for  relapses. 


CHAP.   VI. 


Of  the  use  of  Aperients. 


BUT  although  the  necessity  for  purgatives 
is  great,  it  does  not  follow  that  no  intermittent 
can  be  cured  without  them.  But  we  must  direct 
our  attention  to  those  occurrences  and  principles 
which  are  most  common,  and  not  suffer  our- 
selves to  be  diverted  from  them  by  such  as  are 
much  less  cqmmon.  In  general,  therefore,  as 
we  have  already  observed,  it  is  absolutely  necesr 
sary  to  have  recourse  to  purgatives  in  the  cure 
of  inter  mittents. 

There  are,  in  the  mean  time,  cases  in  which 
the  evacuation  of  the  intestines  can  be  less  rea- 
dily dispensed  with  than  in  others.  If,  for  in- 
stance,  the  disease  be  of  very  long  standing;  if 
the  abdomen  be  tumid  or  hard;  if  the  skin  be 
tinged  with  bile ;  if  the  urine  be  thick  or  high 
coloured;  finally,  if  the  habit  be  cachectic  in 


191 

consequence  of  obstructions  ;  if,  I  say,  any  or 
all  of  these  circumstances  exist,  the  medicines 
called  specific  febrifuges  are  of  no  avail ;  the 
cure  must  not  be  attempted  with  them,  until 
the  impediments  be  first  removed  by  a  discharge 
of  the  vitiated  humours. 

But,  for  the  complete  discharge  of  these  hu- 
mours the  evacuation  of  the  bowels  is  not  alone 
sufficient.  Impediments  exist  in  many  other 
parts  of  the  system,  which  must  also  be  remov- 
ed ;  thus,  the  various  secretory  and  excretory 
passages  or  ducts  must  be  opened;  motion  must 
be  restored  to  the  stagnant  fluids  ;  their  fluidity 
which  is  partially  lost  must  be  restored  again, 
and  the  bile  must  be  recalled  to  its  own  proper 
ducts,  and  to  the  cavity  of  the  intestines.  Re- 
course must,  therefore,  be  had  to  diluents,  aperi- 
ents, refrigerants,  and  saponaceous  medicines, 
and  to  these  must  be  added  some  purgative  me- 
dicine, for  the  purpose  of  keeping  the  bowels 
open. 

The  effects  of  the  juices  of  herbs  properly 
prepared  in  removing  obstructions  of  the  abdo- 
minal viscera  are  truly  surprising.  This  may 
be  inferred  from  the  influence  of  green  herbs  on 
the  bodies  of  horses,  cattle,  &c.  These  animals 
are  purged,  and  become  lean  in  the  spring  ;  their 
fluids  are  made   to   circulate  more  freelv,  and 


192 

their  secretions  are  rendered  more  free  and  ac-, 
tive.     The  same  thing  may  be  done  by  a  phy- 
sician, if  to  aperients  and  deobstruents  he  adds 
a  mild   purgative   just  sufficient  to  move  the 
bowels. 

What  I  have  found  best  for  unlocking  the 
passages  of  the  liver  is  a  purgative  decoction  or 
beverage,  made  for  the  most  part  of  wild  bur- 
dock, succory,  hart's-tongue,  and  other  herbs 
of  the  kind.  To  this  I  have  mostly  added  some 
purgative  salt,  such  as  sal  glauberii,  or  arcanum 
duplicatum.  This  beverage  will  generally  re- 
move the  obstructions  unless  they  be  uncom- 
monly obstinate.  It  will  never,  however,  prove 
entirely  efficacious,  unless  it  move  the  bowels 
two  or  three  times  a  day. 

These  laxatives  and  aperients  are  necessary 
not  only  in  fevers  of  long  standing,  and  in  such 
as  are  kept  up  by  obstructions  ;  there  are  others 
of  recent  origin  in  which  the  same  remedies 
ought  to  be  used.  Some  fevers,  for  instance, 
attack  and  run  on  with  great  violence ;  in  these 
the  viscera  are  parched  with  extreme  heat ;  the 
liver  is  particularly  affected  ;  the  bile  is  of  a  deep 
yellow  or  green  colour,  the  feces  are  highly  of- 
fensive ;  the  urine  is  red  or  of  a  brick-dust  co- 
lour ;  cases  of  disease  where  these  symptoms 
prevail  resist  common  febrifuge  remedies,  and 


193 

unless  recourse  be  had  to  such  as  open  the  pas- 
sages of  the  body,  the  febrile  poison  cannot  be 
readily  vanquished. 

In  cases  of  this  kind,  I  have  derived  advan- 
tage from  putting  my  patients  for  a  week  or 
longer  on  the  use  of  aperients  and  laxatives. 
To  some  of  these  I  have  prescribed  the  juice  of 
succory,  borage,  and  bugloss,  with  sal  glauberii, 
or  some  other  saline  purgative ;  to  others  a  de- 
coction or  beverage  prepared  from  the  same  or 
some  other  herbs,  with  tartarum  vitriolatum  in 
it ;  and,  lastly,  cases  have  occurred  to  me  in 
which  my  patients  derived  the  greatest  benefit 
from  the  use  of  whey.  Whey  is  a  liquid  which 
contains  the  juices  of  herbs,  prepared  and  con- 
cocted, as  it  were,  in  an  animal  laboratory.  It 
is  also  impregnated  with  a  quantity  of  vegetable 
salts,  which  sometimes  operate  actively  as  pur- 
gatives. 

This  mode  of  treatment  very  seldom  disap- 
points our  expectations.  Such  is  the  extent  of 
my  confidence  in  it,  that  as  often  as  I  have  met 
with  an  obstinate  case  of  intermitting  fever,  I 
have  had  recourse  to  the  foregoing,  or  such  like 
remedies.  Of  such  remarkable  efficacy  have  I 
considered  these  remedies,  that  in  many  cases  I 
have  not  hesitated,  after  the  exhibition  of  gene- 
ral remedies,  to  continue  some  time  in  the  use 

c  c 


194 

of  aperients.  In  this  way  the  system  was  the 
better  prepared  for  the  action  of  febrifuge  medi- 
cines. 

There  is  yet  another  remedy  in  which  I 
place  great  confidence,   when   the  patients  are 
willing  to  submit  to  it.     After  their  bowels  are 
sufficiently  evacuated,  I  put  them  on  a  watery  re- 
gimen for  three  or  four  days.  During  that  time, 
I   prohibit  them  from  using  any  other  kind  of 
drink  or  food.     By  thus  drinking  six  or  eight 
pounds  of  water  a  day,  the  fever  is  almost  entire- 
ly removed.   I  consider  warm  water  as  the  most 
efficacious,   yet  cold  water  will  answer  in  the 
summer  season.     This  method  seldom  fails  of 
success.     It  has  succeeded  with  me  in  remov- 
ing obstinate  fevers,  which  had  resisted  every 
other  mode  of  treatment.  If  some  relics  of  these 
fevers  still  remained  behind,  they  were  easily 
subdued,   and  that  by  gentle  means.     Is  it  not 
surprising  that  we  should  ransack  Asia  and  Ame- 
rica for  remedies,   when  more  efficacious  ones 
are  every  where  to  be  found 


CHAP.  VII. 


At  what  time  the  remedies  mentioned  In  the  foregoing 
chapters  are  to  be  administered* 


IT  remains  to  consider,  at  what  time  the 
foregoing  remedies  are  to  be  employed.  Blood- 
letting may  be  practised  both  during  the  pa- 
roxysm and  during  the  intermission.  When 
employed  during  the  paroxysm,  it  is  intended 
to  break  the  violence  of  the  fever,  and  of  its  con- 
comitant symptoms  ;  when  during  the  inter- 
mission, it  is  used  as  a  prophylactic,  to  render 
the  succeeding  fits  lighter,  and  thus  to  pave  the 
way  for  other  remedies. 

These  circumstances  are  so  plain  as  scarcely 
to  require  any  directions.  But  such  has  been 
the  rashness  of  some  men,  that  they  have  ven- 
tured to  open  a  vein  during  the  cold  fit.  This 
practice  is  unreasonable  and  hazardous.    When 


196 

the  pulse  is  so  depressed  as  to  be  almost  imper- 
ceptible  ;  when  the  blood  scarcely  circulates ; 
when  the  vital  principle  seems  to  be  already 
overpowered,  what  benefit  is  to  be  expected 
from  blood-letting  ?  Can  it  be  had  recourse  to 
without  danger  in  old  persons,  as  such  are  some- 
times known  to  expire  under  the  violence  of  the 
cold  lit  ? 

During  the  cold  fit  is  a  time  equally  im- 
proper for  the  use  of  other  evacuants.  Those 
in  particular  which  act  with  force  are  hurtful. 
Emetics,  therefore,  cannot  be  ventured  on,  al- 
though the  patients  be  affected  with  nausea  and 
vomiting.  It  is  not  in  this  as  it  is  in  that  vomit- 
ing which  arises  from  a  superabundance  or  an 
acrimony  of  the  humours.  In  the  cold  stage  of 
fever,  the  action  of  the  stomach  is  inverted  by 
nervous  irritation,  and  an  affection  of  the  liver. 
That  organ  like  all  other  parts  of  the  system  is 
contracted.  It  does  not,  therefore,  obey  the 
action  of  remedies  as  in  a  state  of  intermission 
or  health.  These  remedies  can  only  produce 
anxiety  and  very  distressing  pains,  without  being- 
able  to  excite  any  discharge  from  the  constrict- 
ed vessels  of  the  viscera. 

It  must  be  confessed,  however,  that  even  un- 
der such  circumstances,  emetics  do  sometimes 
succeed.     Vomiting,  says  Riverius,  excited  at 


197 

the  commencement  of  a  paroxysm  renders  it 
milder  and  shorter.  There  was  lately  an  Eng- 
lish physician,  who,  during  a  practice  of  twenty 
years  continuance,  was  in  the  habit  of  giving  an 
emetic  at  the  commencement  of  the  cold  fit.  In 
case  excessive  tremors  forbade  this,  he  usually 
administered  it  at  the  commencement  of  the  hot 
fit.  Somewhat  similar  to  this  was  the  practice 
of  Asclepiades.  Celsus  more  judiciously  exhi- 
bited only  tepid  water  slightly  impregnated  with 
salt,  for  the  purpose  of  exciting  vomiting.  Not- 
withstanding these  circumstances,  any  inverted 
action  of  the  stomach,  unless  produced  by  warm 
water  alone,  is  to  be  dreaded. 

Sydenham  with  more  propriety  timed  his 
emetic  so,  that  its  operation  might  be  terminated 
previously  to  the  access  of  the  paroxysm.  So 
far  was  he  from  believing  that  a  tumult  excited 
in  the  viscera  at  the  beginning  of  the  fever  could 
be  beneficial,  that  he  recommended  to  his  pa- 
tients a  gentle  anodyne  after  the  operation  of 
the  emetic,  and  immediately  before  the  attack  of 
the  paroxysm.  Both,  however,  had  better  be 
omitted. 

Some  practitioners  have,  with  equal  indiscre- 
tion, administered  purgatives  during  the  cold 
stage,  or,  what  is  still  hurtful,  at  the  very  com- 
mencement of  the  hot  stage.     They  did  not,  or 


198 

Would  not  see,  that  when  the  system  is  constrict- 
ed in  every  part  with  cold,  or  agitated  by  heat 
and  motion,  the  bowels  cannot  well  be  opened, 
and  that  the  application  of  irritants  must  excite 
the  greatest  commotions.  '  Those  physicians 
have  acted  with  more  prudence  and  discretion, 
who  have  exhibited  such  medicines  previously 
to  the  commencement  of  the  paroxysm.  In- 
stead of  four  hours  before  this  commencement, 
as  some  writers  direct,  the  purgative  medicine 
should  be  given  six  or  eight  hours  before  it. 
This  is  the  way  to  render  it  useful,  as  appears 
from  various  examples.  Some  physicians  have 
known  the  disease  to  be  removed  by  administer- 
ing cornachinus  in  powder,  a  certain  time  pre- 
viously to  the  paroxysm. 

So  averse  have  the  more  skilful  physicians 
been  from  the  use  of  purgatives,  in  the  cold  stage 
of  fever,  that  they  have,  on  the  other  hand,  used 
remedies  of  a  heating  nature.  Some  of  these 
have  given  three,  six,  and  even  twelve  grains  of 
pepper  :  others  have  had  recourse  to  theriaca, 
and  assert  that  by  these  means  the  fever  was  re- 
moved. Others  again  have  prescribed  heating 
substances  and  febrifuges  combined,  and  that 
with  the  same  degree  of  success.  Nor,  indeed, 
does  this  practice  appear,  at  first  sight,  so  con- 
trary to  reason  as  does  the  use  of  purgatives  and 
emetics  during  the  cold  stage.  When  the  whole 


199 

system  is  affected  with  cold  and  shivering,  heat- 
ing substances  would  seem  rather  useful;  but 
they  are,  notwithstanding,  to  be  rejected.  They 
generally  augment  the  violence  of  the  fever.  If, 
however,  the  vital  principle  seem  to  flag,  and 
the  violence  of  the  cold  stage  be  extreme,  it  is 
admissible  to  have  recourse  to  some  gentle 
cordials. 

I  The  body,  therefore,  is  not  only  not  to  be  purg- 
ed, nor  stimulated  by  heating  medicines,  during 
the  cold  stage  of  fever;  but,  on  the  other  hand,  it 
ought  not  to  be  disturbed  at  all ;  tepid  water 
alone,  or  mixed  with  some  gentle  cardiac  should 
be  taken  in.  Nor  ought  the  system  to  be  in  any 
measure  agitated,  during  the  succeeding  hot  fit. 
All  heating  substances  and  purgatives  will  be 
hurtful.  Acid,  or  acescent  drinks  are  better 
calculated  for  moderating  the  febrile  heat.  Even 
water  alone  will  suffice,  particularly  when  the 
sweat  begins  to  flow.  Thus,  the  fluid  which 
passes  off  by  the  skin,  is  restored  by  the  mouth, 
and  the  grosser  humours  are  sufficiently  diluted. 
That  the  aqueous  drinks,  however,  may  be  the 
better  mixed  with  the  blood,  let  some  syrup  be 
added,  such  as  syrup  of  violets,  syrup  of  cit- 
ron-peel, or  let  some  Rhenish  wine*   be  given 

*  The  propriety  of  adding  wine,  or  any  oilier  highly  stimulating 
liquid  to  the  drinks  of  patients  in  the  sweating  stage  of  intermitting 
fever,  is,  at  best,  problematical.     I  ought  rather  to  have  said,  that 


200 

to  prevent  the  sick  from  being  too  much  ex- 
hausted. In  this  way  will  the  sweats  be  pro- 
perly regulated;  for  if  they  be  too  profuse, 
they  will  prove  hurtful;  the  fever  will  become 
worse,  and  may  even  assume  a  continued  form. 

As  to  aperients,  it  is  scarcely  necessary  to 
give  any  directions  respecting  their  use.  Pro- 
vided they  be  lenient,  they  may  be  given  at  any 
time.  Vegetable  ptisans  holding  nitre  in  solu- 
tion, and  lemonade,  are  highly  useful  during  the 
continuance  of  the  fever ;  so,  likewise,  are  weak 
infusions  of  borage,  bugloss,  and  other  bever- 
ages of  the  kind.  But  those  articles  which  arc 
possessed  of  much  activity,  and  which  are  in- 
tended for  the  removal  of  obstructions,  ought 
not  to  be  used  before  the  termination  of  the  pa- 
roxysm ;  indeed  their  exhibition  must  even  be 
deferred  till  the  primas  viae  be  cleansed  by 
emetics  or  purgatives.  This  precept  ought  to 
be  attended  to,  at  least  in  the  commencement  of 
fevers.  But  when  they  are  of  long  standing,  or 
when  the  sick  have  relapsed  into  them,  as  their 
character  is  changed,  a  change  must  also  take 
place  in  the  method  of  exhibiting  the  remedies. 
But  this  subject  will  be  considered  in  a  subser 
quent  chapter. 

the  practice  is  hazardms  and  should  not  be  adopted.  On  such  oc- 
casions, mild,  diluting  drinks  are  all  that  are,  in  general,  either  ne- 
cessary or  admissible Trans. 


CHAP.    VIII. 


Of  the  various  methods  of curing  fevers ,  and  first,  of 
the  cure  by  means  of  sudor  ifics. 


ALTHOUGH  the  remedies  already  men- 
tioned, possess  great  power,  they  only  pave  the 
way  for  a  cure.  We  pass  on,  therefore,  to  the 
consideration  of  others,  which  have  a  more  par- 
ticular or  specific  relation  to  intermitting  fever. 
There  are  two  methods  in  which  the  cure  of  this 
disease  may  be  attempted.  The  first  consists  in 
endeavouring  to  prevent  the  occurrence  of  the 
cold  fit  by  mild  sudor  ifics.  To  enable  the 
reader  to  judge  the  more  correctly  of  these  re- 
medies, or  their  effects,  we  will  premise  a  few 
remarks,  founded  on  observation  and  experi- 
ence. 

Previously  to  the  sick  being  seized  by  the 
cold  fit,  half  an  hour  for  instance  before  the  im- 

DCI 


202 

mediate  attack,  all  the  functions  of  the  system  go 
on,  at  times,  without  any  disorder.  The  patient 
does  not  seem  to  be  at  all  infected  by  a  febrile 
poison  ;  nor  does  he  experience  any  sensation 
to  warn  him  of  the  approaching  paroxysm.  To 
produce  the  paroxysm,  then,  the  poison  must 
burst  into  a  blaze,  as  if  fire  were  applied  to  it. 
But  cannot  this  flame  be  prevented,  or,  which 
amounts  to  the  same  thing,  while  the  poison  is 
yet  inactive,  can  it  not  be  smothered  so  as  to 
prevent  it  from  breaking  out  in  the  form  of  a 
cold  fit  or  fever  ? 

Such  a  project  certainly  does  not  appear  un- 
reasonable. On  the  other  hand  it  seems  highly 
probable,  that  if  a  sweat  be  excited  before  the  at- 
tack of  the  cold  fit,  it  will  be  entirely  prevented. 
But,  in  case  of  its  prevention,  there  will  be  no 
congestion  or  stagnation  in  the  liver,  the  auricles 
of  the  heart,  or  the  lungs.  Besides,  it  would 
seem  that  part,  at  least,  of  the  febrile  poison  may 
be  dissipated.  Thus,  if  the  skin  be  constricted, 
the  more  gross  fluids  are  accumulated  in  its  ves- 
sels and  excretory  tubes;  if  in  this  state  of  things, 
a  very  copious  sweat  breaks  out,  the  obstruc- 
tion will  be  removed  through  the  cutaneous 
pores.  But  the  same  thing  will  occur  with  re- 
spect to  the  state  of  the  viscera,  when  a  febrile 
paroxysm  is  impending.     Therefore  the  febrile 


203 

cause  if  not  entirely  removed,  will  be  at  least 
greatly  weakened. 

But  in  medicine,  all  reasoning  is  uncertain, 
unless  confirmed  by  experience.  Even  experi- 
ence itself,  teaches  us  many  things  that  do  not 
precisely  accord  with  what  is  here  laid  down.  It 
is  certain,  indeed,  as  already  mentioned,  that 
those  sweats  which  follow  the  paroxysms  do  not 
always  check  the  febrile  action.  Yet  those  fe- 
vers where  no  sweats  occur,  generally  continue 
longer,  and  rage  with  more  violence.  Those 
physicians,  however,  who,  with  a  view  to  pre- 
vent a  paroxysm,  endeavour  to  force  a  sweat  by 
great  external  heat,  or  who  administer  for  the 
same  purpose  a  heating  decoction  of  guaia- 
cum  or  sassafras,  generally  render  the  disease 
worse. 

From  these  considerations,  however,  no  well 
founded  arguments  can  be  drawn  against  all 
kinds  of  sweats.  Those  sweats,  for  instance, 
which  succeed  the  paroxysms  are  morbid,  or 
constitute  in  reality,  a  part  of  the  disease;  for 
they  frequently  occur  while  the  bowels  are  still 
parched  with  the  febrile  heat.  It  is,  therefore, 
in  intermitting  fever,  as  it  is  in  eruptive  fevers; 
sweats  oftentimes  flow  copiously  without  afford- 
ing any  material  relief  to  the  sick.  In  both 
cases,  the  more  fluid  parts  are  thrown  on  the 


204 

surface  of  the  body  by  the  febrile  action,  while 
the  fomes  of  the  disease  still  remains  within. 

With  respect  to  sweats  excited  by  too  much 
external  heat,  or  by  the  force  of  heating  reme- 
dies, they  are  wholly  unfavourable  to  the  cure 
of  fevers.  Thus,  the  stimulus  of  guaiacum  is 
too  acrid,  and  excites  by  far  too  great  a  degree 
of  heat  in  the  bowels.  So  hurtful,  at  times,  are 
the  effects  of  that  medicine,  that  I  have  seen 
cases  of  jaundice  produced  by  it.  But  whatever 
thus  disorders  the  functions  of  the  viscera,  even 
although  it  produce  the  most  copious  sweats, 
cannot  be  a  remedy  for  fever.  Let  it  be  laid 
down  then,  as  a  principle,  in  the  cure  of  fevers, 
that  the  body  must  not  be  overheated.  The 
force  of  the  disease  is  necessarily  increased,  if 
the  heat  in  the  viscera  be  increased. 

Those  sweats,  therefore,  are  most  beneficial 
which  are  not  forced  from  unwilling  nature,  but 
which  flow  at  the  proper  time  and  in  a  gentle 
manner.  To  procure  such  sweats,  the  follow- 
ing circumstances  must  be  attended  to.  First, 
too  much  heat  must  not  be  excited  :  Secondly, 
aperients  should  be  always  mixed  with  sudori- 
fics  :  Thirdly,  in  certain  affections  of  the  liver, 
or  of  the  other  viscera,  they  must  not  be  exhibit- 
ed any  more  than  they  must  in  the  highest  suite 
of  cachexy  :    Fourthly,  and  lastly,  where  there 


205 

is  a  turgid  state  of  the  blood-vessels,  or  when 
the  stomach  is  loaded  with  vitiated  humours,  a 
cure  by  means  of  sweating  must  not  be  at- 
tempted. 

These  things  being  attended  to,  and  the  ne- 
cessary general  remedies  being  premised,  that 
method  will  be  most  salutary  and  safe,  which 
attempts  the  cure  of  intermittents  by  sudorifics. 
Yet  these  remedies  will  be  more  useful  in  the 
beginning  than  in  an  advanced  stage  of  those 
diseases. 


CHAP.  IX. 


Of  the  mode  of  exhibiting  sudor ifics  in  the  cure  of 
fevers. 


AFTER  having  premised  the  foregoing  ge- 
neral rules,  it  would  seem  scarcely  requisite  to 
give  any  particular  directions  on  the  subject. 
But  to  close  up  every  avenue  throughvvhich  error 
might  find  an  entrance,  we  will  specify  the  time 
most  suitable  for  these  remedies  ;  we  will  then 
point  out  the  remedies  to  be  selected  as  most 
useful ;  and,  lastly,  describe  the  method  to 
be  observed  in  their  exhibition.  After  hav- 
ing gone  through  these  several  heads,  we  will 
endeavour  to  make  it  appear  how  far  this  method 
of  cure  is  to  be  relied  on. 

As  to  the  time,  the  patient  must  be  allowed 
a  sufficient  degree  of  rest  to  refresh  his  system, 
agitated  by  the  fever  and  debilitated  by  the  pro- 
fuse sweat.     But  as  soon  as  practicable,  it  will 


207 

be  proper  to  have  recourse  to  the  sweating  plan. 
Yet  experience  has  oftentimes  taught  me  that  it 
will  be  sufficient  to  prevent  the  cold  fit,  if  the 
medicine  be  exhibited  three  or  four  hours  be- 
fore its  access  :  but  if  given  at  a  later  period,  it 
will  be  either  useless  or  very  nearly  so  :  the  hu- 
mours of  the  body  cannot  then  become  suffici- 
ently impregnated  with  it,  and  they  consequent- 
ly, will  not  be  prepared  to  pass  off  by  the  pores 
of  the  skin. 

Those  remedies  which  appear  to  me  to  ac- 
complish the  object  in  view  most  safely  and 
certainly,  are  certain  medical  substances,  endu- 
ed with  penetrating  yet  mild  qualities.  The 
principal  of  these  are  sarsaparilla,  burdock,  bit- 
ter-sweet, and  male  speedwell,  all  of  them  ape- 
rient remedies.  I  am  well  persuaded  that  other 
remedies  would  effect  the  same  purpose,  but  I 
am  here  laying  before  the  reader  the  result  of  my 
own  experience  only.  I  do  not  consider  it  ne- 
cessary that  all  these  articles  should  be  prescribed 
at  the  same  time ;  I  have  sometimes  exhibited 
one  or  another  of  them  singly,  with  great  advan- 
tage, and  that  in  the  cases  of  many  sick  persons. 
I  will  adduce  one  very  memorable  example  in 
confirmation  of  this. 

An  old  man,  aged  eighty,  had  experienced 
two  paroxysms  of  a  quartan  fever.     So  violent 


208 

had  the  cold  fit  been,  that  he  was  threatened  with 
certain  death  in  case  of  another  attack  similar  to 
the  two  former  ones.  Deeply  affected  at  this 
melancholy  prospect,  I  prefered  a  sudorific  me- 
dicine to  all  others.  I  therefore  exhibited  a  de- 
coction of  sarsaparilla  and  burdock  with  sal 
ammoniac.  By  this  remedy  the  cold  fit  and 
paroxysm  were  prevented,  nor  did  any  vestige 
of  the  fever  remain  behind.  Perhaps  this  cure 
might,  by  some,  be  attributed  to  the  sal  ammo- 
niac. But  the  decoction  has  at  other  times  suc- 
ceeded equally  well  with  me,  without  the  addition 
of  that  salt. 

In  the  mean  time  the  mode  of  administering 
this  remedy,  may  contribute  much  to  its  force 
and  efficacy.  The  decoction  must  be  drank 
not  sparingly,  but  in  large  quantities.  Five  or 
six  pounds  of  it,  for  instance,  ought  to  be  used 
on  every  day  of  intermission,  with  this  precau- 
tion, that  previously  to  the  time  of  the  occurrence 
of  the  fever,  the  patient  compose  himself  in  bed. 
These  previous  steps  being  taken,  the  sweat 
will  be  brought  on  the  more  readily,  if  the  plen- 
tiful use  of  the  diaphoretic  decoction  be  still  con- 
tinued. Nor  must  this  remedy  be  laid  aside, 
even  when  the  body  begins  to  be  covered  with 
moisture,  but  should  be  persevered  for  several 
hours. 


209 

However  Wife  this  administration  of  sudori- 
fics may  appear,  I  \\i\\  v  been  sometimes  appre- 
hensive of  exciting  too  much  heat  by  it.  To 
prevent  this,  it  appears  advisable  to  prescribe, 
immediately  after  the  remission  of  the  fever,  a 
warm  infusion  of  borage  or  bugloss,  which  will 
be  rendered  the  more  cooling  by  the  addition  of 
a  moderate  dose  of  nitre. 

What  has  established  in  my  mind  the  utility 
of  this  mode  of  exciting  a  sweat,  is  a  common 
and  therefore  a  valuable  remedy,  of  which  I  have 
had  some  experience.  When  I  have  been  desi- 
rous of  employing  more  lenient  sudorifics,  I 
have  tried  the  efficacy  of  warm  water.  I  have 
directed,  for  instance,  a  large  quantity  of  this  to 
be  drunk  a  few  hours  before  the  paroxysm.  Con- 
trary, in  some  measure,  to  what  I  was  prepared 
to  expect,  the  cold  fit  was  prevented  as  if  by  a 
charm.  This  result  I  have  witnessed  not  only 
once,  but  frequently,  nor  indeed  have  repeated 
experiments  which  I  have  made,  left  in  my  mind 
any  doubt  as  to  its  reality. 

But  whatever   may  be    thought  respecting 

these  particular  medicines,  it  is  certain  that  the 

method  of  removing  intermittent  by  sudorifics, 

is  in  various  cases  absolutely  necessary.      This 

method  must  be  had  recourse  to,  if  the  cold  fit  be 

violent,  and  dangerous  ;   indeed  there  is  no  other 

e  e 


210 

way  in  which  the  cold  fit  can  be  counteracted.  I 
would  not,  however,  assert  that  this  method 
eradicates  the  fever  so  perfectly,  as  to  render  it 
unnecessary  to  have  recourse  to  any  other  reme- 
dies to  complete  and  confirm  the  cure.  Perhaps 
the  effects  of  the  febrile  poison  are  only  kept 
down  by  sudorifics,  while  the  poison  itself  still 
lurks  in  the  system,  and  silently  pervades  all  its 
parts.  Those  who  have  been  relieved  from  in- 
intermitting  fevers,  cannot,  therefore,  be  per- 
fectly safe,  unless  the  poison  has  been  thoroughly 
eradicated  by  specifics  :  this,  at  least,  is  in  ge- 
neral the  case. 


CHAP.   X. 


Of  attempting  the  cure  of  fevers  by  specific  medicines  : 
and  first,  an  inquiry  what  these  specifics  are,  and 
whether  or  not,  any  emetics  or  cathartics  are  to  be 
considered  as  such. 


THERE  is,  therefore,  a  more  safe  and  cer- 
tain method  for  the  removal  of  fevers,  namely, 
that  which  consists  in  curing  them  by  peculiar, 
appropriate,  or  specific  remedies.  Medicines 
of  this  kind,  have  been  earnestly  sought  for  in 
every  age,  and  many  practitioners  have  suffered 
themselves  to  be  persuaded,  that  such  were  actu- 
ally found,  when  in  fact  they  were  still  wanting. 
Physicians,  however,  left  nothing  untried  in  this 
inquiry.  We  have  already  treated  of  emetics 
and  purgatives  :  in  these  remedies  certain  phy- 
sicians, and  those  not  of  inferior  reputation,  have 
reposed  unlimited  confidence.  Some  select  me- 
dicines of  this  class  have  even  been  vended  about 
as  secret  nostrums. 


212 

We  have  already  said,  that  emetics  and  pur- 
gatives do  much  towards  the  cure  of  intermit- 
tents,  but  that  they  do  this  only  by  paving  the 
way  for  other  remedies.     Since,  indeed,  such  is 
the  nature  of  intermitting  fevers,  that  they  may 
sometimes  be  removed  by  a  shock,  or  a  sudden 
change  in  the  natural  movements  of  the  system, 
it  may  so  happen,  that  they  may  be  cured  by  the 
action  of  emetics  or  purgatives.     Besides,  such 
may  be  the  state  of  the  body,  that,  after  the  eva- 
cuation of  the  stomach  and  intestines,  the  func- 
tions of  the  several  parts  may  be  restored  to 
health.     Finally,  the  febrile  poison  may  be  eli- 
minated by  a  kind  of  crisis,  and,  as  it -were,  by 
a  single  exertion.     But  this  success  is  only  ac- 
cidental.    These  are  not  the  proper  remedies  for 
intermittents,  nor  are  they  calculated  to  over- 
come the  febrile  cause  of  themselves. 

But  although  these  remarks  are  true  in  eene- 


t) 


g< 


ral,  I  would  not  have  them  considered  as  ap- 
plicable to  all  medicines  of  the  kind.  There  may 
be  in  some  medical  articles  which  excite  vomit- 
ing and  purging  a  power  peculiarly  febrifuge. 
No  doubt  but  this  may  be  the  case  with  respect 
to  Riverius's  remedy  for  quartans.  The  precise 
nature  of  that  preparation  is  not  known,  but 
•it  appears  to  contain  both  mercury  and  antimo. 
riy  in  its  composition. 


213 

I  am  also  acquainted  with  a  vegetable  sub- 
stance of  a  purgative  nature,  long  celebrated  in 
this  country  as  a  febrifuge,  and  which  is  even 
purchased  up  at  a  considerable  price.  It  is  the 
cuticle  or  external  covering  of  the  sea-lettuce. 
This,  when  dried  before  a  gentle  fire,  and  re- 
duced to  a  powder,  is  exhibited  in  doses  of  a 
scruple,  and  continued  in  this  manner  for  seve- 
ral successive  days.  Some  practitioners  have 
prefered  giving  it  infused  in  niuk. 

There   is  another  milder  purgative,   which 
was  formcly  a  secret  nostrum,   namely,    cream 
of  tartar,  exhibited  frequently   in  doses  of  an 
ounce.     This  article  is  at  once  cooling,  purga- 
tive, and  antiseptic  ;   whence  in  the  commence- 
ment of  fevers,  it  appears  to  me  to  be  a  remedy 
not  to  be  slighted.    The  same  thing  may  be  said 
of  the   nostrum    of   Mynsichtus,*    which   has 
oftentimes  cured  intermittents  when  other  reme- 
dies had  failed.     I  have  myself  prescribed  that 
remedy  sometimes  with  the  happiest  effects.    It 
is  cooling,  purgative,  and  aperient,  and  is  pe- 
culiarly  calculated  for  correcting  bile,   and  re- 
moving hepatic  obstructions.      Hence  it  is  en- 
titled to   a   respectable    rank  among   febrifuge 
remedies. 


*  The  formula  of  this  nortfUlB  i->  not  inen*iom\i  by  our  tfuthov, 

Trans. 


214 

Equally  to  be  esteemed  is  the  febrifuge  of 
Riverius,  which  is  composed  of  vegetable  alkali 
and  sulphuric  acid.  From  the  union  of  these 
two  articles  arises  a  salt*  not  dissimilar  to  that 
which  constitutes  the  foregoing  nostrum  of  Myn- 
sichtus,  as  appears  from  a  chemical  examination 
of  it.  But  I  have  ascribed  very  different  virtues 
to  magnesia  alba,  which  some  practitioners  use 
as  a  febrifuge.  This,  however,  is  not  always 
alike  efficacious.  It  is  sometimes,  however, 
when  mixed  with  cream  of  tartar,  prescribed 
with  happy  effects.  I  once  knew  a  physician 
who  used  an  infusion  of  it  in  wine  as  a  purga- 
tive. 

But  although  remedies  of  this  kind  do  at 
times  much  good,  we  must  not  in  most  inter- 
mittents  trust  to  them  alone.  They  very  fre- 
quently disappoint  us,  or  produce  only  a  tem- 
porary suspension  of  the  disease.  It  is  of  great 
importance,  however,  to  be  acquainted  with 
them,  in  order  that  they  may  be  joined  with  ac- 
tive febrifuges,  or  substituted  occasionally  in 
place  of  them.  There  are  certain  temperaments, 
and  certain  irregular  fevers,  to  which  remedies 
of  this  kind  are  best  suited.  The  physician, 
therefore,  must  be  supplied  with  such  a  stock 
of  remedies,  as  will  enable  him  to  accommodate 
his  practice  to  different  cases. 

*  Sulphate  of  poUish. 


CHAP.     XI. 


Whether  or  not  a  true  febrifuge  power  reside  in  certain 
sudor  if  its,  bitters,  aperients,  and  other  remedies. 


WE  have  already  treated  of  sudorifics  and 
the  mode  of  administering  them.  These  cannot 
be  considered  as  true  febrifuge  remedies,  if 
they  only  excite  sweat.  To  deserve  to  be  ac- 
counted antidotes  to  intermitting  fever,  it  is  ne- 
cessary that  they  should  possess  a  certain  peculiar 
or  specific  power.  In  theriaca  no  such  power 
resides,  although  it  was  attributed  to  it  by  the 
ancients.  How  far  such  a  remedy  is  to  be  trust- 
ed, appears  from  Galen  himself.  That  writer 
remarks,  that  by  the  exhibition  of  it,  a  simple 
quartan  was  converted  into  a  double  and  even  a 
triple  one.  He  mentions  the  same  thing  as  hav- 
ing happened  to  Eudemus  the  philosopher.  It 
is  to  be  lamented  that  encomiums  are  frequently 
bestowed  on  medicines  of  this  description,  which 
are  not  only  useless,  but  even  hurtful. 


216 

Physicians  have  had  recourse  to  other  reme- 
dies, better  calculated  for  the  cure  of  fevers 
Even  the  ancients  themselves,  suspected  the 
existence  of  a  febrifuge  power  in  bitters.  They 
therefore,  made  trial  of  gentian,  germander,  the 
lesser  centaury,  and  a  species  of  trefoil,  and  that 
oftentimes  with  happy  effects.  They  have  spoken 
highly  of  the  lesser  centaury  in  particular ;  but  I 
have  observed  it  to  excite  very  great  heat,  and 
not  unfrequently  to  increase  the  violence  of  the 
fever.  Yet  it  cannot  be  denied,  but  that,  when 
added  to  the  peruvian  bark,  it  has  been  some- 
times of  great  service  ;  for  it  has  subdued  fevers 
which  had  resisted  other  remedies.  It  is  said, 
that  if  the  system  being  first  properly  prepared 
for  it,  a  decoction  of  it  be  given  combined  with 
laudanum,  it  will  be  productive  of  still  better 
effects.  The  same  thing  is  said  respecting  an 
infusion  of  the  flowers  of  broom. 

Respecting  other  bitters,  I  can  say  nothing. 
Their  effects  are  uncertain,  sometimes  even  hurt- 
ful. Thus  gentian  is  not  undeservedly  blamed 
on  this  score,  in 'as  much  as  its  bitterness  is 
acrid,  and  apt  to  excite  heat.  What  appears  no 
less  foreign  from  the  cure  of  fever,  many  of  them 
have  astringent  as  well  as  febrifuge  properties. 
Some  practitioners  have  exhibited  alum,  others 
plantain  and  cinquefoil.  Alum  certainly  pos- 
sesses some  degree  of  anti- febrile  power;    for 


217 

patients  have  taken  it  dissolved  in  water  with 
advantage.  Many  have  declared  plantain  to  be 
possessed  of  the  same  power,  and  have  exhibit- 
ed it  either  immediately  before,  or  about  two 
hours  before,  the  accession  of  the  paroxysm.  I 
have  indeed  known  obstinate  fevers  removed  by 
a  beverage  in  which  the  leaves  of  this  herb  had 
been  boiled.  Cinquefoil  has  in  the  mean  time 
succeeded  still  better,  as  also  the  bark  of  the 
root  of  the  wild  plum-tree.  Still,  however, 
these  remedies  ought  not  in  my  opinion  to  be 
often  used ;  for  when  they  constrict  parts  that 
contain  the  febrile  poison,  it  is  apt  to  remain  in 
them  at  a  greater  depth,  and  with  more  per- 
manence. 

With  more  justice  are  praises  bestowed 
on  certain  articles  possessed  of  a  penetrating 
power,  such  as  aperients,  and  saponaceous  sub- 
stances. Among  these,  burdock  holds  a  con- 
spicuous place,  while  it  is  at  the  same  time  a 
sudorific.  By  this  remedy  Henry  III.  king  of 
France,  is  said  to  have  been  cured  of  a  quartan 
fever.  Many  other  similar  instances  are  men- 
tioned, The  herb,  speedwell,  possesses  the 
same  power  in  an  equal  degree,  according  to 
Cesalpinus,  who  was  a  most  able  and  accurate 
judge  of  these  things.  Finally,  of  the  same  effi- 
cacy and  value  is  the  juice  of  the  rape-root, 
which  is  so  highly  extolled  bv  Crato.   Notwith- 

Ff 


standing  what  has  been  said,  daily  experience 
teaches  us  that  we  must  not  rely  on  these  reme- 
dies, as  true  febrifuges.  Although  they  have 
cured  some,  they  have  failed  in  the  cure  of  many 
more. 

It  appears  to  me  that  more  confidence  is  to 
be  placed  in  the  aperient  salts,  of  which  we  have 
already  treated,  or  in  the  febrifuge  salt  of  Sylvius, 
to  which  physicians,  and  even  the  author  him- 
self, have  given  a  higher  character  than  it  de- 
serves. Purging  salts,  have,  indeed,  at  the  same 
time  a  febrifuge  power,  but  this  power  does  not 
always  act  with  certainty  ;  to  these,  therefore,  sal 
ammoniac  is  to  be  greatly  preferred.  This  reme- 
dy, indeed,  possesses  great  efficacy  in  the  remov- 
al of  fevers  which  are  even  highly  obstinate. 
Hence,  at  times,  when  other  remedies  prove  in- 
effectual, we  are  forced  to  have  recourse  to  that 
salt. 

Finally,  the  effects  of  the  salts  of  Tachenius 
must  be  referred  to  an  aperient  and  penetrat- 
ing power.  The  virtues  of  the  plants  from  which 
they  are  extracted  cannot  still  remain  in  them ; 
for  their  principles  are  changed  by  the  action  of 
the  fire.  They  are  partly  alkalescent,  and  con- 
tain also  a  portion  of  thick  oil;  whence,  being 
of  a  saponaceous  nature,  they  are  extremely 
well  calculated  for  the  removal  of  obstructions. 


219 

But  it  is  not  alkaline  salts  alone,  certain 
earths  also  possess  qualities  calculated  for  the  re- 
moval of  intermitting  fever.  Thus,  burnt  egg- 
shells are  exhibited  with  happy  effects  in  that 
disease.  The  truth  of  this  is  established  by 
many  experiments  detailed  in  medical  writings. 
To  these  earths  vegetable  alkali  is  sometimes 
added,  and  I  once  knew  a  physician  who  used 
a  mixture  of  these  two  articles  with  very  flatter- 
ing success.  These  earths  first  calcined  and 
then  mixed  with  salt  of  tartar,  have  been  used 
by  Riverius  in  various  cases  of  disease.  The 
mixture  was  usually  dissolved  in  simple  water, 
and  given  to  the  sick  in  solution.  I  have,  my- 
self, sometimes  used  this  remedy  with  success 
in  obstinate  quartans.  I  would  not,  however, 
recommend  it  to  general  use,  as  it  seems  to  b$ 
possessed  of  too  much  acrimony. 

There  are  other  remedies,  and  those  some- 
times of  opposite  qualities,  which  physicians  use 
in  practice,  such  as  aromatic  antiseptics,  which 
stimulate  the  system,  and  narcotics,  which  act  as 
sedatives.  Of  the  class  of  stimulants,  I  shall  treat 
of  only  two,  the  efficacy  of  which  is  worthy  of  no- 
tice. The  ancients  themselves  spoke  in  the  highest 
■terms  of  worm-wood,  which  has  been  also  used 
with  success  by  a  late  Italian  physician.  Cha- 
momile is  spoken  of  as  no  less  efficacious  by  a 
physician  of  Portugal,  and  Morton  considers  its 


220 

flowers  as  highly  useful.  But  if  these  vegetables 
do  possess  febrifuge  virtues,  a  circumstance 
which  cannot  be  denied,  it  must,  notwithstand- 
ing, be  confessed  that  they  more  frequently  dis- 
appoint our  expectations,  and  even  excite  a 
pungent  heat,  which  is  very  unfavourable  to  the 
cure  of  fevers. 

As  to  narcotics,  we  must  acknowledge  with 
Riverius,  that  they  possess  some  efficacy  in  pre- 
venting the  paroxysms  of  fevers.  Trallian  used 
opium,  which,  combined  with  castor  and  some 
other  articles,  he  exhibited  two  hours  before  the 
fit  as  a  certain  remedy.  Heurnius  recommends 
the  same,  combined  with  some  other  medicines, 
in  terms  equally  strong.  I  knew  a  physician 
who  was  in  the  habit  of  exhibiting  it  in  combina- 
tion with  camphor,  with  the  happiest  effects.  I 
have  no  doubt  but  opium  combined  with  saffron 
would  be  efficacious  in  removing  the  cause  of  fe- 
ver. Both  of  these  articles  possess  some  febri- 
fuge virtues,  besides,  that  saffron  is  gently  ape- 
rient. They  ought,  however,  to  be  taken  with 
caution. 

Finally,  that  nothing  might  be  left  untried, 
some  physicians  have  had  recourse  even  to  poi- 
sons themselves.     They  have  exhibited  arsenic, 
and  have  succeeded  with  it  in  the  removal  of 
many   intermittents.     Some   of  the   patients, 


221 

however,  thus  cured,  have  afterwards  died  of 
phthisis.  There  is  a  certain  vegetable  poison, 
namely,  the  bean  of  St.  Ignatius,  which  is  less 
deleterious.  I  was  acquainted  with  a  man  who 
was  in  the  habit  of  exhibiting  it  to  people  in  the 
country  with  the  greatest  success.  There  is  al- 
so a  remedy  used  by  great  numbers  in  this  city, 
and  that  not  without  success.  Its  efficacy  de- 
pends on  its  being  composed  in  part  of  the  bean 
of  St.  Ignatius,  an  article  which  most  people 
dread,  and  which  physicians  condemn  as  a  poi- 
son. 

Inunctions  and  external  applications  to  the 
wrists  are  more  in  use  among  the  common  peo- 
ple than  among  physicians.  Inunctions  and 
frictions  along  the  spine  were  first  instituted  to 
remove  the  sensation  of  coldness,  which  is  usu- 
ally experienced  in  that  part.  There  is  no 
doubt,  indeed,  but  the  friction  and  motion,  as 
well  as  the  power  of  the  medicine  with  which  the 
sick  are  anointed,  may  sometimes  be  of  service. 
These  remedies,  however,  are  not  to  be  confi- 
ded in,  nor  ought  their  application,  indeed,  to 
be  opposed,  in  case  any  person  believing  in  their 
efficacy,  wishes  to  use  them. 

As  to  applications  to  the  wrists,  if  any  re- 
lief be  derived  from  them,  it  is  not  to  be  con- 
sidered as  depending  on  any  power  specifically 


222 

febrifuge.  Certain  cures,  which  are  truly  sur- 
prising, are  rather  to  be  attributed  to  motion 
excited  in  the  whole  or  a  part  of  the  body  by 
the  application  of  a  stimulus.  There  are  cer- 
tain unguents,  for  instance,  which,  if  rubbed  on 
a  particular  part  of  the  body,  will  produce  erup- 
tions in  various  other  parts,  and  even  excite  mo- 
tions in  the  viscera  themselves.  The  same,  or 
something  similar  happens  in  the  use  of  epicar- 
pia,  or  applications  to  the  wrists.  If  the  ranun- 
culus of  the  meadows  be  applied  to  the  hands 
and  wrists,  heat,  pain,  and  excoriation  are  the 
consequences.  By  the  force  of  this  stimulus, 
and  the  effluvia  making  their  way  to  the  internal 
parts,  the  fever  may  be  eradicated  so  as  not  to 
revive  again. 

We  must  not,  however,  imagine  that  fevers 
can  be  removed  by  external  applications,  which 
possess  no  stimulant  power.  Although  the  ef- 
fects of  such  remedies  are  extolled  by  writers  of 
high  respectability,  they  are,  notwithstanding, 
very  doubtful.  If  there  be  any  truth  in  the 
praises  bestowed  on  them,  their  efficacy  arises 
from  the  power  of  certain  subtle  effluvia,  which 
make  their  way  into  the  internal  parts  of  the  sys- 
tem. But  let  those  persons  believe  in  the  effi- 
cacy of  such  remedies,  who  have  had  satisfactory 
proofs  of  it. 


chap.  xii. 

Of  the  cure  by  means  of  the  peruvian  bar/:. 


THE  foregoing  remedies,  not  very  certain, 
and  sometimes,  not  very  safe  in  their  operation, 
were  succeeded  by  the  peruvian  bark.  This 
divine  discovery  was  unknown  to  our  ancestors. 
Nor  did  our  own  age  come  willingly  into  the  use 
of  it.  A  few  physicians  were  its  advocates,  but 
many  suspected  it  of  some  deleterious  qualities. 
But  uniform  and  successful  experience  over- 
came at  length  their  obstinacy  and  their  fears. 

I  do  not  mean,  however,  to  insinuate,  that 
all  controversies  and  complaints  on  this  subject 
are  terminated.  There  are  countries  in  which 
this  celebrated  remedy  is  still  in  bad  repute 
Among  the  Dutch  and  the  Germans,  the  com- 
mon people  reject  it  entirely.  But  all  the  charges 
which  they  bring  against  it,  are  to  be  attributed 


224 

to  an  improper  method  of  using  it.  Among 
the  Spanish,  the  French,  and  the  English,  it  is 
no  longer  held  in  suspicion.  Its  use  is  sanction- 
ed by  general  approbation. 

So  efficacious  and  innocent  is  it,  that  among 
all  the  sick  persons  to  whom  I  have  ever  pre- 
scribed it,  I  have  heard  no  well-founded  com- 
plaints respecting  it.  It  not  only  suspends  the 
fever  for  a  time,  but,  if  the  system  be  properly 
prepared,  eradicates  it  entirely.  It  is  in  the  high- 
est degree  friendly  to  the  stomach,  promotes 
perspiration,  acts  favourably  on  the  blood  and 
nervous  system,  and  is  a  powerful  antiseptic  in 
the  prima?  viae.  But  as  the  mode  of  using  it 
ought  to  be  accommodated  to  various  tempera- 
ments, and  various  descriptions  of  fever,  there 
are  several  preparations  of  it,  with  which  it  is 
necessary  to  be  acquainted* 

Some  physicians  employ  this  medicine  in  the 
form  of  an  extract,  others  of  a  decoction,  others 
of  an  aqueous  infusion,  and  others  again  of  a  spi- 
rituous tincture. 

But  that  the  febrifuge  virtues  may  be  the  bet- 
ter extracted,  physicians  have  recourse  to  ano- 
ther menstruum  more  suitable  for  the  purpose. 
The  bark,  for  instance,  is  infused  in  some  gene- 
rous wine  for  the  space  of  twenty-four  hours,  cr 


225 

it  is  exhibited  in  powder  in  a  glass  of  that  liquid. 
In  this  latter  case  the  extract  is  made  in  the  sto- 
mach itself.  When  the  extract  is  thus  prepared, 
a\  hcther  within  or  without  the  body,  it  is  a  reme- 
dy of  a  very  active  and  penetrating  nature.  It 
differs  greatly  in  its  powers  both  from  wine  and 
spirits,  in  consequence  of  the  gummy  and  resi- 
nous principles  of  the  bitter  febrifuge  which  it 
contains. 

As  to  the  efficacy  of  the  remedy  thus  pre- 
pared, it  cannot  be  denied  that  it  has  been  beni- 
ficial  to  many.  I  can,  myself,  from  experience, 
bear  witness  to  its  activity;  but  its  strength  and 
utility  are  increased,  by  adding  to  it  some  spirits 
of  wine  ;  whence  it  would  appear  that  the  febri- 
fuge virtue  of  the  bark  resides  principally  in  its 
resinous. part ;  for  it  is  best  extracted  by  a  spiri- 
tuous menstruum.  A  remedy  so  heating  as  this 
preparation  is,  ought,  however,  to  be  given  with 
caution,  else  it  may  at  times  prove  hurtful. 

When  the  bark  alone  in  whatever  way  it  may 
be  administered,  appears  to  be  insufficient  to 
remove  certain  intermittents,  physicians  have 
added  many  things  to  it  as  auxiliaries.  Some,  to 
increase  its  efficacy,  have  mixed  aromatics  with 
it,  such  as  Virginian  snake-root:  others,  for  the 
same  purpose,  have  added  certain  febrifuge  me- 
dicines   to    it,    particularly  bitters  :    many  have 


226 

joined  aperients  with  it,  that  it  might  thus  gain 
access  the  more  readily  to  the  internal  recesses 
of  the  system:  finally,  a  very  considerable  num- 
ber have,  for  the  accomplishment  of  the  same 
end,  called  to  its  aid  certain  salts  which  are  pos- 
sessed of  a  searching  or  penetrating  power,  such 
as  salt  of  wormwood,  and  sal  ammoniac,  the 
latter  of  which  is  itself,  as  we  have  already  men- 
tioned, highly  useful  in  obstinate  intermittents. 

Of  all  these  and  many  other  remedies  it  is 
not  my  intention  to  treat  at  large.  I  shall,  ne- 
vertheless speak  of  two  or  three  of  them,  which 
are  certainly  capable  of  being  highly  useful.  If, 
in  some  obstinate  cases  of  intermittents,  the 
lesser  centaury  be  added  to  the  peruvian  bark, 
it  may  prove  a  very  efficacious  remedy.  It  ap- 
pears that  the  flesh  of  the  viper  dried,  reduced  to 
powder,  and  exhibited  with  the  bark,  has  been 
equally  effectual.  By  these  mixed  remedies  many 
persons  have  been  relieved  from  intermittents, 
after  having  tried  all  other  medicines  in  vain. 
But  the  following  remedy  which  is  purchased 
at  a  very  considerable  price,  seems  to  contain 
the  virtues  of  both  the  foregoing  :    viz.  Take, 

Of  peruvian  bark,  two  drachms. 

Of  millipedes,  powdered,  one  drachm. 

Of  lesser  centaury,  do  one  drachm. 

Let  this  mixture  be  infused  in  eight  ounces 
of  generous  wine,  and  given  to  the  patient  in 


227 

bed.     At  other  times  the  powders  are  given  in 
honey  in  the  form  of  an  electuary. 

But  very  often  the  primae  viae  are  loaded 
with  vitiated  humours,  which  may  serve  to  keep 
up  the  fever.  Purgatives  are,  therefore,  in  par- 
ticular, added  to  the  bark.  The  bark  itself,  in- 
deed, purges  many  persons,  but,  a  circumstance 
which  is  peculiar  to  it,  it  considerably  increases 
the  action  of  other  purgatives;  hence  small  doses 
of  them  only  need  be  added  to  this  febrifuge.  By 
some  physicians  a  species  of  the  lily,  and  also 
the  agaric  have  been  used  as  remedies.  The 
latter  article  enters  into  the  composition  of  one 
of  our  nostrums,  which  proves  oftentimes  effi- 
cacious. I  have,  myself,  known  it  to  be  exhibit- 
ed with  advantage,  to  many  people  in  the  coun- 
try. This  remedy,  however,  should  be  admini- 
stered with  great  caution,  on  account  of  the  heat 
or  feverish  action,  which  is  apt  to  be  excited  by 
the  irritating  quality  of  the  agaric.  Persons  of 
tender  and  irritable  viscera  ought  to  reject  it  al- 
together. 

Some  physicians  are  in  the  habit  of  exhibit- 
ing peruvian  bark,  mixed  with  stronger  purga- 
tives, such  as  puhis  cornachini,  or  jalap  ;  nor 
can  it,  indeed,  be  denied,  that  this  composi- 
tion has  been  sometimes  found  useful.  It  is, 
in  general,  however,  better  to  give  the  bark  in 


228 

combination  with  such  closes  of  arcanum  dupli- 
catum,  or  vitriolated  tartar,  as  may  serve  to  keep 
the  bowels  moderately  open.  I  have  been  in  the 
habit  of  administering  the  pulvis  Stablii  in  com- 
bination with  the  bark  with  singular  advantage. 

But  my  favourite  remedy  is,  a  febrifuge  and 
purgative  decoction  prepared  in  the  following 
manner.  Take  of  peruvian  bark,  coarsely  pow- 
dered, an  ounce,  or  an  ounce  and  an  half;  boil 
it  in  two  pounds  and  an  half  of  water  to  two 
pounds  ;  towards  the  end  of  the  process,  add  of 
the  leaves  of  senna,  half  a  drachm,  and  of  the 
leaves  of  the  borage  and  bugloss,  of  each,  half  a 
handful.  Instead  of  the  senna,  I  oftentimes  use 
some  purgative  and  aperient  salt,  such  as  epsom 
salt,  or  sal  polychrest,  to  the  amount  of  four 
drachms.  This  preparation,  consisting  as  it 
does,  of  purgative,  cooling,  aperient,  and  febri- 
fuge articles,  is  calculated  to  answer  every  indi- 
cation that  can  occur  in  the  treatment  of  com- 
mon intermittents. 


CHAP.     XIII. 


Of  injurious  effects  produced  by  the  peruvian  bark. 


BY  the  mixture  of  all  these  articles  with  the 
peruvian  bark,  its  efficacy  has  appeared  to  some 
physicians  to  be  diminishedrather  than  increased. 
By  the  bark  alone,  say  these  characters,  vast 
numbers  have  been  and  still  are  cured.  There 
are  places  in  which  intermittents  are  endemic  ; 
yet  most  persons  who  are  attacked  by  them,  use 
scarcely  any  thing  for  their  removal,  but  the 
bark  alone.  Nor,  if  we  may  give  credit  to  re- 
port on  the  subject,  was  any  other  remedy  ne- 
cessary in  those  times  when  the  bark  was  first 
introduced  into  practice.  At  that  period,  in- 
deed, this  article  was  of  better  quality  than  at 
present,  and  not  liable  to  be  fraudulently  mixed 
with  other  substances.  Some  physicians  assert, 
that  if  it  be  carefully  selected  even  now,  it  will 
certainly  cure  intermittents,  when  given  even  in 


230 

a  moderate  dose,  and  that  without  any  medicines 
either  preceding  it,  or  being  joined  with  it. 

But  these  instances  must  not  be  considered 
as  universal.  The  bark  if  exhibited  alone,  may 
be  oftentimes  hurtful.  It  is  bitter,  astringent, 
tonic,  and  aromatic.  If  given,  therefore,  in  cer- 
tain cases  or  temperaments,  it  excites  heat,  pro- 
duces dryness  over  the  whole  skin,  injures  the 
stomach,  sometimes  occasions  pains  in  it,  af- 
fects the  lungs,  and  extends  its  unfavourable  in- 
fluence even  to  the  blood  itself. 

But  this  remedy  may  produce  no  less  injury 
in  other  parts  of  the  system.  In  some  cases, 
after  it  has  removed  the  fever,  pains  still  remain 
in  the  hypochondriac  regions.  It  frequently  at- 
tacks even  the  spleen  itself.  That  viscus,  as  we 
have  already  mentioned,  becomes  enlarged,  and 
even  inclines  to  suppuration.  But  I  have  learnt 
from  experience,  that  this  affection  is  to  be  at- 
tributed to  peruvian  bark  as  frequently  as  to  the 
fever  itself. 

Another  objection  against  this  remedy  is, 
that  it  is  not  always  certain  in  its  effects.  Many 
fevers,  and  those  really  intermittents,  cannot  be 
cured  by  it.  Even  when  it  appears  to  succeed, 
it  not  unfrequently  happens,  that  it  only  sus- 
pends the  disease  for  a  certain  time.    Many  pa- 


231 

tients  worn  out,  as  it  were,  by  this  remedy,  and 
by  an  irregular  fever,  have  dragged  on  a  misera- 
ble existence  during  the  autumn  and  winter. 
Peruvian  bark  alone,  therefore,  has  been  con- 
sidered as  nothing  but  a  palliative  remedy,  and 
is  accounted  only  such  by  some  physicians  even 
at  the  present  day. 

But  a  more  weighty  objection  is,  that  this  re- 
medy oftentimes  suffers  the  febrile  poison  to  re- 
main in  the  system  in  a  latent  state.  We  see 
many  persons  who,  after  the  removal  of  the  fe- 
ver, languish  under  a  pale,  tumid,  yellow  coun- 
tenance, an  enlarged  abdomen,  and  anasarca  of 
the  legs  and  other  parts  of  the  system  ;  they  ap- 
pear to  have  only  exchanged  their  original  dis- 
ease for  a  secondary  one  that  is  much  more  dan- 
gerous :  for  there  are  many  who  recover  from  it 
with  difficulty,  or  at  least  not  till  after  a  tedious 
lapse  of  time. 

We  meet  with  others  who  experience  cer- 
tain anxieties  or  uneasinesses  at  those  times  at 
which  the  paroxysms  had  usually  occurred. 
Others  again  fall  into  a  deep  sleep,  or  stupor, 
about  the  same  hour.  Some,  having  the  cause 
of  the  disease  directed  to  other  parts  of  the 
system,  are  attacked  by  a  diarrhoea  or  dysentery. 
Finally,  sometimes  when  the  fever  is  checked, 
wandering  spasms  occur  in  place  of  the  regular 


paroxysms,  and  excruciating  pains  at  the  same 
time  attack  the  limbs,  bowels,  breast  and 
head. 

From  the  very  cure  of  the  fevers,  then,  an 
argument  of  some  weight  arises  against  the  effi- 
cacy of  the  bark  alone.  When  the  preceding 
symptoms  assume  the  place  of  the  regular  pa- 
roxysms, a  renewal  of  the  fever,  as  we  have  al- 
ready observed,  becomes  sometimes  necessary 
for  their  removal ;  for  it  has  been  remarked  that 
they  disappear  on  its  return,  and  vice  versa. 
Some  physicians,  on  discovering  this,  have 
sought  not  for  a  febrifuge  remedy,  but  for  one 
calculated  to  recall  fever  ;  and  they  declare  that 
they  have  found  spirits  of  sal  ammoniac  to  be 
possessed  of  that  property. 

From  these  circumstances  it  appears,  that 
the  peruvian  bark  is  calculated  to  restrain  the 
effects  of  the  febrile  poison,  rather  than  to  de- 
stroy the  poison  itself.  For  the  poison  may  in 
fact  remain  sound  and  untouched,  as  it  were, 
even  after  the  paroxysms  have  disappeared. 

No  wonder  then  that  some  physicians  de- 
cline considering  this  remedy  as  a  true  antidote 
to  intermitting  fever.  For,  besides  the  restrain- 
ing of  the  paroxysms,  which  may  be  accom- 
plishedby  other  remedies,  such  as  astringents 


233 

and  bitters,  it  is  further  necessary  that  the  fe- 
brile poison  be  altered  in  its  nature  or  expelled; 
but  this  expulsion  is  effected  either  by  the  natu- 
ral action  of  the  system,  the  force  of  the  pa- 
roxysms, or  by  other  auxiliary  remedies  which 
do  not  possess  any  true  febrifuge  power. 

But  if  by  the  peruvian  bark  the  occurrence 
of  paroxysms  may  be  prevented,  by  an  improper 
and  unskilful  use  of  that  remedy,  simple  inter- 
mittents  may  be  changed  into  continued  fevers, 
double  tertians  or  quartans.  And  if  such  a 
change  even  be  not  actually  effected,  still  the  fe- 
brile heat  may  be  increased,  all  the  symptoms 
may  be  rendered  worse,  and  their  cause  may  be 
made  to  take  deep  root.  Hence  the  disease  will, 
with  more  difficulty,  yield  to  remedies  ;  and  (a 
circumstance  which  no  one  would  have  believed, 
who  had  not  learnt  it  from  experience)  the  ut- 
most danger  will  result  to  the  patient. 

Sydenham  relates  the  cases  of  an  officer  in 
the  army,  and  of  an  apothecary,  who  died  in  a 
very  short  time,  in  consequence  of  the  use  of 
peruvian  bark.  The  remedy  had  been  adminis- 
tered previously  to  a  paroxysm,  whence  either 
the  fever  was  rendered  more  violent,  or,  which 
is  more  probable,  being  quite  smothered,  the 
febrile  poison  was  thrown  on  the  vital  organs, 
and  thus  destroyed  their  functions  by  its  delete- 

Hh 


234 

rious  power.  Hence  arose  sudden  death,  which, 
perhaps,  paroxysms  much  more  severe  would 
not  have  produced.  From  what  has  been  said, 
it  will  not  appear  surprising,  that,  in  cases  where 
intermitting  fever  has  been  removed  by  the  bark 
alone,  some  obstructions  should  remain  behind. 
The  febrile  poison  which  it  too  frequently  suf- 
fers still  to  lurk  in  the  body,  may  be  determined 
to,  and  act  injuriously  on,  any  or  all  of  the  organs 
or  parts  of  the  system.  Hence  there  is  no  doubt, 
but  the  mania  which  Sydenham  speaks  of  as 
having  succeeded  a  quartan  fever,  arose  from  the 
relics  of  the  fever,  or  of  the  febrile  poison,  being 
thrown  on  the  brain. 


CHAP.    XIV. 


Of  the  precautions  necessary  to  prevent  mischief  in  the 
administration  of  the  peruvian  bark. 


FROM  what  has  been  said,  it  follows,  that 
the  peruvian  bark  is  not  a  remedy  of  such  a  na- 
ture, as  ought  to  be  immediately  exhibited  in 
every  case  of  intermitting  fever.  Yet  what  we 
have  said  respecting  its  virtues,  is  incontro- 
vertible and  certain.  Those  fatal  events  which 
are  charged  to  its  account,  very  rarely  occur. 
All  the  unfavourable  accidents  which  are  urged 
by  the  common  people,  and  by  certain  physici- 
ans, as  arguments  against  this  remedy,  are  to  be 
attributed  to  the  imprudence  of  those  who  have 
made  use  of  it ;  for  if  it  be  not  taken  by  the  sick 
till  their  systems  are  properly  prepared  for  it,  by 
previous  remedies,  these  accidents  are  not  to  be 
dreaded.  We  have,  therefore,  treated  of  them, 
only  with  a  view  to  prevent  the  use  of  this  ex- 
cellent specific  from  being  turned   into  abuse. 


236 

Acting  on  the  same  principle,  we  will  now  lay 
before  the  reader,  those  cautions  necessary  to  be 
attended  to  in  its  administration. 

It  will  be  prudent  and  wise  in  us,  to  take  na- 
ture for  our  guide,  in  the  cure  of  intermitting  fe- 
vers. These  diseases  occur  about  the  com- 
mencement of  autumn ;  as  that  season  advances, 
they  become,  as  it  were,  more  fixed  ;  they  are  in 
their  highest  state  of  confirmation,  or  obstinacy, 
during  the  winter ;  but  on  the  return  of  warm 
weather  they  terminate  of  their  own  accord.  By 
the  warmth  of  the  season  the  system  is  relaxed, 
and  the  pores  of  the  skin  opened.  To  effect  the 
cure  of  intermittents,  remedies  ought  to  operate 
in  the  same  way  ;  or,  which  amounts  to  the 
same  thing,  the  body  must  be  subjected  to  a  kind 
of  summer  temperature  ;  medicines  of  gentle 
warmth  must  be  taken  internally,  in  order  that 
the  perspiration  may  be  promoted.  Such  is  the 
effect  of  this  cutaneous  evacuation,  that,  provided 
it  be  kept  up  to  a  sufficient  degree,  during  the 
exhibition  of  the  bark,  a  cure  will  certainly  be  ef- 
fected. But,  on  the  other  hand,  there  is  no 
ground  to  hope  for  this,  if  the  skin  be  dry. 

But  it  may  be  laid  down  as  an  established 
principle  on  the  subject,  and  as  one  which  em- 
braces every  thing  necessary  in  the  use  of  the 
peruvian  bark,  that  intermittents  cannot  be  cured 


237 

by  it,  unless  the  functions  of  the  internal  parts  of 
the  system  be  in  an  active  and  healthy  state.  If 
the  viscera  be  in  any  measure  diseased,  this  re- 
medy will  be  exhibited  in  vain.  Should  the  dis- 
ease even  be  suspended  by  it  for  a  time,  it  soon 
recurs  again  with  as  much  severity  as  before. 
On  die  other  hand,  if  the  internal  organs  be  in  a 
sound  and  healthy  state,  the  fever  will  be  so  easi- 
ly removed,  that  it  will  be  scarcely  necessary  to 
join  any  thing  else  with  the  bark.  It  will  in  ge- 
neral, under  such  circumstances,  prove  suffici- 
ent of  itself  for  the  cure  of  the  disease. 

It  must  be  the  earnest  endeavour  of  the  prac- 
titioner, therefore,  to  prevent  any  stagnation  of 
blood  in  the  viscera.  Hence  arises  the  necessity 
of  blood-letting,  of  which  we  have  already  spoken 
in  such  favourable  terms.  Equally  attentive 
must  the  practitioner  be  to  promote  the  secre- 
tion of  bile  ;  for  while  that  secretion  goes  on 
actively,  remedies  will  the  more  easily  reach  the 
cause  of  the  disease  ;  all  the  symptoms  will  be 
more  mild,  both  the  cold  and  the  hot  fits  will  be 
less  violent,  the  patients  will  not  be  exhausted  by 
such  profuse  sweats,  nor  will  the  humours  ac- 
quire such  a  degree  of  acrimony.  The  several 
symptoms  will  be  still  more  alleviated,  and  the 
state  of  the  system  be  rendered  more  promising, 
provided  the  pores  be  kept  open  and  the  skin 
moist. 


238 

The  functions  of  the  stomach  must  be  very 
particularly  attended  to.  If  that  organ  be  dis- 
ordereJ,  or  only  loathe  food,  there  will  be  no 
ground  to  hope  for  a  cure  of  the  fever  by  the 
use  of  the  peruvian  bark.  On  the  other  hand, 
the  disease  even  acquires  fresh  strength  from  the 
exhibition  of  that  remedy;  a  sense  of  pain  and 
heat  is  excited  in  the  stomach  by  it,  which  is 
usually  extended  even  to  the  lungs.  But  if  the 
appetite  be  good  under  the  use  of  the  bark,  that 
is  an  infallible  sign  that  the  patient  will  soon  be 
restored  to  health.  At  least  very  few  instances 
occur,  where  persons  with  keen  appetites  are 
not  soon  relieved  from  the  disease. 

The  intestinal  tube  is  the  third  part,  to  the 
functions  of  which  attention  should  be  paid.  If 
it  be  not  in  a  healthy  condition,  the  cure  of 
the  fever  will,  as  was  formerly  mentioned,  be 
very  difficult.  Indeed  it  is  in  vain  to  attempt 
the  cure  of  intermittents,  if  the  bowels  be  not 
kept  open.  To  the  peruvian  bark,  therefore, 
the  practitioner  should  always  add  some  lenient 
purgative ;  lenient,  I  say,  and  such  as  may  but 
gently  excite  the  peristaltic  motion  of  the  intes- 
tines :  for  if  an  acrid  and  highly  stimulant  pur- 
gative be  given,  such  commotions  may  be  ex- 
cited, as  will  greatly  augment  the  febrile  heat ; 
or  such  a  profuse  evacuation  may  be  occasioned, 
as  will  .carry   off  entirely  the  febrifuge  qualities 


239 

of  the  bark,  and  thus  prevent  the  success  of  the 
remedy. 

There  occurs  at  times,  either  in  consequence 
of  affections  of  the  foregoing  parts,  or  from  some 
other  cause,  a  state  of  the  system  which  is  no  less 
unfavourable  to  the  cure  of  intermittents.  Some- 
times, for  instance,  in  these  fevers,  the  sick  are 
parchedas  it  were,  by  a  very  acrid  or  pungent  heat. 
If,  in  such  a  state  of  things,  the  peruvian  bark  be 
exhibited,  it  never  proves  successful.  If  its  use 
be  persevered  in,  it  will  even  become  highly  in- 
jurious ;  the  febrile  heat  will  be  rendered  more 
intense,  the  humours  will  become  extremely 
acrid,  and  the  force  of  the  paroxysms  will  be 
augmented.  The  fever  may  even  assume  a  con- 
tinued form,  or  if  it  be  by  chance  removed,  there 
will  be  reason  to  apprehend  the  occurence  of 
those  other  numerous  and  troublesome  symp- 
toms, of  which  we  have  already  spoken.  Nor 
can  we,  indeed,  while  there  exists  a  burning 
heat  in  the  internal  parts  of  the  body,  expect 
any  thing  else  from  an  astringent  and  bitter  re- 
medy. Its  use  is  adding  stimulus  to  stimulus, 
and  fire,  as  it  were,  to  fire. 

So  frequently  does  this  fire  or  burning  heat 
prevent  the  cure  of  intermittents,  that  as  often 
as  I  have  observed  these  diseases  refusing  to 
yield  to  the  peruvian  bark,  particularly  at  their 


240 

commencement,  I  have  almost  always  suspected 
the  existence  of  such  a  heat  in  the  viscera.  In- 
fluenced by  this  suspicion  and  by  long  experi- 
ence, I  have  uniformly  been  of  opinion,  that,  un- 
der such  circumstances,  the  use  of  the  bark 
ought  to  be  laid  aside.  In  cases  of  this  descrip- 
tion, I  have  been  in  the  habit  of  prescribing 
cooling  and  opening  injections,  by  which,  in  a 
short  time,  all  the  symptoms  are  rendered  mild- 
er, and  the  fever  so  changed  as  to  be  easily  re- 
moved by  the  febrifuge  powers  of  the  bark.  Even 
in  the  most  obstinate  intermittents,  this  remedy, 
when  properly  managed,  has  seldom  failed  with 
me  to  produce  a  cure. 

Hence,  we  see,  with  what  little  judgment 
those  physicians  act,  who,  in  their  attempts  to 
cure  intermittents,  begin  immediately  and  indis- 
criminately with  the  peruvian  bark,  or  who 
throw  in  vast  quantities  of  that  remedy  in  a  short 
time.  Sometimes,  indeed,  it  may  prove  inno- 
cent and  even  produce  a  cure.  It  has  remov- 
ed intermittents  when  exhibited  to  the  amount 
of  an  ounce  in  six  or  eight  hours.  But  an  at- 
tempt to  cure  these  diseases  in  this  way,  is  not 
always  safe.  A  sensation  of  weight  and  tight- 
ness is  immediately  produced  in  the  stomach  ; 
the  thirst  is  rendered  more  intense;  pains  arise 
in  the  hypochondriac  regions  ;  a  burning  heat  is 
excited.    All  these  symptoms  terminate,  finally, 


241 

in  some  other  disease,  such  as  jaundice,  an  en- 
largement of  the  spleen,  or  a  continued  fever, 
which  is  sometimes  less  dangerous  than  the  other 
symptoms. 

From  what  has  been  said,  it  plainly  appears, 
how  rash  and  hazardous  it  is,  to  administer  bark 
at  the  commencement  of  the  cold  fit.  Some- 
times, indeed,  this  remedy  removes  intermit  - 
tents  when  mixed  in  wine  or  spirits  of  wine  : 
it  accomplishes  the  same  object,  as  we  have  al- 
ready observed,  when  given  in  conjunction  with 
jalap  or  agaric.  But  lest  any  one  should  be  led 
into  an  error  by  this  treacherous  experience,  let 
it  be  held  in  remembrance,  that  intermittents  are 
frequently  cured  by  very  dangerous  medicines. 
But  as  it  would  be  the  height  of  madness  to  trust 
to  such  deceptious  experiments,  so  it  would  be 
no  less  irrational  to  be  led  by  similar  arguments, 
to  the  exhibition  of  peruvian  bark  in  the  cold 
stage  of  fever. 

What  can  be  expected  from  a  remedy  of 
this  kind,  whilst,  as  was  formerly  mentioned,  the 
system  is,  in  all  its  parts,  labouring  under  a  con- 
striction ;  whilst  the  stomach  can  scarcely  bear 
even  warm  water  ;  whilst  the  blood  is  stagnating 
in  the  vena  porta?,  in  the  auricles  of  the  heart, 
and  in  the  lungs  themselves  ?    Surely  by  the  use 

of  such  a  remedy,   under  such   circumstances, 

i  i 


242 

great  anxiety  or  uneasiness  would  be  produced ; 
the  force  of  the  cold  fit  would  be  increased  ;  and 
the  violence  of  the  paroxysms  augmented.  But 
those  physicians  have  been  still  more  unfortu- 
nate, who  have  ventured  to  administer  essential 
oils  and  other  more  heating  substances  during 
the  cold  fit ;  for  by  such  practice  death  has  been 
sometimes  suddenly  produced. 

By  this  rash  mode  of  treatment,  the  salutary 
efforts  of  nature  are  necessarily  suppressed.  We 
formerly  intimated  that,  the  febrile  poison  is  ex- 
pelled by  a  kind  of  crisis.  Galen  observed  this 
crisis,  and  asserted  that  evidences  of  it  manifest- 
ed themselves  in  a  very  early  stage  £>f  the  dis- 
ease. These  evidences  appear  in  the  urine  ;  not 
indeed,  in  alateritious  and  gross  sediment,  which 
is  always  the  sign  of  a  violent  fever ;  but  in  a 
white  and  very  thick  sediment.  The  cause  of 
the  fever  is  also  carried  off  by  the  bowels  and 
the  pores  of  the  skin. 

Many  physicians  are  firmly  of  opinion,  that 
intermittents  are  removed  by  peruvian  bark, 
without  any  crisis ;  for  that  remedy  appears 
sometimes  to  destroy  them  as  if  by  a  single  blow, 
and  that  without  any  evacuations  either  from  the 
bowels,  the  urinary  organs,  or  the  pores  of  the 
skin ;  at  least  many  practitioners  assert,  that 
they  have  not  observed  any  such  evacuations. 


243 

But  it  is  very  doubtful  whether  or  not  they  have, 
in  these  cases,  been  accurate  observers  of  na- 
ture. When  intermittents  are  cured  by  the 
pcruvian  bark,  the  crisis  is  not  always  very  per- 
ceptible. But  it  is  certain,  that  unless  the  na- 
tural evacuations,  which  had  been  checked  or 
disturbed,  be  restored,  a  perfect  cure  will  not  be 
obtained.  But  this  restoration  is  a  kind  of  crisis. 
That  such  a  crisis  does,  therefore,  occur,  is  a 
truth  which  no  one  will  either  deny  or  doubt, 
who  has  examined  the  subject  with  the  neces- 
sary degree  of  attention. 


CHAP.  XV. 


Of  the  method  to  be  adopted  in  the  use  of  the  Peru- 
vian bark. 


WITHOUT  any  further  preliminary  re- 
marks on  the  subject,  we  will  now  proceed  to 
mention  that  method  for  the  use  and  exhibition 
of  the  peruvian  bark,  which  is  founded  on  long 
experience,  and  is  fairly  deducible  from  what 
has  been  already  laid  down. 

Having  premised  the  necessary  preparative  re- 
medies, such  as  blood-letting,  evacuation  of  the 
stomach  and  bowels,  and  the  use  of  aperients,  the 
bark  may  be  exhibited  alone  in  doses  of,  from  a 
drachm  to  a  drachm  and  an  half,  at  such  intervals 
that  four  or  five  doses,  or  more  or  less,  accord- 
ing to  circumstances,  may  be  taken  during  the 
period  of  intermission.  In  this  way,  the  sick 
being  at  the  same  time  under  a  proper  regimen, 


245 

many  intermittcnts  have  been,  and  still  are  cured. 
When  the  bark  was  first  introduced  into  practice, 
the  mode  of  using  it  was  very  different.  At  that 
time,  as  soon  as  the  bark  was  taken,  the  patient 
was  directed  to  take  also  some  solid  food,  a  prac- 
tice which  is  alike  inconsistent  with  both  reason 
and  experience.  The  sick  should  be  supported 
principally  by  broths,  until  the  close  of  the  fever, 
when  a  more  generous  diet  may  be  allowed. 

In  the  mean  time,  strict  attention  must  be 
paid,  to  ascertain  whether  or  not  the  medicine 
agree  with  the  stomach ;  whether  or  not  it  ex- 
cite an  appetite  for  solid  food  ;  whether  or  not 
the  surface  of  the  body  in  general  be  moist ; 
whether  or  not  the  bowels  be  in  an  open  state ; 
and,  lastly,  whether  or  not  the  natural  colour  be 
restored  to  the  urine.  If  there  be  any  thing 
amiss  on  either  of  these  scores,  gentle  purga- 
tives, aperients,  and  refrigerants  must  be  called 
in  to  the  aid  of  the  bark.  In  such  cases,  vitriol- 
ated  tartar  or  some  other  cooling  neutral  salt 
combined  with  the  bark  will  answer  an  excellent 
purpose.  To  avoid  the  necessity,  however,  of 
recurring  to  these  remedies  during  the  course 
of  the  cure,  they  ought  not  to  be  omitted  in  the 
beginning  of  it. 

But  as  the  bark  in  powder  is  oftentimes  dis- 
agreeable to  the  stomach,  as  we  have  already 


246 

mentioned,  and  as  the  primae  viae  may  for  a  cer- 
tain time,  be  troubled  by  bilious  and  very  acrid 
humours,  there  is  another  method  in  which  I 
have  thought  proper  to  prescribe  this  remedy, 
and  that  with  much  advantage.  After  cleansing 
the  stomach  by  an  emetic  on  the  day  of  inter- 
mission, I  order  a  strong  decoction  of  the  bark 
to  be  administered  in  the  form  of  injection,  in 
the  quantity  of  four  or  five  ounces  every  two 
hours.  This  preparation  both  acts  as  a  febri- 
fuge, and  tends  to  keep  the  bowels  in  a  free  and 
open  state.  The  dose  may  be  increased  or  di- 
minished according  to  circumstances. 

In  some  constitutions  the  peruvian  bark  pro- 
duces severe  and  copious  purging.  When  this 
is  the  case,  its  purgative  effect  must  be  prevented 
by  laudanum,  else  its  febrifuge  qualities  will  pass 
off  by  the  bowels,  and  not  enter  the  systematall. 
Besides,  it  may  even  irritate  the  bowels  to  such 
a  degree,  as  to  add  to  the  violence  of  the  fever. 
Its  purgative  effect,  however,  must  not  be  check- 
ed if  it  move  the  bowels  only  five  or  six  times 
a-day,  and  that  only  during  the  first  or  second 
day  of  its  exhibition.  I  have  never  known  such  a 
moderately  purgative  effect  to  have  any  influence 
in  preventing  a  cure.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
even  contributes  greatly  towards  it,  by  carrying 
off  whatever  may  be  left  behind  of  the  depraved 
humours.  But  should  the  bark  continue  to  purge 


247 

for  several  clays,  this  effect  must  be  moderated, 
else  it  will  debilitate  the  system  of  the  patient. 
Still,  however,  this  remedy  will  remove  inter- 
mittents  the  sooner,  provided  it  continue  to 
keep  the  bowels  open  to  a  moderate  degree. 

Intermittcnts  do  not,  in  general,  terminate 
immediately  by  the  use  of  these  remedies.  Some- 
times thesubsequent  paroxysm  may  be  even  more 
severe,  and  that,  perhaps,  in  consequence  of  the 
tumult  excited  in  the  system  by  the  purgative 
effect  of  the  medicine.  In  general,  however,  the 
paroxysm  is  mitigated  in  force,  and  sometimes 
does  not  occur  at  all.  At  least  the  third  pa- 
roxysm will  almost  always  be  prevented.  By 
pursuing  this  method,  therefore,  intermittents 
may  be  cured  both  speedily  and  safely.  Hence 
those  physicians  have  erred  greatly,  who  have 
not  hesitated  to  assert,  that  the  action  of  pur- 
gative medicines  is  unfavourable  to  the  effects  of 
the  peruvian  bark. 

AYe  must  not  desist  from  the  use  of  febri- 
fuge remedies,  as  soon  as  the  fever  terminates. 
The  cure  must  be  confirmed,  and  the  febrile  fo- 
mes  entirely  eradicated.  This  is  the  more  ne- 
cessary to  be  attended  to,  in  as  much  as  during 
the  first  stages  of  the  cure,  the  patients  frequent- 
ly experience  slight  affections  of  the  head,  yawn- 
ings,  something  of  chilliness,  sleepiness,  or  some 


248 

other  diseased  sensation  of  body.  These,  indeed, 
are,  as  it  were,  only  so  many  remembrancers  of 
an  evil  that  is  past,  but  they  may  break  out  into 
a  real  fever  similar  to  the  original  one.  It  is 
necessary,  therefore,  to  continue  the  use  of  the 
bark,  till  the  cause  of  the  disease  be  entirely 
vanquished.  The  precise  length  of  time  during 
which  the  administration  of  this  remedy  ought 
to  be  continued  it  is  impossible  to  determine ; 
that  depends  on  many  circumstances  which 
are  very  different  in  different  patients. 

In  the  mean  time,  certain  general  principles 
may  be  laid  down,  to  which  all  directions  on  the 
subject  are  reduceable.  Thus,  the  bark  ought 
to  be  exhibited  in  certain  doses,  for  six  or  eight 
days  after  the  disappearance  of  the  fever,  and 
then  gradually  diminished  daily,  or  thereabouts. 
It  may,  at  length,  be  laid  aside  entirely,  and  that 
sooner  or  later,  accordingly  as  the  different  parts 
of  the  system  are  more  or  less  perfectly  restored 
to  their  healthy  functions.  Finally,  the  patient 
cannot  be  considered  secure  from  a  return  of 
the  disease,  while  there  is  any  deficiency  in  the 
secretion  of  bile,  or  the  openness  of  the  bow- 
els, or  any  thing  wrong  in  the  colour  or  quantity 
of  the  urine. 

Such  is  the  method,  which,  to  many  physi- 
cians as-  well  as  to  myself,  appears  preferable  to 


249 

all  others.  There  are,  however,  other  modes 
of  exhibiting  the  bark,  from  the  merits  of  which, 
I  would  not  wish  to  detract.  Different  methods 
may  have  their  peculiar  excellencies,  as  being 
better  accommodated  to  particular  constitutions; 
some,  for  instance,  to  tender  and  delicate  habits 
of  body,  and  others  to  such  as  are  more  robust : 
some  remove  disease  more  speedily,  while  others 
accomplish  the  same  end  by  a  slower  process. 
There  are,  however,  innumerable  cases  in  which 
we  are  forced  to  depart  from  the  usual  practice. 
Hence,  we  must  accede  to  the  apparently  contra- 
dictory opinions  published  by  different  physici- 
ans ;  they  have  all  employed  the  proper  specific, 
but  the  method  must  be  different  according  to 
the  constitutions  of  the  sick  and  the  nature  of 
the  disease  ;  and  it  is  right  that  every  one  should 
be  governed  by  his  own  experience. 

There  is  no  other  method,  however,  prefer- 
able in  the  cure  of  a  double  tertian  to  that  which 
we  have  prescribed.  The  only  difference  be- 
tween simple  and  double  intermittents  is,  that 
the  latter  are  superior  in  violence,  and  are 
characterized  by  shorter  intervals  between  their 
paroxysms.  From  these  two  circumstances, 
then,  must  be  deduced  the  differences  that 
necessarily  exist  between  the  proper  modes 
of  treating  double  and  single  intermittents. 

Kk 


250 

The  more  violent  the  fever,  then,  and  the 
greater  the  danger  that  accompanies  it,  the  great- 
er circumspection  it  calls  for  in  the  exhibition 
of  the  first  or  preparatory  remedies.  The  more 
strict,  for  instance,  must  be  the  patient's  diet; 
the  more  diluents  must  he  use;  the  more  must 
the  febrile  heat  be  moderated ;  and  the  more 
strictly  must  the  use  of  aperients  be  enjoined ; 
but,  in  particular,  the  more  copious  must  be  the 
evacuations  from  the  stomach  and  bowels,  m  or- 
der, that  whatever  might  tend  to  increase  the  ac- 
tion of  the  febrile  poison  may  be  discharged. 
At  length  recourse  must  be  had  to  the  bark. 
This  remedy,  however,  must  be  deferred  till  a 
later  period  than  in  a  less  violent  disease,  unless 
the  most  urgent  circumstances  should  call  for  a 
different  procedure. 

If  there  be  any  form  of  intermittent,  in  which 
the  bark  is  not  to  be  immediately  exhibited  in 
substance,  it  is  more  especially  the  double  ter- 
tian. In  this  disease  it  is  better  and  safer  to  em- 
ploy a  decoction  of  the  bark',  with  some  cooling 
and  purgative  neutral  salt  dissolved  in  it.  The 
production  of  acrid  and  putrid  humours  is  then 
more  copious  ;  whence  results  the  necessity  of 
a  remedy  calculated  both  to  evacuate,  and  to 
counteract  fever.  In  as  much  as  the  paroxysms 
in  this  disease  press  closely  on  each  other,  it  is 
necessary  to  give  a  glass  of  this  decoction  every 


251 

second  hour.  We  do  not,  however,  lay  this 
down  as  an  invariable  rule.  But  it  is  most  cer- 
tain, that  the  practitioner  must  here  perform  in 
a  shorter  interval,  what  he  usually  performs  in  a 
longer  one,  in  cases  of  simple  intermittents. 

To  this  mode  of  treatment  a  double  tertian 
seldom  fails  to  yield.  By  the  exhibition  of  the 
preparatory  remedies  alone  all  the  symptoms  are 
mitigated,  and  sometimes  the  disease  declines 
into  a  simple  tertian.  But  even  in  case  things 
should  not  go  on  so  successfully  as  this,  still  by 
persevering  in  the  same  mode  of  exhibiting  the 
bark,  the  disease  will  begin  to  be  removed.  In 
a  double  tertian  the  fevers  that  constitute  it  aYe, 
for  the  most  part,  cured  in  succession,  or  one  at 
a  time.  Thus,  as  we  formerly  mentioned,  one 
of  the  two  tertians  disappears  immediately,  while 
the  other  still  remains.  When  both  shall  have 
disappeared,  then  a  simple  decoction,  or  the  bark 
in  substance,  may  be  exhibited,  and  that  either 
with  or  without  some  purgative  salt,  as  circum- 
stances may  require. 


CHAP.    XVI. 


Whether  or  not  a  quartan  fever  requires  a  mode  of 
treatment  peculiar  to  itself 


THE  foregoing  considerations  relate  to  in- 
termittents  of  every  kind.  We  must  now  en- 
quire, whether  or  not  the  quartan  fever  calls  for 
a  mode  of  cure  peculiar  to  itself.  Previously  to 
the  discovery  of  the  peruvian  bark,  this  disease 
was  considered  as  the  opprobrium  of  physicians 
and  the  torment  of  patients.  Even  at  the  pre- 
sent day,  it  is  believed  by  many,  not  to  yield 
to  that  remedy.  Although,  say  they,  it  often- 
times seems  to  be  cured  by  the  bark,  yet  it  fre- 
quently disappears  only  for  a  certain  time.  It 
oftentimes  continues  throughout  the  winter,  and 
on  the  occurrence  of  the  spring  or  summer,  is 
cured  by  the  favourable  influence  of  the  weather, 
rather  than  by  the  febrifuge  virtues  of  the 
bark. 


255 

It  must,  indeed,  be  acknowledged,  that  the 
quartan  lever  possesses  something  peculiar  to 
itself.  It  differs  from  other  forms  of  intermit- 
ting fever  particularly  in  this,  that  it  appears  to 
take  deeper  root  in  the  system  than  they  do,  un- 
less  it  be  checked  at  an  early  stage.  But  if  it 
be  of  recent  origin,  there  is  no  doubt  but  it  will 
yield  to  the  mode  of  treatment  already  mention- 
ed, and  that  as  readily  as  any  other  form  of  in- 
termittent. As  it  may.  however,  degenerate 
into  a  more  obstinate  disease,  there  are  certain 
precautions  which  should  be  used  to  prevent 
such  frequent  relapses  in  it,  to  the  reproach  of 
both  the  peruvian  bark  and  the  medical  pro- 
fession. 

Unless  the  symptoms  of  the  disease  be  very 
slight,  a  strict  diet  must  be  firmly  enjoined,  al- 
though the  intermission  of  two  days  which  oc- 
curs between  the  paroxysms  may  not  seem  to 
require  it.     Even  this  will  not  succeed  without 
blood-letting.    So  important  a  remedy  is  blood- 
letting in  quartan  fevers,  that  it  almost  immedi- 
ately reduces  their  violence,  and  many  of  them 
cannot  be  cured   without  it.      Emetics  are  no 
less  essential  in  the  cure  of  the  disease  ;  if  they 
be  neglected,  the  febrile  fomes  will  for  the  most 
part  remain  in  the  system.     Purgative  remedies 
are  not  altogether  so  necessary,  because  the  ac- 
cumulation of  vitiated  humours  is  not  in  general 


254 

so  abundant  in  diseases  of  this  description.  It  is, 
notwithstanding,  adviseable  to  keep  the  bowels 
in  a  laxative  state. 

These  precautions  being  attended  to,  there 
is  no  doubt  but  the  fever  will  be  subdued,  pro- 
vided it  be  treated  in  the  manner  which  we  have 
laid  down.  As  it  is,  for  the  most  part,  however, 
extremely  obstinate,  a  larger  portion  of  the  bark 
must  be  administered.  For  the  same  reason,  it 
is  better  to  mix  with  that  febrifuge  some  other 
remedies  of  a  penetrating  nature.  Certain  aro- 
matic substances  mixed  with  vegetable  alkali, 
are  sometimes  exhibited  with  the  best  effects. 
Cascarilla,  in  particular,  is  a  very  powerful  re- 
medy in  the  treatment  of  quartan  fevers.  This 
mode  of  practice  is  sanctioned  by  daily  experi- 
ence, as  well  as  by  the  authority  of  the  ancients, 
who  were  in  the  habit  of  prescribing  the  more 
heating  kind  of  remedies,  not  constantly,  in- 
deed, but  in  certain  cases. 

It  is  particularly  in  quartan  fevers  that  the 
peruvian  bark,  mixed  with  the  lesser  centaury 
or  agaric  in  powder,  maybe  exhibited  with  great 
advantage.  Even  in  persons  of  delicate,  but 
more  especially  in  those  of  robust  constitutions, 
and  in  such  as  were  subject  to  no  diseases  of  the 
viscera,  I  have  oftentimes  used  the  following  re- 
medy,   namely,    Pulv.    Cornachini    gr.    xxiv  : 


255 

Agarici.  gr.  xv.  Sal  Amnion,  one  drachm  : 
Cort.  Peruv.  four  drachms,  M.  f.  Electuar : 
The  mode  of  administering  this  preparation  is, 
to  give  the  fourth  part  of  it  to  the  patient  every 
third  hour. 

I  have  known  a  great  many  quartans  cured 
by  this  remedy  alone,  although  they  had  already 
run  on  for  two  or  three  months.  It  is  necessary, 
however,  to  persist  several  days  in  the  use  of  it, 
taking  care  only  to  diminish,  if  requisite,  the 
quantity  of  the  purgative  medicines.  In  the 
mean  time,  let  the  patients  use  ptisans  of  aperi- 
ent and  gently  cordial  qualities.  It  will  also  be 
adviseable  to  administer  to  them  moderate  doses 
of  nitre,  both  for  the  purpose  of  increasing  the 
urinary  discharge,  and  also  of  moderating  the  in- 
ternal heat,  which  may  possibly  be  produced  by 
the  foregoing  remedies. 

After  the  quartan  fever  has  yielded  to  the  ac- 
tion of  these  remedies,  the  use  of  the  bark  must 
not  be  immediately  relinquished.  In  conse- 
quence of  the  just  apprehension  of  a  relapse,  this 
febrifuge  must  be  continued  for  a  very  consider- 
able time.  If  neutral  salts  and  chalybeates  be 
combined  with  it,  they  render  it  a  prophylactic  of 
still  higher  value.  This  compound  preparation 
restores  tone  to  the  system,  removes  obstruc- 
tions, and  promotes  the  secretion  of  the  bile. 


256 

But  although  all  these  acrid  and  heating  ar- 
ticles, of  which  we  have  treated,  be  almost  infal- 
lible remedies  against  quartan  fevers,  they  can- 
not be  administered  to  everyone  labouring  under 
it.  Those  persons  whose  constitutions  are  weak 
and  irritable  cannot  bear  their  action.  In  such 
patients,  therefore,  the  preparatory  remedies 
are  to  be  exhibited  with  greater  caution  than  in 
others,  and  the  peruvian  bark  must  be  used  in 
the  same  manner  as  in  simple  tertians,  that  is, 
combined  with  gentle  purgatives  and  aperients. 
Sometimes  the  heating  quality  of  the  bark  is  to 
be  moderated.  This  may  be  done  by  making  it 
into  a  decoction  along  with  borage  and  bugloss, 
and  adding  to  the  liquid  thus  prepared,  a  quan- 
tity of  nitre  or  arcanum  duplicatum. 

In  persons  advanced  in  years,  still  further 
precautions  are  essentially  necessary.  In  such 
subjects  quartan  fevers  are  more  dangerous,  be- 
cause the  vital  principle  is  sometimes  overwhelm- 
ed by  the  cold  fit.  If,  therefore,  the  violence  of 
the  cold  fit  be  very  great,  a  return  of  it  must,  if 
possible,  be  prevented.  This  end  will  be  most 
likely  to  be  attained  by  emetics,  followed  imme- 
diately by  a  copious  use  of  the  peruvian  bark. 
But,  as  in  old  age,  the  different  parts  of  the  body 
are  less  permeable,  and  their  excitability  less 
keen,  the  activity  of  the  bark  must  beencreased 
by  some  stimulating  aromatic  and  penetrating 


257 

salt.     These  additions  are  still  more  necessary  in 
the  winter  season. 

To  what  is  here  said,  respecting  the  use  of 
bark  in  quartan  fever,  I  must  add,  that  I  am  ac- 
quainted with  what  I  consider  as  a  certain  reme- 
dy against  the  obstinacy  of  that  disease.  I  allude 
to  warm  mineral  waters  possessing  purgative 
properties,  which  have  produced  a  perfect  cure, 
when  all  other  remedies  had  been  tried  in  vain. 
Many  have  been  cured  under  these  circumstan- 
ces by  the  waters  of  Bourbon.  The  waters  of 
other  places  have  also  produced  the  same  effect. 
Several  persons,  who,  after  the  last  war  in  Flan- 
ders, retained  the  relics  of  obstinate  quartans 
and  even  tertians,  were  restored  to  health  by 
these,  when  all  other  remedies  had  completely 
failed. 


U 


CHAP.    XVIL 


Of  impediments  arising  from  previous  affections  of 
certain  parts  of  the  system,  or  from  different  tem- 
peraments. 


THE  foregoing  directions  cannot  be  strict- 
ly followed  in  all  cases.  Such,  frequently,  is 
the  nature  or  temperament  of  patients,  the  con- 
stitution of  some  particular  parts  of  the  system, 
the  nature  of  the  fever  itself,  and  the  variety  of 
symptoms,  that  difficulties  occur  on  all  hands. 
To  remove  these  difficulties,  therefore,  the  prac- 
titioner must  pursue  a  different  course,  or  ra- 
ther, he  must  vary  the  course  already  pointed 
out,  so  as  ultimatelv  to  attain  the  cure  of  the 
disease.  The  use  of  the  bark  must  be  accom- 
modated to  the  various  impediments  which  are 
thrown  in  the  way,  whether  these  impediments 
exist  in  some  particular  part,  or  be  spread 
throughout  the  whole  body. 


25§ 

The  stomach  itself  oftentimes  rejects  the 
bark.  It  cannot,  for  instance,  bear  the  taste  of 
this  remedy,  though  by  no  means  very  disagree- 
able. To  remove  this  difficulty,  Fuller  prepared 
a  draught  composed  of  bark,  syrup  of  cloves, 
and  some  cordial  distilled  water.  In  this  pre- 
paration there  is  nothing  to  offend  the  stomach, 
and  the  only  thing  to  be  dreaded  is,  lest  it  may 
prove  too  highly  stimulant.  To  prevent  that, 
let  some  cooling,  and  aperient  ptisan,  with  nitre 
dissolved  in  it,  be  given  at  the  same  time. 

The  same  objection  exists  against  an  infu- 
sion of  bark  in  generous  wine.  To  render  the 
preparation  less  disagreeable,  some  physicians 
use  Spanish  wine,  but  direct  the  infusion  after  it 
is  made,  to  be  boiled  a  little.  They  are  of  opi- 
nion that,  by  this  process  the  wine  loses  part  of 
its  native  strength,  and  may  be  prescribed  with 
safety.  If  any  wine,  however,  be  admissible,  it 
is  particularly  Rhenish  wine,  as  being  more  ape- 
rient and  less  stimulant.  But,  as  I  have  very 
frequently  mentioned,  remedies  of  this  kind  are 
always  too  heating.  They  may  answer  a  better 
purpose  in  fevers  that  have  nearly  worn  them- 
selves out,  than  in  such  as  are  more  violent  and 
of  recent  origin.  In  this  latter  description  of 
fevers,  a  watery  infusion  of  the  bark,  holding 
some  neutral  salt  in  solution,  forms  a  more  suit- 
able remedy. 


260 

But  an  impediment  to  the  use  of  the  bark  fre- 
quently arises,  not  only  from  the  repugnancy  of 
the  stomach,  but  from  its  injured  functions.  An 
obstinate  vomiting  sometimes  forbids  the  use  of 
this  remedy.  To  remove  this  difficulty  Syden- 
ham was  in  the  habit,  after  the  manner  of  Ri- 
verius,  of  exhibiting  lime  juice  and  vegeta- 
ble alkali,  and  afterwards  liquid  laudanum  for 
the  purpose  of  allaying  irritation.  Others, 
pursuing  a  bolder  practice,  have  attempted  the 
cure  of  fever  by  exhibiting  the  bark  combined 
with  opium  or  laudanum.  But  if  the  violence 
of  the  fever  be  not  too  great  to  be  borne  with 
safety  by  the  patients,  my  first  step  is  to  remove 
the  affection  of  the  stomach,  which  being  done, 
the  general  disease  can  be  the  more  readily  sub- 
dued. 

But  the  intestinal  tube  no  less  than  the  sto- 
mach oftentimes  presents  difficulties  to  the  cure 
of  intermittents.  In  either  case  the  sick  may  be 
relieved  in  the  same  way,  namely,  by  exhibiting 
the  bark  in  the  form  of  injections.  When  given 
in  this  way,  however,  it  has  been  observed  to  be 
more  serviceable  to  young  persons  than  to  adults. 
But  it  will  do  little  or  no  good,  unless  it  be  re- 
tained for  a  considerable  time  in  the  colon  and 
rectum.  It  will  be  very  readily  discharged,  par- 
ticularly if  a  diarrhoea  exist.  In  such  a  case, 
recourse  must  be  had  to  narcotics,  which  may 


261 

be  given  in  the  decoction  of  the  bark.  The 
proper  doses  of  these  remedies  arc  the  only 
points  that  now  remain  to  be  determined.  Great 
care,  however,  must  be  taken  not  to  give  too 
large  a  dose  of  narcotics,  else  the  issue  will  be  a 
deep  stupor. 

Difficulties  arise  from  the  state  of  the  lungs, 
no  less  than  from  that  of  the  stomach.  When 
the  lungs  are  tender  and  irritable,  and  the  sick 
subject  to  a  spitting  of  blood  or  a  troublesome 
cough,  they  appear  incapable  of  bearing  the  pe- 
ruvian  bark.  But  it  is  to  be  remembered,  that 
the  disease  itself  is  more  injurious  to  this  pec- 
toral affection  than  the  action  of  the  remedy. 
The  bark  must,  therefore,  be  employed,  but 
care  should  be  taken  at  the  same  time  to  admini- 
ster lenient  and  demulcent  medicines  along  with 
it.  For  this  purpose,  I  am  in  the  habit  of  adding 
to  the  decoction  of  it,  the  root  of  the  althea,  or 
the  flowers  of  the  poppy.  In  the  case  of  a  fe- 
male, who  had  been  attacked  bv  a  verv  severe 
and  incessant  cough,  I  employed  these  demul- 
cents with  the  greatest  advantage  ;  for  the 
cough  and  fever  were  removed  at  the  same 
time. 

In  cachectic  and  hypochondriac  patients, 
the  bark  must  be  used  with  precautions  suited 
to  the  particular  nature  and  character  of  the  ex- 


262 

isting  affections.  In  persons  of  the  latter  de. 
scription,  some  of  the  viscera  are  diseased,  in 
consequence  of  which,  the  nerves  are  affected 
with  irregular  and  preternatural  motions.  If, 
therefore,  heating  substances  be  administered,  if 
the  peruvian  bark  be  given  alone,  without  any 
previous  preparation,  an  intense  degree  of  heat 
is  excited,  and  a  constriction  is  produced  in  the 
diseased  viscera*  Hence,  emollients,  gentle  laxa- 
tives, aperients,  and  refrigerants,  ought  both  to 
precede  the  use  of  the  bark,  and  also,  to  accom- 
pany it.  If  a  different  mode  of  treatment  be 
attempted,  the  fever  will  be  rendered  more  obsti- 
nate and  severe. 

Difficulties  equally  great  arise  in  the  cases  of 
chlorotic  females,  or  such  as  labour  under  men- 
strual irregularities.  Subjects  of  this  descrip- 
tion are  with  difficulty  relieved  from  intermit- 
tents,  because  they  are  affected  by  two  diseases. 
The  practitioner  must  begin  by  administering 
emetics  to  them,  as  such  remedies  are  no  less 
efficacious  in  the  removal  of  the  original  affec- 
tion than  of  the  fever  itself.  As  the  stomach  is 
always  disordered  by  a  suppression  of  the  ca- 
tamenia,  a  remedy  which  will  excite  that  or- 
gan to  severe  action,  cannot  fail  to  be  of  ser- 
vice. A  perients  are  also  of  advantage  in  such 
affections. 


263 

In  children  the  cure  of  intermittents  is  at- 
tended with  no  less  difficulty.  These  young 
subjects  reject  all  medicines.  It  is  peculiar  to 
them,  however,  that  they  are  in  less  danger 
than  adults.  We  frequently  see  children  of 
every  age,  labouring  for  a  longtime  under  inter- 
mitting fever,  and  recovering  at  length  without 
any  disagreeable  consequences,  and  that  with- 
out medical  assistance.  But  they  would  have 
recovered  more  readily,  had  mild  emetics  been 
administered  to  them  in  the  beginning  of  the 
disease.  I  have  prescribed  tartar  emetic  to 
children  of  two  years  old.  I  am  convinced 
from  experience,  that  this  medicine  operates 
more  mildly  on  them,  than  it  does  on  adults. 

The  emetics  will  be  productive  of  more  sa- 
lutary effects,  provided  they  be  followed  up 
by  febrifuge  remedies.  The  syrup  of  the  pe- 
ruvian  bark  will  answer  very  well,  particularly 
if  it  be  combined  with  the  rob  of  elder  berries. 
This  medical  preparation,  by  acting  as  a  mild 
purgative,  prevents  in  many  children  the  neces- 
sity of  any  other  cathartic.  But  if  it  cannot 
be  employed,  recourse  must  be  had  to  absorb- 
ents with  rhubarb  and  cream  of  tartar.  In  young 
children  these  remedies  are  real  febrifuges  :  in- 
deed, in  many  cases,  it  is  scarcely  necessary  to 
use  any  other  medicines ;  hence,   let  them  be 


264 

administered  as  plentifully  as  practicable.  For, 
although  so  many  children  recover  of  their  own 
accord,  yet  in  many  others  the  abdomen  swells, 
the  viscera  are  obstructed,  and  the  liver  becomes 
greatly  enlarged.  These  symptoms  are  render- 
ed worse,  if  the  bark  be  injudiciously  adminis- 
tered ;  indeed,  it  may  even  produce  them,  if 
they  have  not  yet  occured. 


CHAP.    XVIII. 


Of  impediments  arising  from  the  fever  itself  from  the 
injuries  which  it  usually  does  to  various  parts  of  the 
hody,  and  from  an  improper  mode  of  treatment. 


OTHER  difficulties  present  themselves, 
which  arise  either  from  the  fever  itself,  or  from 
an  improper  mode  of  treating  it.  These  may  be 
considered  collectively  or  separately.  Taken 
collectively,  or  in  a  general  point  of  view,  they 
may  be  reduced  to  an  obstinacy  of  fever,  and  af- 
fections of  the  abdominal  viscera.  In  some 
cases  the  fever  absolutely  refuses  to  yield  to  the 
peruvian  bark ;  sometimes  it  is  not  in  the  least 
affected  by  it,  even  when  all  the  usual  prepara- 
tory medicines  have  regularly  preceded  it.  The 
efficacy  of  the  peruvian  bark  appears  to  be  dif- 
ferent, according  as  the  seasons  are  different.  In 
certain  years  it  is  attended  with  the  happiest  ef- 
fects, while  in  others  again  it  does  more  harm 
than     good.      There    are    also     certain     places 

in    which   it   is   a   very    unsuccessful    remedy, 

\r  m 


266 

such,  for  instance,  as  marshy  regions  and 
those  bordering  on  the  sea.  There  is  a  great 
variety  in  the  strength  of  the  febrile  poison. 
When  more  acrid,  it  takes  deeper  root  in  the 
solids  and  fluids  of  the  body,  and  adheres  to 
them  more  closely,  and  with  greater  obstinacy. 

When  intermittents  are  obstinate  or  per- 
verse as  it  were,  it  would  be  madness  to  perse- 
vere in  the  exhibition  of  an  useless  remedy,  when 
it  might  even  become  hurtful.  In  vain  do  some 
practitioners  have  recourse  to  larger  doses,  with, 
a  view  to  overcome  the  febrile  fomes  by  force. 
In  such  a  case,  either  the  cause  of  the  disease  re- 
mains in  the  viscera,  after  the  paroxysms  have 
been  suspended,  or,  as  we  formerly  mentioned, 
fuel  is  added  to  the  fire,  and  the  fever  is  render- 
ed more  obstinate.  It  becomes  necessary  then 
to  desist  from  the  use  of  bark,  and  to  return  to 
that  of  diluents  and  aperients.  But,  above  all, 
an  emetic  must  be  administered.  Many  prac- 
titioners in  marshy  countries  err  in  this,  that 
they  place  too  little  dependence  on  emetics. 
Such  is  the  efficacy  of  these  remedies  against 
fevers,  that  I  have  known  many  persons  who 
used  them  as  prophylactics,  to  escape  an  at- 
tack. 

When    intermittents    are   obstinate,    many 
considerations  concur  to  convince  us  how  im- 


267 

portant  it  is,  not  to  abuse  the  peruvian  burk. 
From  improper  modes  of  treatment,  various  lo- 
cal affections  arise,  which  remain  with  the  pa- 
tients during  the  remainder  of  their  lives.  I 
have  known  many  of  the  most  robust  men, 
who,  after  attacks  of  intermittents,  have  ex- 
perienced various  disorders  of  the  princi- 
pal functions  of  the  system,  and  have  fallen 
at  length  into  very  grievous  affections.  Some 
of  these  became  melancholy  and  cachectic, 
others  were  liable  to  obstructions,  and  not  a 
few,  being  never  perfectly  restored  to  health, 
have  at  length  fallen  victims  to  their  sufferings. 
In  some  persons  it  has  brought  on  a  premature 
old  age. 

In  obstinate  cases  of  intermittents  many 
things  occur,  and  those  of  a  peculiar  nature,  which 
forbid  the  use  of  the  peruvian  bark.  When  this 
remedy  is  employed,  many  persons  as  we  form- 
erly mentioned,  experience  a  sense  of  heaviness, 
a  burning,  and  a  constriction  or  tightness.  But 
these  are  so  many  certain  impediments  to  a  cure. 
In  such  cases,  one  of  two  things  exist,  namely, 
either  there  is  some  latent  affection  of  the  coats 
of  the  stomach,  which  must  be  treated  in  a 
manner  suitable  to  its  nature  ;  or  (as  usually 
happens)  that  viscus  is  over- loaded  with  vitiated 
humours,  of  acrid  and  highly  stimulating  quali- 
ties.    But  these  humours   must  necessarily  be 


268 

expelled  and  changed ;  hence  again  appears  the 
necessity  of  having  recourse  to  emetics  and  al- 
teratives. Nor  must  the  bark  be  any  more 
employed,  unless  these  remedies  have  preceded 
it,  or  be  administered  along  with  it. 

Similar  impediments  arise  out  of  the  state 
of  the  duodenum,   or  the  other  portions  of  the 
intestinal  tube.     Oftentimes  the  bowels  are  ren- 
dered more  costive  by  the  use  of  the  peruvian 
bark.     The  stools  burn  as  it  were,  are  bilious, 
of  a  yellowish-red,  or  of  a  black  colour,  so  that 
they  sometimes  even  seem  to  corrode  the  patient's 
linen ;  if  under  these  circumstances  bark  be  exhi- 
bited, the  sick  are  sure  to  be  injured  by  it.  All  bad 
consequences  may  be  guarded  against  by  gentle 
emetics,  repeated  if  necessary  ;    after  this,   gen- 
tle purgatives,  refrigerants,  and  aperients,  if  con- 
tinued a  sufficient  length  of  time,  will  effectually 
cleanse  the  alimentary  canal,  and  carry  off  the 
whole  mass  of  depraved  humours.     These  are 
the  only  remedies  on  which  we  can  confidently 
rely,  in  cases  where  the  use  of  the  peruvian  bark 
has  produced  an  accumulation  of  such  humours, 
nor  must  that  remedy  be  employed  again,  until 
the  state  of  the  system  be  materially  changed. 

But  we  must  look  deeper  into  the  very  foun- 
tain or  source  of  all  these  impediments.  They 
almost  always  depend  on  the  state  of  the  liver. 


269 

If  that  viscus  be  oppressed  from  the  beginning, 
by  the  excessive  violence  of  the  fever,  it  would 
be  an  error  fraught  with  destruction  to  admini- 
ster the  peruvian  bark  ;  and  if  its  use  be  found 
unfavourable  to  the  secretion  and  excretion  of 
bile,  it  is  to  be  no  less  carefully  avoided  on  that 
account  :  for  if  it  be  persevered  in,  an  accumu- 
lation of  very  thick  and  acrid  bile  will  be  form- 
ed ;  the  liver  will  become  parched  as  it  were ; 
the  faeces  will  acquire  a  darker  colour ;  the 
urine  will  become  very  red,  and  will  deposit  a 
copious  brick-dust  sediment.  But  there  is  no 
need  of  all  these  symptoms,  to  convince  us  that 
there  is  some  disorder  in  the  functions  of  the  li- 
ver, which  impedes  the  cure.  If  the  counte- 
nance be  either  livid  or  pale,  or  put  on  a  yellow- 
ish cast,  even  in  cases  where  the  fever  appears 
to  have  left  the  patient,  it  must  be  considered  as 
still  lurking  in  the  system  ready  to  break  forth 
again. 

To  remove  all  these  symptoms,  the  use  of 
the  peruvian  bark  must  be  immediately  relin- 
quished, and  medicines  given  for  some  time, 
with  a  view  to  unlock  the  liver.  For  this  pur- 
pose, I  have  frequently  used  with  advantage,  the 
depurated  juice  of  certain  saponaceous  plants,  to- 
gether with  that  of  borage  and  bugloss,  holding 
in  solution  a  quantity  of  neutral  salts,  such  as  ar- 
num  duplicatum,  &c.     Such  is  the  efficacy  of 


270 

purgatives  in  affections  of  the  liver,  that  I  have 
frequently  removed  them  by  the  use  of  such  re- 
medies alone.  Having  accomplished  this,  which 
was  done  sometimes  sooner,  and  sometimes  later, 
I  then  had  recourse  with  success  to  the  peruvi- 
an  bark. 

The  impediment  is  still  worse,  if  the  abdo- 
men become  tense  and  hard,  whether  this  effect 
be  produced  by  the  action  of  the  fever,  or  by  re- 
medies unskilfully  administered.  The  cause 
of  this  hardness  is  situated  in  the  viscera  just 
mentioned.  In  consequence  of  the  congestion 
and  obstruction  which  occur  in  these  viscera, 
the  blood  does  not  circulate  freely  through  them, 
and  the  other  humours  stagnate  in  them.  Hence 
arises  a  rigidity  of  the  fibres,  an  astriction  of  the 
intestines,  and  a  plethora  of  the  vessels  of  the 
mesentery.  But  when  these  occurrences  take 
place,  it  is  impossible  to  cure  the  fever  without 
their  removal. 

While  these  symptoms  exist,  the  peruvian 
bark  cannot  be  exhibited  without  hazard.  The 
natural  softness  can  be  restored  to  the  viscera 
only  by  free  and  repeated  evacuations.  Nor 
will  the  bark  answer  for  this  purpose,  although 
it  may  prove  purgative,  and  even  open  the  bow- 
els five  or  six  times  a-day.  For  the  siimulant 
power  of  this  remedy  certainly  irritates  and  ex- 


271 

cites  heat,  even  while  it  solicits  the  intestines  to 
a  discharge  of  their  contents.  Therefore,  nei- 
ther their  fibres,  nor  the  texture  of  the  other 
viscera  are  relaxed  by  its  action. 

i 
Lenient  purgatives  contribute  most  to  the 
removal  of  this  hardness  of  the  abdomen.  As 
often  as  that  symptom  has  occurred  in  my  prac- 
tice, I  have  cured  the  rigidity  of  the  intestines  by 
cassia  and  other  similar  remedies.  I  have  also 
prescribed,  at  the  same  time,  the  juice  of  succory 
and  other  herbs  of  that  kind  slightly  impreg- 
nated with  salts.  By  the  assiduous  exhibition 
of  these  remedies  for  a  certain  time,  I  have  al- 
ways succeeded  in  removing  this  hardness  of  the 
abdomen,  particularly  in  those  cases  of  disease, 
to  the  treatment  of  which  I  was  called  soon  after 
their  commencement. 

But  in  fevers  of  longer  standing,  this  mild 
treatment  does  not  succeed  so  well.  In  them  the 
cachectic  habit  of  body,  and  the  hardness  of  the 
abdomen  must  be  attacked  by  remedies  of  great- 
er strength.  I  have,  therefore,  oftentimes  ex- 
hibited a  purgative  mixture  composed  of  senna 
and  some  milder  laxative,  such  as  cassia,  tama- 
rinds, or  manna  ;  I  have  then  directed  some 
laxative  and  emollient  beverage,  with  soluble 
tartar  dissolved  in  it.  By  this  mode  of  treat- 
ment I  have  generally  accomplished  my  object, 


272 

arid  have  very  often  succeeded  in  removing  even 
the  fevers  themselves.  But  a  cure  effected  in 
this  way  is  not  to  be  fully  confided  in.  After  the 
complete  subsidence  and  softening  of  the  abdo- 
men, therefore,  it  ought  to  be  confirmed  by  Pe- 
ruvian bark. 

This  mode  of  cure  is  far  more  necessary 
still,  in  case  the  abdomen  be  greatly  enlarged. 
Such  an  enlargement  is  not  an  unfrequent  oc- 
currence, even  without  any  collection  of  water. 
It  takes  place  in  various  fevers,  particularly  in  cer- 
tain epidemics,  and  that  sometimes  in  an  early 
stage  of  the  disease.  More  frequently,  however,  it 
does  not  appear  till  after  the  disease  has  run  on 
to  a  certain  period.  Not  only  the  abdomen, 
but  the  face,  the  arms,  and  the  lower  extremi- 
ties swell.  In  this  state  of  things  the  peruvian 
bark  must  be  cautiously  avoided.  Purgatives 
and  aperients,  which  we  have  so  often  recom- 
mended, constitute  here  the  principal  remedies.* 
Some  reliance  may  be  also  placed  on  diuretics. 
I  have  oftentimes  cured  both  the  fevers  and  the 
swelling  by  the  use  of  wine  in  which  juniper- 
berries  had  been  infused,  and  to  which  the  mar- 
tial salt  of  Riverius  and  sal  prunelle  were  added. 

*  Obstructions  such  as  our  author  is  here  treating-  of,  appear 
to  be  most  certainly  and  effectually  removed,  by  the  exhibition  of 
mercury,  till, a  gentle  ptyalism  be  produced Trans. 


CHAP.  XIX. 


Of  the  cure  of  fevers  which,  having  ceased  for  a  timey 
recur  again,  and  also  of  certain  symptoms  that  usu- 
ally accompany  them. 


IF  the  impediments  just  mentioned  be  re- 
moved, the  fevers  will  be  easily  removed,  nor 
will  any  of  the  febrile  poison  remain  behind.  But 
all  patients  have  not  the  good  fortune  to  be 
thoroughly  freed  from  this  poison.  In  many 
persons  the  paroxysms  are  only  suspended  for  a 
certain  time  ;  either  a  very  slight  cause  brings 
them  back  again,  or  they  return  of  their  own  ac- 
cord. Thus,  alternately  disappearing  and  re- 
appearing, these  fevers  are  frequently  protracted 
for  a  great  length  of  time. 

To  counteract  this  state  of  things  physicians 

have  fallen  on  various  expedients.  One  whilethey 

have  exhibited  the  bark  in  increased  doses,  and 

another  while  mixed  various  articles  with  it,  for 

n  n 


274 

the  purpose  of  adding  to  its  efficacy.  It  must, 
indeed,  be  acknowledged  that  in  a  great  many 
cases  this  remedy  thus  variously  exhibited  does 
succeed.  When  combined  with  the  lesser  cen- 
taury it  has  been  found  capable  of  removing 
many  obstinate  fevers.  Mixed  with  purgatives 
it  has  been  no  less  efficacious.  I  have  seen  many 
patients,  who  had  taken  large  quantities  of  the 
bark  alone  without  effect,  in  whom  a  perfect  cure 
was  afterwards  effected  in  a  short  time,  by  this 
same  remedy  when  taken  in  combination  with 
neutral  salts.  Not  only  purgatives,  but  diluents 
and  aperients  also,  should  accompany  the  use  of 
the  bark. 

But,  these  remedies  failing,  I  have,  when  the 
sick  were  willing  to  submit  to  it,  adopted  a 
much  more  certain  mode  of  cure.  I  have,  im- 
mediately ordered  my  patients  to  bed,  as  if  they 
were  under  an  attack  of  a  more  serious  disease. 
I  have  then  confined  them  to  an  extremely  low 
diet,  and  sometimes  to  water  alone  for  several 
days.  I  have  next  had  recourse  to  the  use  of 
aperients  and  gentle  purgatives,  and  directed  it 
to  be  continued  for  a  certain  time.  To  this 
treatment  the  fever  has  generally  yielded ;  or  if 
it  did  not  entirely  give  way,  its  violence  and  ob- 
stinacy have  at  least  been  greatly  diminished.  It 
then  readily  yielded  to  the  peruvian  bark,  if  pro- 


275 


pcrly  administered,  and  the  patient  had  no  ground 
to  dread  a  relapse. 


This  method  is  highly  necessary  in  certain 
fevers,  which  not  unfrequently  occur.  In  some 
cases  where  the  paroxysms  have  disappeared,  the 
pulse  remains  frequent ;  it  rises  in  force  particu- 
larly after  the  patient  has  taken  exercise  or  food, 
although  he  has  not  been  intemperat  in  either. 
In  the  mean  time  he  does  not  appear  to  be  in- 
disposed, because  he  is,  or  has  been,  in  the  use 
of  febrifuge  remedies.  But  if  he  be  guilty  of  any 
irregularity  in  diet  ;  if  he  return  to  his  usual  oc- 
cupations ;  and  if,  in  addition  to  these  things, 
certain  changes  in  the  atmosphere  occur  ;  under 
these  circumstances,  the  fever  which  seemed  to 
be  removed,  immediately  recurs  again.  In  vain, 
then,  will  recourse  be  had  to  the  bark,  however 
plentifully  it  may  be  exhibited.  That  remedy 
will  produce  only  fallacious  and  short  lived  sus- 
pensions of  the  disease  ;  hence  there  will  be  an 
absolute  necessity  of  employing  those  auxiliary 
means  which  Ave  have  just  mentioned. 

I  would  not,  from  what  I  have  here  advanced, 
be  understood  to  mean,  that  the  fever  must  be 
attacked  by  these  same  remedies,  every  time  it 
may  recur.  Sometimes  very  obstinate  fevers  may 
be  left  to  themselves  ;  if,  for  instance,  they  recur 
in  the  winter,  and  the  febrile  poison  cannot  be 


276 

checked,  it  will  be  necessary  to  wait  the  arrival 
of  the  spring.  Even  at  other  seasons,  and  in 
certain  temperaments,  it  becomes  requisite  to 
relinquish  entirely  the  unavailing  use  of  reme- 
dies. I  have  indeed  seen,  though  rarely,  inter- 
mittents  even  in  the  summer  season,  so  obsti- 
nate as  to  resist  all  remedies.  I  have  committed 
such  complaints  to  nature,  taking  care  only  to 
regulate  the  diet  of  the  sick,  and  to  prescribe 
such  gentle  remedies  as  might  aid  the  viscera  in 
their  respective  functions.  In  some  instances  I 
have  derived  more  advantage  from  this  mode  of 
practice  than  from  any  other. 

So  much  for  the  mode  to  be  pursued  in  those 
intermittents,  which  remain  obstinate,  after,  hav- 
ing run  on  for  a  considerable  length  of  time. 
In  recent  cases,  where  the  disease  has  been  re- 
moved and  threatens  a  relapse,  a  different  mode 
of  treatment  must  be  adopted.  When  the 
strength  of  the  patient  is  not  much  impaired, 
and  the  fever  has  not  taken  very  deep  root,  it 
will  be  most  safe  to  return  to  the  preparatory 
remedies.  Whence,  if  it  can  be  done,  both  eva- 
cuants  and  diluents  must  be  administered.  After 
all  remaining  obstructions  have  been  thus  re- 
moved, febrifuge  remedies  may  be  given  with 
advantage.  Yet  these  must  be  varied  in  use  ac- 
cording as  the  fevers  or  the  nature  of  the  symp- 
toms are  various. 


277 

Some  patients,  for  instance,  though  free 
from  fever  and  paroxysms,  are  subject  to  obsti- 
nate watchfulness,  or  most  acute  pains  of  the 
head.  In  such  cases,  the  remedies  must  not  be 
relinquished,  but  rather  urged  with  a  zeal  pro- 
portioned to  the  urgency  of  the  symptoms;  for 
we  are  not  to  consider  the  fever  as  actually  sub- 
dued, but  only  the  force  of  the  febrile  poison  as 
thrown  on  the  head  ;  after  it  has  changed  this 
seat,  the  paroxysms  return  again  as  before. 

In  this  situation  of  things,  the  febrile  stimu- 
lus must  be  drawn  from  the  head.  But  in  the 
cases  of  most  sick  persons,  I  have  observed  that 
this  could  not  be  done  in  any  way  better  than  by 
blood-letting.  By  this  remedy  alone,  however, 
a  cure  cannot  be  accomplished.  Hence  I  have 
considered  it  safe  and  certain  to  have  recourse 
again  to  emetics;  next  I  have  directed  laxative 
and  aperient  drinks,  which,  with  the  occasional 
addition  of  soluble  tartar,  I  have  generally  found 
sufficient  for  every  necessary  purpose. 

Profuse  sweats  to  which  the  patients  are  oc- 
casionally subject,  after  the  removal  of  the  fever 
or  the  suspension  of  the  paroxysms,  prove  at 
times  no  less  troublesome.  If  this  excessive 
evacuation  arises,  as  it  usually  does,  from  an  im- 
perfect cure,  the  disease  must  be  treated  n  ith  the 
proper  remedies.      To  this  end,   if  it  be  not  of 


278 

very  long  standing,  if  the  strength  of  the  patient 
be  but  little  reduced,  or  if  those  remedies  which 
ought  to  have  been  premised  have  been  neglect- 
ed, I  generally  have  recourse  to  blood-letting, 
and  that  with  advantage.  In  such  cases,  there  is 
no  doubt,  but  the  viscera  are  subject  to  some 
preternatural  stimulus  ;  blood-letting,  then,  by 
diminishing  irritation,  renders  all  things  better. 

But  in  addition  to  this,  other  remedies  must 
be  administered,  which  seem  better  calculated 
to  put  an  immediate  stop  to  the  sweats.  Eva- 
cuants,  indeed,  draw  off  the  fluids,  which  were 
more  slowly  making  their  escape,  through  the 
natural  outlets  of  the  body.  But  this  avails 
very  little,  unless  attention  be  paid  to  the  ob- 
structions of  the  viscera,  and  the  secretion  and 
excretion  of  the  bile  and  urine  be  promoted. 
Nor  must  we  neglect  such  remedies  as  are  cal- 
culated to  allay  the  internal  heat.  For,  during 
the  flowing  of  these  sweats,  there  generally  ex- 
ists a  burning  internal  heat,  and  an  acrimony 
which  stimulates  the  surrounding  parts. 

But  these  sweats  which  succeed  the  termi- 
nation of  a  fever,  may  flow  from  a  different  cause; 
such  as  the  state  of  the  blood,  or  debility  of  the 
system.  The  affection  must,  then,  be  treated 
in  a  different  way.  The  bowels,  indeed,  as  well 
as  the  urinary  passages  should  be  kept  open  ; 


279 

but  tonics,  that  is,  remedies  calculated  to  restore 
the  lost  tone  of  the  fibres,  constitute  the  princi- 
pal means  of  cure.  Hence  the  pcruvian  bark,  or 
a  vinous  tincture  of  it,  are  for  the  most  part  suf- 
ficient. Sometimes  bitter  infusions  taken  along 
with  chalybeates  answer  every  purpose.  These 
remedies  will  be  the  more  effectual,  if  exercise 
be  called  to  their  aid,  which  alone,  with  an  at- 
tention to  regimen,  is  sufficient  to  restore  the 
strength  of  the  circulation  and  the  tone  of  the 
vessels. 

But  there  are  other  affections  which  are  still 
more  difficult  to  cure.  Thus,  after  the  fever 
has  been  checked,  there  sometimes  remain  con- 
stant anxieties,  a  loathing  of  food,  a  heaviness, 
and  a  loss  of  strength  ;  indeed  the  symptoms  of 
an  ill- cured  fever  manifest  themselves  in  all  parts, 
but  particularly  in  the  countenance,  which  be- 
comes livid  or  of  a  yellowish  colour  ;  all  these 
symptoms  have  occurred  to  me  in  practice,  par- 
ticularly during  a  certain  epidemic,  which  com- 
mitted great  ravages  in  this  place.  On  that  oc- 
casion, fevers  which  seemed  to  be  perfectly 
cured,  generally  recured  again.  It  was  then 
with  difficulty  that  the  sick  survived.  Many 
fell  at  length  into  a  putrid  diarrhoea,  or  a  dysen- 
tery. In  some  cases  a  copious  effusion  of  blood 
broke  forth,  and  proved  fatal  to  the  patient. 


280 

In  the  treatment  of  this  fever  it  was  abso- 
lutely necessary  to  reject  the  bark  entirely.  That 
remedy  seldom  failed  to  render  all  things  worse 
instead  of  better.     The  heaviness,  the  prostra- 
tion of  strength,   and  the  affections  of  the  sto- 
mach and  liver,  were  relieved  only  by  aperients 
and  deobstruents.    The  putrid  diarrhoea  could  be 
safely  checked  only  by  mild  evacuants.    The  dy- 
senteric symptoms  required,  also,  a  peculiar  and 
specific  mode  of  treatment.     Even  after  all  the 
troublesome  symptoms  had  become  milder,  or 
disappeared  entirely,  there  were  some   practi- 
tioners who  still  would  not  venture  again  on  the 
use  of  the  peruvian  bark.     They  waited  till  na- 
ture or  a  change  of  the  season  should  complete 
the  cure  of  the  disease.      But  these  physicians 
had  too  great  a  dread  of  the  effects  of  this  reme- 
dy.    It  could  be  safely  used  provided  it  was  pre- 
ceded by  the  proper  remedies.      Having  previ- 
ously prepared  the  systems  of  my  patients  for 
its  action,  I  then  had  recourse  to  it  with    the 
greatest  success.     We  have  already  treated  of 
the  watery  and  flatulent  swellings  which  occur 
during  the  actual  continuance  of  the  fever.     But, 
as  we  have  elsewhere  mentioned,  a  swelling  ve- 
rv  often  attacks  the  lower  extremities  after  the 
febrile  affection  has  terminated.     Provided,  how- 
ever, the  fever  has  been  treated  and  cured  in  a 
proper  manner,  nothing  serious  is  to  be  appre- 
hended from  this  swelling  ;   for  the  water  cob 


281 

lectcd  in  the  cellular  membrane  passes  away  of 
its  own  accord,  as  the  strength  of  the  patient  re- 
turns. If,  however,  the  water  be  in  large  quan- 
tity, or  if,  in  consequence  of  a  laxity  of  the 
fibres,  it  remain  longer  than  usual  in  the 
cellular  receptacles,  the  exhibition  of  diuretics 
and  tonics  becomes  necessary. 

On  such  occasions,  a  decoction  of  some  bitter 
aperient  vegetables,  holding  in  solution  a  quan- 
tity of  soluble  tartar,  is  an  excellent  remedy.  I 
have  also  in  many  cases  derived  advantage  from 
the  use  of  wine,  in  which  juniper-berries  had 
been  infused,  and  which  contained  at  the  same 
time,  in  solution,  a  portion  of  the  martial  salt  of 
Riverius.  But  these  are  not  the  only  remedies 
that  may  be  administered.  There  are  others 
which  have  been  given  with  success,  such  as  a 
lixivium  of  broom  ashes.  There  is  but  little 
difference,  however,  between  this  remedy  and 
the  febrifuge  water  of  Riverius,  which  con- 
sists of  salt  of  tartar  dissolved  in  common 
water. 

Such  are  the  remedies  which  I  have  found  by 
experience  to  be  efficacious  in  removing  the  re- 
lics of  intermittents,  or  certain  affections  which 
are  attendant  on  these  diseases.  If  in  prescrib- 
ing these  remedies,  I  have  sometimes  been  silent 

o  o 


282 

respecting  the  peruvian  bark,  it  is  not,  from  such 
silence  to  be  inferred,  that  I  meant  to  induce 
practitioners  to  neglect  the  use  of  it.  If  the  fe- 
ver has  not  been  cured  in  a  proper  manner,  if 
there  be  any  apprehension  that  its  fomes  still  re- 
mains in  the  viscera,  the  use  of  the  bark  cannot 
safely  be  dispensed  with.  When  by  the  use  of 
other  remedies  the  symptoms  have  disappeared 
or  become  milder,  the  cure  must  be  perfected 
and  confirmed  by  the  bark. 


CHAP.    XX. 


Of  the  cure  of  Malignant  Intermittent*, 


MUCH  less  must  practitioners  neglect  the  use 
of  the  bark  in  the  treatment  of  intermittents,  if 
they  be  of  a  malignant  nature.  But  there  is  a 
double  plan  of  treatment  which  must  be  pursu- 
ed in  such  diseases  ;  one  of  these  must  be  adopt- 
ed during  the  violence  of  the  paroxysms,  and  the 
other  in  their  decline,  or  rather  during  their  in- 
termission. For  as  some  of  the  symptoms  are 
foreign  from  the  nature  of  the  fever,  these  symp- 
toms and  the  febrile  cause  call  each  for  remedies 
peculiar  to  themselves. 

This  circumstance,  as  formerly  mentioned, 
was  observed  by  Louis  Mercatus.  That  physi- 
cian was  the  first  who  treated  extensively  of 
these  foreign  symptoms,  but  Morton  and  Torti 
have   approached  nearer  to  a  proper  method  of 


284 

cure.     We  will  briefly  lay  before  the  reader  our 
experience  on  this  subject. 

We  will  not  treat  separately  of  all  the  symp- 
toms that  occur,  but  only  mention  the  principal 
remedies  by  which  they  may  be  combatted. 
When  the  head  is  severely  attacked,  when  a  de- 
lirium occurs,  or  a  kind  of  apoplexy,  lethargy, 
or  coma  oppresses  the  patient,  a  peculiar  mode 
of  treatment  becomes  necessary.  Blood-letting 
has  oftentimes  been  observed  to  remove  these 
symptoms  like  a  charm.  Nor  is  this  remedy 
less  serviceable  in  those  acute  pains  resembling 
rheumatism  which  attack  the  limbs,  back,  &x. 
in  severe  gripings  or  spasms  of  the  stomach  or 
intestines,  and  m  oppressions  at  the  breast.  In- 
deed it  may  be  used  with  advantage  in  all  such 
affections,  provided  the  strength  of  the  patient 
be  not  too  much  exhausted. 

In  the  apoplectic,  lethargic,  and  comatose 
state  of  fever,  blistering  must  by  no  means  be 
neglected.  Nor  is  this  remedy  less  useful  in 
those  paroxysms,  in  which  the  patients  lie  with- 
out motion  or  sensation.  But,  although  the 
practice  may  to  some  appear  less  likely  to  prove 
useful,  I  have  even  ventured  to  try  the  same 
remedy  in  certain  very  acute  pains  ;  for  as  these 
pains  are,  for  the  most  part,  spasmodic,  it  is 
practicable  to  effect  a  revulsion  or  derivation  of 


285 

the  morbid  action  from  one  part  of  the  system 
to  another.  I  am  convinced  by  experience  that 
blistering  is  also  a  very  important  remedy  in 
oppressions  at  the  breast. 

The  use  of  opiates  is  no  less  recommended, 
by  the  nature  of  the  remedies  themselves,  by 
experience,  and  also  by  the  painfulness  of  some 
of  the  symptoms.  Indeed  the  rheumatic  pains 
in  the  limbs,  are  sometimes  so  severe  as  to  call 
for  the  immediate  exhibition  of  these  remedies  ; 
and  in  pains  of  the  viscera,  particularly  of  the 
stomach  and  intestines,  it  would  oftentimes  be 
almost  criminal  to  neglect  them.  By  opiates 
vomiting  and  diarrhoea  may  be  checked,  which 
sometimes  bring  the  patients  into  the  utmost 
danger.  It  is  in  the  mean  time  to  be  observed, 
that  opium  should  not  be  exhibited  alone.  It 
ought  to  be  mixed  with  aromatics,  as  in  theri- 
aca,  and  the  liquid  laudanum  of  Sydenham.  It 
may  also  be  exhibited  along  with  aether,  which 
is  of  itself  an  excellent  remedy  for  oppression 
and  vomiting. 

I  will  not  here  treat  of  diluents  or  demul- 
cents, which  contribute  to  allay  irritation,  and 
the  advantages  of  which  are  known  to  every  one. 
Nor  is  it  requisite  to  dwell  on  the  use  of  reme- 
dies calculated  to  awaken  motion  and  excite  heat. 
It  must  be  ovious  to  every  one,    how  nccessarv 


286 

these  are  in  cases  of  prostration  of  the  vital 
principle,  in  great  depression  of  the  pulse,  and 
in  a  very  obstinate  cold  fit  where  the  surface 
of  the  body  assumes  a  marbled  appearance.  But, 
that  remedies  may  be  exhibited  with  the  more 
advantage,  no  less  regard  must  be  paid  to  the 
symptoms  than  to  their  cause.  This  cause  is  the 
poison  which  vitiates  the  fluids,  and  disturbs 
the  functions  of  the  system.  It  is  necessary  to 
enquire,  therefore,  what  may  be  capable  of  re- 
sisting this  deleterious  cause,  until  its  violence 
abate,  and  an  intermission  ensue. 

When  the  paroxysm  has  passed  over  and  the 
symptoms  have  become  more  mild,  then  is  the 
proper  time  to  administer  that  febrile  antidote, 
the  peruvian  bark.  This  remedy  may  indeed 
be  exhibited  in  decoction,  but  there  is  reason  to 
apprehend  that  in  this  way  it  cannot  be  taken  in 
sufficient  quantity.  In  a  disease,  therefore,  so 
rapid  in  its  progress,  recourse  must  be  had  to 
the  bark  in  substance,  or  rather,  indeed,  to  the 
extract  ;  nor  need  we  be  apprehensive  of  giving 
it  in  too  large  doses.  If  the  doses  be  small,  they 
will  be  insufficient  for  the  end  in  view,  which  is, 
to  overpower,  as  it  were,  the  febrile  poison. 
Hence,  let  the  patient  take  a  drachm  of  the  ex- 
tract of  bark  at  a  dose,  and  repeat  this  two  or 
three  times  during  the  intermission. 


287 

A  question  occurs  here  to  be  solved,  name- 
ly, whether  or  not  purgatives  ought  to  be  mixed 
with  the  peruvian  bark  ?  These  remedies,  in- 
deed, will  not  be  amiss  in  affections  of  the  head, 
they  may  also  be  administered  when  the  force  of 
the  disease  falls  on  the  breast,  as  well  as  in  rheu- 
matic pains  of  the  joints  and  limbs.  The  bow- 
els ought,  however,  only  to  be  kept  gently  open 
rather  than  to  be  severely  purged,  lest  the  effi- 
cacy of  the  bark  should  pass  off  in  that  way. 
The  force  of  the  medicines  must  be  particularly 
directed  against  the  febrile  poison,  whose  impe- 
tus is  to  be  counteracted. 

But  there  are  various  other  affections  in  which 
the  bowels  must  not  thus  be  moved.  When  the 
stomach  and  intestines,  for  instance,  receive 
the  whole  force  of  the  disease,  the  practitioner 
must  decline  the  use  of  purgatives.  If  a  diarrhoea 
exist,  it  must  even  be  restrained.  It  would 
be  no  less  improper  to  administer  purgatives  in 
cases  where  there  is  a  prostration  of  the  vital 
principle,  or  where,  during  the  cold  fit,  the  heat 
has  retreated  from  the  surface  and  extremities  to 
the  internal  parts  of  the  body.  In  cases  of  this  de- 
scription, we  must  rather  have  recourse  to  aro- 
matics,  such  as  Virginian  snake-root,  in  combi- 
nation with  the  bark,  that  it  may  the  more  effec- 
tually penetrate  the  recesses  of  the  system,  and 
thus  rouse  it  into  action.     For  the  same  pur- 


288 

pose  I  have  oftentimes  administered  the  bark  in 
wine. 


Another  question  occurs,  and  that  of  no  less 
moment,  in  as  much  as  it  relates  more  immedi- 
ately to  the  danger  of  the  disease.  It  is  enquired 
whether  or  not  the  physician  must  always  wait 
for  a  remission  of  the  paroxysm  in  order  to  ex- 
hibit the  bark  ?  If,  indeed,  the  febrile  action  be 
not  very  intense,  but,  on  the  other  hand,  if  there 
be  a  prostration  of  strength  and  a  debility  of 
pulse,  if  there  be  not  great  irritation  in  the  sto- 
mach or  intestines,  finally,  if  the  force  of  the 
symptoms  will  by  any  means  admit  of  it,  I  know 
no  good  reason  why,  in  so  doubtful  a  state  of 
things,  the  bark  may  not  be  exhibited  either 
alone  or  combined  with  some  other  remedies. 
Although  the  symptoms  usually  intermit,  yet 
the  degree  and  duration  of  the  intermission  are 
both  uncertain.  In  the  mean  time  the  danger  is 
great,  and  there  is  consequently  a  pressing  call 
for  the  exhibition  of  the  antidote. 


CHAP.    XXL 


Of  the  treatment  of  common  remitting  fivers,  and 
also  of  those  of  a  malignant  nature. 


SO  much  for  the  treatment  of  intcrmittents  ; 
we  will  now  pass  on  to  the  consideration  of  that 
of  remittents.  These,  as  we  have  already  re- 
marked, are  of  various  kinds  ;  or  rather,  they 
vary  with  respect  to  their  violence  and  their  type. 
They  are  often  attended  with  unexpected  and 
dangerous  symptoms.  Hence,  although  they 
originate  from  the  same  fomes,  and  the  same 
cause,  it  is  requisite  to  enquire  whether  or  not 
they  call  for  the  same,  or  for  different  modes  of 
treatment.  It  is  frequently  difficult  to  institute 
a  mode  of  treatment,  and  this  difficulty  arises 
from  numerous  causes. 

The  first  thing  to  be  attended  to,  is,  the  na- 
ture and  use  of  the  remedies  nccessarv  to  be  ex- 
hibited.      The    fevers   arc    continued,    because 

they    are   marked   by   no    perfect   intermission. 

pp 


290 

No  other  mode  of  treating  them,  then,  immedi- 
ately occurs,  but  that  which  is  employed  in  con- 
tinued fevers.  But  their  nature  and  character 
are  opposed  to  all  specific  febrifuges,  particular ly 
to  tonics,  bitters,  astringents,  and  such  remedies 
as  excite  heat.  The  peruvian  bark  appears, 
therefore,  to  be  improper  in  the  treatment  of  re- 
mitting fever.  For  if  that  remedy  proves,  for 
the  most  part,  injurious  in  genuine  intermittents, 
when  their  paroxysms  are  protracted,  and  their 
violence  is  great,  can  it  do  good  in  a  fever  of  a 
continued  course,  although  its  violence  may 
sometimes  abate  ? 

Yet  as  remittents  belong  to  the  same  class 
with  intermittents,  is  it  possible  that  they  can 
call  for  remedies  altogether  different  ?  Can  that 
medicine  be  improper  in  the  treatment  of  remit- 
tents, which  is  best  calculated  to  subdue  and  eli- 
minate their  cause  ?  In  order  to  reconcile  all 
these  circumstances,  which  appear  so  inconsist- 
ent with  each  other,  we  must  look  a  little  deeper 
into  the  subject.  We  must  enquire,  for  instance, 
whether  or  not  the  symptoms  of  intermitting  and 
remitting  fevers  are  so  different  from  each  other, 
that  they  require  to  be  cured  by  different  modes 
of  treatment  ? 

The  symptoms  of  these  diseases  do  not,  ex- 
cept at  first  sight,  appear  to  differ  so  greatly  from 


291 

each  other.  In  most  respects  the  mode  of  treat- 
ing intermittents  and  remittents  is  nearly  the 
same.  For,  as  the  bark  does  mischief  if  admi- 
nistered in  intermittents,  during  the  actual  ex- 
istence of  the  paroxysms  ;  so  also,  in  remittents, 
if  it  be  exhibited  during  the  prevalence  of  the 
paroxysms,  it  renders  every  thing  worse.  The 
practitioner  must,  therefore,  wait  for  the  re- 
mission, in  order  to  administer  this  remedy  with 
advantage  to  the  sick.  Previously  to  its  use, 
the  primae  viae  must  be  well  cleansed,  for  if  they 
become  turgid  with  fcecal  matter,  or  if  the  bowels 
be  in  a  costive  state,  the  fever  will  be  encreased 
in  violence. 

In  the  treatment  of  these  diseases,  there  ex- 
ists only  this  difference,  namely,  First,  that  in 
remittents  the  fever  only  abates,  and  allows, 
therefore,  less  time  for  the  use  of  remedies  to 
counteract  it,  and,  Secondly,  that  the  febrile  heat 
is  more  intense,  and  the  secretory  functions  less 
free  and  active.  The  fomes  of  the  disease  will 
consequently  be  eradicated  with  more  difficulty, 
because  it  will  be  removed  only  by  slow  degrees.. 
The  action  of  the  bark,  however,  both  on  it  and 
its  effects  is  certain,  though  somewhat  feeble;  it 
at  least  weakens  its  force,  if  it  does  not  complete- 
ly eradicate  it.  Let  the  impediments  to  the  use 
of  the  bark  be  done  away,  and  that  remedy  will 
be  at  length  successful. 


292 

The  efficacy  of  the  bark  is  particularly  mani- 
fested in  its  preventing  the  paroxysms,  or  reduc- 
ing their  force.  Hence,  it  appears,  that  if  the 
paroxysms  be  very  severe,  this  remedy  may  be 
advantageously  employed  against  them.  It  may, 
indeed,  increase  the  heat  of  the  body,  and  will 
not  immediately,  as  in  intermittents,  destroy  the 
febrile  fomes.  But  the  greater  evil  must  be  ob- 
viated ;  and  the  impetus  of  the  fever  will  do  more 
mischief  to  the  system,  than  the  action  of  the 
bark  when  used  as  a  remedy  for  it.  The  state 
of  things  is  here  precisely  as  it  is  in  a  case  of 
disease,  consisting  of  a  pleurisy  joined  to  an  in- 
termitting fever.  No  doubt  but,  in  such  a  case, 
the  peruvian  bark  may  somewhat  injure  the  in- 
flamed lungs ;  yet,  as  this  remedy  weakens  the 
force  of  the  intermittent,  and  may  do  away  the 
danger  arising  from  paroxysms,  it  ought  to  be 
em  cloved. 

But  there  are  certain  principles  by  which  the 
exhibition  of  the  bark  ought  to  be  regulated.  It 
should  not  be  employed,  unless  the  fever  to  be 
removed  be  certainly  of  the  intermitting  kind. 
It  appears  from  the  daily  controversies  of  physi- 
cians, how  difficult  a  thing  it  is  to  discover  the 
real  nature  and  character  of  fevers.  Skilful 
practitioners  do  not  expect  to  derive  any  advan- 
tage from  the  use  of  peruvian  bark  in  febrile 
complaints    unless   they    be   of  the   nature    of 


\ 


293 

intcrmittents.  But  there  are  physicians  of 
less  knowledge  and  abilities,  who,  as  often  as 
they  meet  with  a  case  of  fever,  marked  by  perio- 
dical exacerbations,  attempt  its  removal  by  the 
peruvian  bark.  But  as  this  remedy  would  be 
hurtful  in  inflammatory  fevers,  although  charac- 
terized at  times,  by  periodical  and  regular  exa- 
cerbations, will  it  be  likely  to  prove  less  injurious 
in  various  other  fevers,  which  differ  equally  from 
the  nature  of  intermittents  ? 

In  every  fever,  however,  which  derives  its 
origin  from  the  fomes  of  intermittents,  the  pe- 
ruvian bark  is  not  calculated  to  check  the  pa- 
roxysms. If  in  the  spring,  for  instance,  an  in- 
termitting fever  be  changed  into  a  continued  one, 
or  if  it  assume  that  form  from  the  beginning,  it 
must  be  treated  like  a  simple  continued  fever. 
In  this  way,  it  is  induced  at  length  either  to  re- 
mit or  intermit ;  or  is  sometimes,  by  such  treat- 
ment, even  cured  entirely.  It  is  worthy  of  re- 
mark, that  I  have  oftentimes  seen  the  fomes  and 
cause  of  an  intermittent  completely  eradicated 
by  a  continued  fever. 

In  a  similar  manner  must  wc  treat  the  double 
tertian  remittent,  which  is  marked  by  regular 
exacerbations,  and  never  departs  from  its  pro- 
per type.  Sometimes  this  disease  runs  on  to 
the  eleventh,  fourteenth,  or  twentieth  day,  and 


294 

is  considerably  violent  even  during  the  time  of 
its  greatest  remission.  But  while  it  prevails  to 
such  a  degree,  the  peruvian  bark  must  not  be  ad- 
ministered ;  for  it  induces  great  heat,  and  adds 
to  the  intensity  of  the  fever.  It  is  necessary  to 
wait,  therefore,  till  its  remissions  become  more 
considerable. 

There  are  some  practitioners  who  have  di- 
rected a  trial  to  be  made  of  that  remedy,  on  this 
condition,  that  its  use  be  immediately  relinquish- 
ed in  case  it  does  not  succeed.  Others  again 
conceive  that  it  ought  not  to  be  exhibited  earlier 
than  the  twelfth  day  of  the  disease  ;  but  both  of 
these  classes  are  in  an  error.  Uncertain  reme- 
dies ought  not  to  be  tried,  nor  should  we  fix  a 
certain  period  for  the  exhibition  of  remedies 
which  nature  herself  has  not  fixed ;  our  best 
plan  is  to  follow  her  as  our  guide,  and  to  give 
her  such  aid  when  labouring  for  her  own  relief, 
as  she  seems  to  require. 

Many  remitting  fevers  occur,  in  which  the 
paroxysms  or  exacerbations  come  on  with  great 
violence,  and  bring  the  sick  into  the  utmost  dan- 
ger. In  such  cases  the  practitioner  must  pro- 
ceed in  a  very  different  manner.  The  bark  must 
be  exhibited  with  boldness.  Nor  must  its  use 
be  dreaded,  because  the  remission  is,  perhaps, 
rather  slight.   It  will  be  sufficient  if  there  be  any 


295 

remission  at  all.  It  is  only  incumbent  on  the 
practitioner  to  enquire,  whether  or  not,  any 
thing  ought  to  be  mixed  along  with  the  bark, 
and  what  assistance  may  be  derived  from  other 
remedies. 

A  mode  of  practice  which  I  have  generally 
found  successful,  is,  to  exhibit  an  emetic  on  the 
decline  of  the  paroxysm,  and  after  this  to  give 
a  febrifuge  potion,  consisting  of  bark,  together 
with  some  laxative  and  aperient  remedies,  so 
prepared  as  to  be  capable  of  producing  a  speedy 
effect.  By  such  treatment  as  this,  all  the  symp- 
toms are  generally  rendered  milder  ;  I  say, 
milder,  for,  in  fevers  of  this  description,  we  are 
not  to  expect  that  the  paroxysms  will  be  entirely 
removed,  as  they  are  in  intermittents  ;  they  de- 
cline, for  the  most  part,  only  in  a  very  gradual 
manner.  Frequently,  however,  remittents  of 
this  kind  are  changed  into  intermittents,  not, 
indeed,  into  tertians  or  quartans,  but  more  ge- 
nerally into  the  form  of  double  tertians. 

It  more  frequently,  however,  occurs,  that  in 
fevers  of  this  description,  the  paroxysms  are  so 
protracted,  that  the  preceding  almost  runs  into 
the  succeeding  one,  leaving  the  intermission  ex- 
tremely short.  Decoctions  of  bark,  therefore, 
should  not  then  be  n^ed,  because  they  require 
too  long  a  space  of  time   for  their  operation. 


296 

Recourse  must  consequently  be  had  to  the  bark 
in  substance,  or  rather  to  the  extract  of  bark.  A 
drachm  of  the  extract  is  equal  in  strength  to  an 
ounce  of  the  bark  in  powder  ;  hence  the  neces- 
sary doses  may  be  more  easily  repeated,  and 
thus  the  patients  placed  in  a  state  of  safety.  In 
such  cases,  if  in  any,  the  extract  may  be  mixed 
with  some  cooling  purgative  salt.  For  the  burn- 
ing heat  should  be  allayed,  and  if  practicable, 
the  bowels  kept  open,  for  which  purpose,  the 
remedies  ought  to  be  given  in  very  large 
doses. 

The  same  remedy  must  be  pushed  to  a  still 
greater  extent,  in  those  fevers  where  malignant 
symptoms  arise.  When,  for  instance,  the  head 
is  very  grievously  attacked  ;  when  an  apoplec- 
tic or  lethargic  state  supervenes  ;  when  the  lungs 
are  greatly  oppressed,  or  the  abdominal  viscera 
affected  with  a  very  acute  and  excruciating  pain 

under  these  circumstances,    I  say,  there  is 

the  utmost  danger  in  delay,  nor  can  the  lives 
of  the  patients  be  sufficiently  guarded  in  any 
other  way,  than  by  a  plentiful  use  of  the  peruvi- 
an  bark.  When  the  febrile  poison  has  disspread 
itself  throughout  the  whole  system,  this  remedy 
meets  and  extinguishes  it,  as  it  were,  and,  at 
times,  restores  the  patients  from  such  a  low 
state,  that  they  might  almost  be  said  to  be  raised 
from  the  dead. 


297 

The  mode  of  administering  the  bark  depends 
on  the  nature  of  the  fever,  the  force  of  the  symp- 
toms, the  longer  or  shorter  duration  of  the  pe- 
riod of  remission,  and  the  laxity  or  costiveness 
of  the  bowels.  But  amid  such  a  variety  of  cir- 
cumstances, it  is  impossible  here  to  point  out 
what  may  be  necessary  for  each  particular  case. 
We  can  only  say  in  general,  that  there  is  no  great 
difference  between  the  proper  treatment  of  dou- 
ble tertians  and  malignant  remittents,  except 
that  in  the  latter,  the  remedies  must,  in  the  same 
space  of  time,  be  given  in  larger  quantities  ;  for 
when  the  danger  is  so  pressing,  the  febrile  poi- 
son should  be  subdued  and  eradicated  as  speedily 
as  possible. 

It  is  indeed  best  to  wait  till  the  exacerbations 
remit ;  but  there  are  cases  in  which  the  remis- 
sions are  scarcely  perceptible.  Then,  indeed, 
having  first  used  the  proper  preparatory  reme- 
dies, the  bark  must  be  boldly  exhibited.  This 
remedy  is  the  less  to  be  dreaded,  in  as  much  as 
the  pulse  is  for  the  most  part  depressed  ;  but  if 
it  even  were  not  depressed,  still  the  bark  must 
by  all  means  be  used.  In  such  a  doubtful  dis- 
ease, it  is,  as  we  have  already  said,  the  sheet  an- 
chor of  safety  by  which  alone  the  vital  principle 
can  be  supported. 


298 

In  the  mean  time  a  very  special  regard  is  to 
be  had  to  those  symptoms,  in  which  the  whole 
force  of  the  disease  seems  to  centre.  It  is,  in- 
deed, in  counteracting  these  svmntoms  that  the 
bark  is  so  efficacious.  But  other  remedies 
should  be  also  frequently  exhibited  in  such  cases. 
From  what  we  have  said  on  the  subject  of  ma- 
lignant intermittents,  the  reader  may  readily  col- 
lect our  sentiments  as  to  the  several  means  that 
might  contribute  to  a  cure  in  the  present  instance. 
What  was  there  advanced  may  be  applied  to  all 
cases  that  usually  occur  in  malignant  remittents. 
Indeed  there  is  no  other  difference  between  the 
two  diseases,  except  that  between  the  paroxysms 
of  malignant  intermittents  there  is  a  longer  in- 
terval, and  that  during  this  interval  the  patients 
are  more  free  from  fever. 

For  the  better  illustration  of  the  method  of 
cure,  I  had  prepared  for  publication  a  number 
of  cases.  But  it  appeared  best  on  reflection 
that  these  should  be  omitted.  There  are  not 
two  cases  of  disease  precisely  alike  ;  whence, 
there  are  not  two  in  which  the  same  remedies 
will  produce  precisely  the  same  effects.  It 
seems  most  adviseable,  therefore,  to  reduce  to 
certain  general  laws,  all  the  facts  which  experi- 
ence has  brought  to  light,  and  from  these,  to  de- 
duce a  mode  of  cure  accommodated  to  the  state 


299 

and  condition  of  each  patient.  It  is  oftentimes 
the  fault  of  observers,  that  while  they  carefully 
treasure  up  all  facts  that  fall  under  their  notice, 
they  seem  quite  regardless  of  the  principles 
which  these  facts  are  calculated  to  suggest  and 
support.  But  the  establishment  of  just  princi- 
ples, besides  being  the  proper  and  natural  end 
of  observations  and  facts,  is  certainly  what  con- 
fers on  them  their  highest  value. 


THE  END 


KIMBER,  CONRAD,  tf  CO. 

HAVE    FOR    SALE,    A   FEW  COPIES  OF 

A   TREATISE 
ON  FRACTURES,  LUXATIONS,  AND 

OTHER  AFFECTIONS  OF   THE  BONES, 
BY  P.  J.  DESAULT, 

SURGEON    IN    CHIEF    TO    THE    HOTEL-DIEU   OF    PARIS, 

Wherein  his  Opinions  and  Practice,  in  such  Cases,  are  stated  and 
exemplified. 

EDITED  BY  XAV.  BICHAT WITH  PLATES. 


TRANSLATED  FROM  THE  FRENCH, 

BY  CHARLES  CALDWELL,  M.  D. 


WITH  NOTES, 

AND  AN  APPENDIX 

Containing"  several  late  improvements  in  Surgery 
PRICE  2  DOLLS.  50  CENTS. 


•oqijmod  oaa  m 


w 


*****  s**0